Dell EMC RecoverPoint

Version 5.1

Administrator's Guide
P/N 302-003-960
Rev 03
October 2019
 Copyright © 2017-2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.

Dell believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information is subject to change without notice.

THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS-IS.” DELL MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
WITH RESPECT TO THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. USE, COPYING, AND DISTRIBUTION OF ANY DELL SOFTWARE DESCRIBED
IN THIS PUBLICATION REQUIRES AN APPLICABLE SOFTWARE LICENSE.

Dell Technologies, Dell, EMC, Dell EMC and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. Other trademarks may be the property
of their respective owners. Published in the USA.

Dell EMC
Hopkinton, Massachusetts 01748-9103
1-508-435-1000 In North America 1-866-464-7381
www.DellEMC.com

2 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CONTENTS

Figures 9

Tables 11

Preface 13

Chapter 1 Getting Started 15

The RecoverPoint interfaces............................................................................. 16
Logging into RecoverPoint................................................................................ 16
The Getting Started wizard............................................................................... 16
Add Licenses screen............................................................................. 17
Enable Support screen..........................................................................17
Register RecoverPoint screen.............................................................. 18
The Unisphere for RecoverPoint interface........................................................ 19
The RecoverPoint workflow.............................................................................. 19
First steps in RecoverPoint.................................................................. 20
Configuring replication.........................................................................20
Performing recovery activities............................................................. 20
Monitoring and managing RecoverPoint............................................... 21
System analysis.................................................................................... 21
RecoverPoint support...........................................................................21

Chapter 2 Dashboard 23
The RecoverPoint Dashboard........................................................................... 24
Overall Health................................................................................................... 25
RPA Clusters Map................................................................................25
Multipath monitoring............................................................................26
Alerts................................................................................................... 27
System Traffic..................................................................................... 28
Consistency Group Transfer Status..................................................... 28
System Limits................................................................................................... 30
System.................................................................................................30
Groups................................................................................................. 30
Storage.................................................................................................31
Splitters................................................................................................31
System Events..................................................................................................32
Display events...................................................................................... 32
Display additional event information.....................................................32
Sort events.......................................................................................... 32
Filter events......................................................................................... 33
Copy an event to the clipboard............................................................ 34
Collect system information around a specific event............................. 34

Chapter 3 Protection 37
RecoverPoint Protection.................................................................................. 38

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 3

Contents

Protect Volumes............................................................................................... 39
How to protect volumes.......................................................................39
Policy Templates.............................................................................................. 55
Display all policy templates.................................................................. 55
Create new policy templates................................................................55
Modify existing policy templates.......................................................... 56
Remove a policy template.................................................................... 57
Apply a policy template to a new consistency group............................ 57
Apply a policy template to an existing consistency group.....................57
Group Sets....................................................................................................... 59
How group sets work........................................................................... 59
Display all group sets........................................................................... 59
Create a group set............................................................................... 60
Edit a group set.................................................................................... 61
Remove a group set............................................................................. 62
Enable or disable all groups in a group set............................................ 62
Pause or start transfer for all groups in a group set............................. 62
Apply a bookmark to all of the groups in a group set............................ 63
Initiate recovery activities for a group set............................................ 63
Manage Protection........................................................................................... 63
The RecoverPoint protection policies.................................................. 64
Monitoring and managing protection....................................................73
Monitoring and managing groups......................................................... 73
Monitoring and managing copies..........................................................89
Modifying consistency groups..............................................................99
Modifying copies................................................................................. 113
Modifying links.................................................................................... 115
Modifying replication sets................................................................... 116
Modifying journals............................................................................... 119
Modifying snapshots........................................................................... 121

Chapter 4 Recovery 127

RecoverPoint Recovery...................................................................................128
Test a Copy..................................................................................................... 128
How to test a copy............................................................................. 128
Test a Copy and Recover Production.............................................................. 132
How to recover production................................................................. 132
Test a Copy and Fail Over................................................................................134
How to fail over.................................................................................. 135
Manage Recovery............................................................................................138
Testing a copy.................................................................................... 139
Failing over......................................................................................... 139
Recovering production....................................................................... 140

Chapter 5 RPA Clusters 141

RecoverPoint clusters..................................................................................... 142
General Cluster Info.........................................................................................142
Storage........................................................................................................... 145
Display registered storage.................................................................. 146
Register storage................................................................................. 147
Unregister storage..............................................................................152
Edit storage registration details.......................................................... 152
Display registered resource pools....................................................... 154
Register resource pools...................................................................... 155

4 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Contents

Unregister resource pools...................................................................156

Splitters...........................................................................................................157
Display splitter information................................................................. 157
Display volume information................................................................. 158
Add splitters....................................................................................... 159
Remove splitters.................................................................................160
Attach volumes to the splitter............................................................. 161
Detach volumes from the splitter........................................................162
RPAs............................................................................................................... 162
Properties...........................................................................................163
Status.................................................................................................164
Interface.............................................................................................165
Traffic Statistics.................................................................................165
Usage Statistics..................................................................................167
vCenter Servers.............................................................................................. 169
Before you begin................................................................................ 169
Display vCenter Server information.................................................... 170
Register vCenter Server..................................................................... 170
Edit vCenter Server Registration.........................................................171
Remove vCenter Server...................................................................... 171
Rescan vCenter Server........................................................................171

Chapter 6 Admin 173

RecoverPoint Administration........................................................................... 174
Manage Licenses............................................................................................. 174
Install a license....................................................................................175
Remove licenses................................................................................. 176
Monitor your license limits.................................................................. 176
Export a detailed license report.......................................................... 176
Display your RecoverPoint license information....................................177
Register RecoverPoint.....................................................................................178
Register your RecoverPoint system....................................................179
Export the post-deployment form to a CSV file.................................. 182
Registering RecoverPoint by email or phone...................................... 183
Users and Security.......................................................................................... 183
Manage Users.....................................................................................184
Manage Roles..................................................................................... 187
Manage User Authentication.............................................................. 190
Change Password............................................................................... 194
Switch User........................................................................................195
Change Security Level........................................................................195
Change Idle Logout Time.................................................................... 196
System Analysis Tools..................................................................................... 196
Detect Bottlenecks.............................................................................196
Balance Load...................................................................................... 199
Collect System Information................................................................203
System Notifications...................................................................................... 209
Manage Event Filters..........................................................................210
Configure System Reports and Alerts.................................................219
Manage Call Home Events................................................................. 224

Chapter 7 Support 229

RecoverPoint Support.................................................................................... 230
RecoverPoint Documentation............................................................ 230

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 5

Contents

Online Support................................................................................... 230

The RecoverPoint Community............................................................ 231

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 233

Licensing RecoverPoint.................................................................................. 234
Before you begin................................................................................ 234
License RecoverPoint........................................................................ 234
Upgrade from RecoverPoint 4.0 or later............................................ 240
Upgrade from RecoverPoint versions prior to 4.0.............................. 240
Get licensing support......................................................................... 243
Notification of new RecoverPoint software releases.......................................243
The Upgrade Recommendation dialog box......................................... 243
What should I do when I see the Upgrade Recommendation dialog box?
...........................................................................................................244
Deciding whether you want to upgrade.............................................. 244
Upgrading your RecoverPoint environment........................................245
Set the time display of Unisphere for RecoverPoint........................................245
Change the display language of Unisphere for RecoverPoint.......................... 246
First-time initialization is taking too long.........................................................246
How does it work............................................................................... 246
Initialize from backup......................................................................... 247
Protecting your data during initialization.........................................................248
Host applications are hanging......................................................................... 248
When does application regulation happen?........................................ 248
How does application regulation work?.............................................. 248
How do I know application regulation is happening?.......................... 249
What can I do to stop my group from being regulated?......................249
One-phase distribution workarounds.............................................................. 249
Copy is being regulated...................................................................................249
When does control action regulation happen?................................... 249
How do I know control action regulation is happening?......................249
How does control action regulation work?......................................... 250
How do I release a copy from control action regulation?....................250
How do I verify that regulation is over?............................................. 250
Copy is experiencing a high load..................................................................... 250
How do I know a copy is experiencing a high load?............................ 250
What is a permanent high load?..........................................................251
When do permanent high loads occur?...............................................251
How do permanent high loads work?.................................................. 251
How can I tell a copy is under permanent high load?.......................... 251
What can I do to come out of permanent high load?...........................251
How do I verify that a permanent high load is over?.......................... 252
What is a temporary high load?..........................................................252
When do temporary high loads occur?...............................................252
How do temporary high loads work?.................................................. 252
How can I tell a copy is under temporary high load?.......................... 252
What should I know about temporary high loads?.............................. 253
How do I verify that a temporary high load is over?........................... 253
RPA keeps rebooting...................................................................................... 253
When does reboot regulation happen?...............................................253
How does reboot regulation work?.................................................... 253
How do I know reboot regulation is happening?................................. 253
What should I do to stop reboot regulation?...................................... 254
Host applications crash during initialization.....................................................254
Storage read-rate during initialization................................................ 254

6 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Contents

How does I/O throttling work?.......................................................... 254

When should I enable I/O throttling?................................................. 254
How do I enable I/O throttling?......................................................... 254
How do I check how throttling affects my system performance?...... 256
How can I tell whether or not I/O throttling is enabled?.................... 256
Add more LUNs than allowed per VNX storage group..................................... 256
How do I know I need more VNX LUNs?............................................ 257
What can I do if I need more VNX LUNs?...........................................257
How can I verify that the storage groups were added successfully?.. 257
Swap the LUN numbers of journal volumes.....................................................258
Find your array serial numbers........................................................................ 258
Find the serial numbers of VNX arrays............................................... 258
Find the serial numbers of Symmetrix arrays..................................... 259
Find the serial numbers of VPLEX arrays........................................... 259
Find your RPA cluster IDs............................................................................... 260
Find your XtremIO cluster IDs.........................................................................260
Find your XtremIO cluster IDs (PSNTs) in XtremIO........................... 260
Find your XtremIO cluster IDs (PSNTs) in RecoverPoint.................... 261
Understanding the RecoverPoint license......................................................... 261
Calculate your required journal size.................................................................265
Minimum journal size with snapshot consolidation............................. 265
MetroPoint group conversion..........................................................................272
Recovering from a cluster disaster..................................................................273

Chapter 9 Events 275

Normal Events................................................................................................ 276
Detailed events............................................................................................... 287
Advanced events.............................................................................................324

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 7

Contents

8 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

FIGURES

1 Getting Started Wizard Enable Support screen................................................................. 17

2 Identifying a distributed group...........................................................................................81
3 Identifying a distributed group...........................................................................................81
4 RPA Clusters: General Cluster Info.................................................................................. 143
5 RPA Clusters: Storage.....................................................................................................145
6 RPA Clusters: Splitters.................................................................................................... 157
7 License file format........................................................................................................... 261
8 Example licenses............................................................................................................. 262

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 9

Figures

10 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

TABLES

1 Dashboard options............................................................................................................ 24
2 Status icons...................................................................................................................... 26
3 Tooltip links.......................................................................................................................26
4 Transfer state................................................................................................................... 28
5 System LimitsSystem tab................................................................................................. 30
6 System LimitsGroup tab.................................................................................................... 31
7 System LimitsStorage tab ................................................................................................ 31
8 System LimitsSplitters tab.................................................................................................31
9 Protection options............................................................................................................ 38
10 Toolbar options................................................................................................................. 42
11 Group summary screen..................................................................................................... 53
12 Multiple consistency group actions................................................................................... 64
13 Group policies................................................................................................................... 65
14 Link policies.......................................................................................................................67
15 Copy policies.....................................................................................................................70
16 Journal policies................................................................................................................. 70
17 Status tab......................................................................................................................... 74
18 Status tab options when a group is selected..................................................................... 75
19 Priority setting default values........................................................................................... 79
20 Consolidated statistics output...........................................................................................82
21 Status tab......................................................................................................................... 89
22 Status tab options when a group is selected..................................................................... 90
23 Copy journal tab................................................................................................................94
24 Journal Tab: Snapshot Consolidation Progress information.............................................. 96
25 Journal tab image list........................................................................................................ 96
26 Options............................................................................................................................106
27 RPA cluster options......................................................................................................... 142
28 RPA cluster information...................................................................................................143
29 Storage information.........................................................................................................146
30 Resource pool storage information.................................................................................. 154
31 Volume information......................................................................................................... 159
32 RPA table information..................................................................................................... 162
33 Properties tab information...............................................................................................163
34 Status tab information.....................................................................................................164
35 Admin options.................................................................................................................. 174
36 Displayed license information...........................................................................................177
37 Pre-defined users............................................................................................................ 184
38 Pre-defined roles............................................................................................................. 188
39 Permissions..................................................................................................................... 188
40 Permission settings......................................................................................................... 189
41 LDAP settings..................................................................................................................192
42 Collect system information options.................................................................................208
43 Event Filter settings......................................................................................................... 211
44 Email settings.................................................................................................................. 213
45 Syslog settings................................................................................................................ 214
46 SNMP settings................................................................................................................ 215
47 RecoverPoint SNMP trap variables................................................................................. 216
48 System parameters sent to SyR......................................................................................220
49 Licensing support............................................................................................................243
50 Cluster information..........................................................................................................261
51 License file variables....................................................................................................... 262
52 Journal size with snapshot consolidation equation legend...............................................266
53 Normal scope events.......................................................................................................276

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 11

Tables

54 Detailed scope events..................................................................................................... 287

55 Advanced scope events.................................................................................................. 324

12 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

Preface

As part of an effort to improve our product lines, we periodically release revisions of our software
and hardware. Therefore, some functions described in this document might not be supported by all
versions of the software or hardware currently in use. The product release notes provide the most
up-to-date information on product features.
Contact your technical support professional if a product does not function properly or does not
function as described in this document.
Note: This document was accurate at publication time. Go to Online Support (https://
support.emc.com) to ensure that you are using the latest version of this document.
Purpose
This document is part of the RecoverPoint documentation set and includes conceptual information
on managing a RecoverPoint system.
Audience
This document is intended for use by storage administrators who are responsible for administering
a RecoverPoint system.
Related documentation
The following publications provide additional information:
l RecoverPoint Release Notes
l RecoverPoint Deployment Manager Release Notes
l RecoverPoint Customer Installation and Upgrade Guide
l RecoverPoint Installation and Deployment Guide
l RecoverPoint Product Guide
l RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide
l RecoverPoint CLI Reference Guide
l RecoverPoint Performance Guide
l RecoverPoint REST API Programming Guide
l RecoverPoint Security Configuration Guide
l RecoverPoint Simple Support Matrix
In addition to the core documents, we also provide White papers and Technical Notes on
applications, arrays, and splitters.
Typographical conventions
This document uses the following style conventions:
Bold Used for names of interface elements, such as names of windows,
dialog boxes, buttons, fields, tab names, key names, and menu paths
(what the user specifically selects or clicks)

Italic Used for full titles of publications referenced in text

Monospace Used for:
l System code

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 13

Preface

l System output, such as an error message or script

l Pathnames, filenames, prompts, and syntax
l Commands and options

Monospace italic Used for variables

Monospace bold Used for user input

[] Square brackets enclose optional values

| Vertical bar indicates alternate selections - the bar means “or”

{} Braces enclose content that the user must specify, such as x or y or

z

... Ellipses indicate nonessential information omitted from the example

Where to get help

Technical support, product, and licensing information can be obtained as follows:
Product information
For documentation, release notes, software updates, or information about products, go to
Online Support at https://support.emc.com.

Technical support
Go to Online Support and click Service Center. You will see several options for contacting
Technical Support. Note that to open a service request, you must have a valid support
agreement. Contact your sales representative for details about obtaining a valid support
agreement or with questions about your account.

Your comments
Your suggestions will help us continue to improve the accuracy, organization, and overall quality of
the user publications. Send your opinions of this document to techpubcomments@emc.com.

14 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 1
Getting Started

This section describes the first steps to setting up your RecoverPoint system.

l The RecoverPoint interfaces................................................................................................. 16

l Logging into RecoverPoint.....................................................................................................16
l The Getting Started wizard....................................................................................................16
l The Unisphere for RecoverPoint interface............................................................................. 19
l The RecoverPoint workflow...................................................................................................19

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 15

Getting Started

The RecoverPoint interfaces

Unisphere for RecoverPoint
A graphical user interface (GUI) for administrators of the RecoverPoint system. Initial setup,
as well as the routine monitoring and managing of the RecoverPoint system, can all be
performed through Unisphere for RecoverPoint.
The RecoverPoint Command Line Interface (CLI)
For IT professionals and advanced users who want to run automated scripts and perform
batch functions on their RecoverPoint copies. For instructions on how to launch and use the
RecoverPoint CLI, see the RecoverPoint Command Line Interface Reference Guide for the
RecoverPoint version.

The RecoverPoint REST (REpresentative State Transfer) API

For developers who want to integrate RecoverPoint with their own applications and to write
scripts to automate RecoverPoint operations. For instructions on how to use the
RecoverPoint API, see the RecoverPoint REST API Programming Guide for the RecoverPoint
version.

Logging into RecoverPoint

Before you begin
l Obtain your RPA cluster management IP.
l Optionally obtain your RecoverPoint username and password.
Procedure
1. Open a web browser and enter the cluster management IP into your browser address bar.
The RecoverPoint login screen is displayed.
2. In the RecoverPoint login screen, log in with your username and password, or enter the
default RecoverPoint Username admin and Password admin.
3. If:
l this is your first time logging into Unisphere for RecoverPoint, The Getting Started
wizard on page 16 is displayed. Use the Getting Started wizard to add your
RecoverPoint licenses, enable support, and register your RecoverPoint system.
l this is not your first time logging into Unisphere for RecoverPoint and a new version of
RecoverPoint is available The Upgrade Recommendation dialog box on page 243 is
displayed.
Results
Unisphere for RecoverPoint is displayed.
After you finish
Select RPA Clusters > RPA-Cluster-Name > RPAs. Click the tab of each RPA cluster and ensure
that a green checkbox appears in both the Status and Connectivity columns of all RPAs at each
RPA cluster.

The Getting Started wizard

The first time that you access Unisphere for RecoverPoint after initial system installation or
upgrade, the Getting Started Wizard is displayed to guide you, step-by-step through the process

16 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Getting Started

of installing your RecoverPoint licenses, enabling support and registering your RecoverPoint
system. Click Next Add Licenses in the first screen of the Getting Started Wizard to get started.

Add Licenses screen

About this task
The Add Licenses screen allows you to install RecoverPoint licenses and display license
information.

Note: The settings in the Add Licenses screen are displayed both through the Getting Started
Wizard the first time you launch Unisphere for RecoverPoint, and by selecting Admin >
Manage Licenses.
Procedure
1. Install a license on page 175.
2. Click Next Enable Support to go to the Enable Support screen on page 17.

Enable Support screen

The Enable Support screen allows you to configure the RecoverPoint system reports mechanism
(SyR) and provide one-way communication between a RecoverPoint installation and the System
Reports database.
About this task
Figure 1 Getting Started Wizard Enable Support screen

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 17

Getting Started

Note: The settings in the Enable Support screen are displayed both through the Getting
Started Wizard the first time you launch Unisphere for RecoverPoint, and by selecting
Admin > System Notifications > Configure System Reports and Alerts.
Procedure
1. Configure system reports and alerts on page 221.
2. Ensure that system reports are configured correctly on page 223 by clicking the Test
Connectivity button.
Note: The connectivity test, if successful, sends a call home event (number 30999) to
the Install Base and opens a Service Request with Customer Support. If you provide an
email address, Customer Support sends an email to verify that the system reports
mechanism (SyR) has been successfully configured.

3. Click Next Register RecoverPoint.

Register RecoverPoint screen

The Register RecoverPoint screen allows you to fill out and automatically send the RecoverPoint
post-deployment form to the RecoverPoint IB group.
About this task

Note: The settings in the Register RecoverPoint screen are displayed through both the
Getting Started Wizard the first time you launch Unisphere for RecoverPoint, and by
selecting Admin > Register RecoverPoint each subsequent time Unisphere for RecoverPoint
is launched.
Procedure
1. Register your RecoverPoint system on page 179.
2. Click the Finish button to close the Getting Started Wizard and apply your changes.
A dialog box is displayed allowing you to decide whether or not you would like to display the
Getting Started Wizard in subsequent RecoverPoint launches.

18 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Getting Started

NOTICE It is not recommended to select the checkbox in the pop-up until you have
completed the tasks of adding your licenses, enabling RecoverPoint support, and
registering your RecoverPoint system.

The Unisphere for RecoverPoint interface

The RecoverPoint interface has been developed using Adobe Flex technology and simplified to
promote ease of use and a common user experience between products. The RecoverPoint wizards
are streamlined and optimized for a simpler and more intuitive user experience, targeted at the IT
generalist. The Dashboard provides an overview of system health at a glance, and all of the
information displayed through Unisphere for RecoverPoint is consistently auto-refreshed.
Note: Up to 20 instances of Unisphere for RecoverPoint can be run concurrently on each RPA
cluster.

The Status Bar that consistently appears at the bottom of the interface displays the numbers of
alerts that are currently in the system, and their severity (for example, Alerts: 1 Critical, 3 Errors,
3 Warnings. When you click the status bar from any screen in the application, you are redirected
back to The RecoverPoint Dashboard on page 24.

The RecoverPoint workflow

Perform the following steps after completing the RecoverPoint system installation process, and
before starting to configure your replication environment:
1. One time only, you will need to Step 1: Quickly access entitlements on page 236 and Step 2 -
Activate the entitlements on page 237 on support.emc.com.
2. Install your RecoverPoint licenses, enable support, and register your RecoverPoint system
using the The Getting Started wizard on page 16.
3. (Optionally) Change the display language of Unisphere for RecoverPoint on page 246 and Set
the time display of Unisphere for RecoverPoint on page 245.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 19

Getting Started

4. Manage Users on page 184, Manage Roles on page 187, and Manage User Authentication on
page 190.
5. Register storage on page 147 and Register resource pools on page 155.
6. (Optionally) Change Security Level on page 195.
When you're done, configure the RecoverPoint system to start protecting your data. This process
is described step-by-step in Protect Volumes on page 39.
In case of a disaster, or simply to perform routine maintenance on your production site, you can
test a copy, recover production or fail over operations to another site. Use cases and procedures
for doing so are outlined in RecoverPoint Recovery on page 128.
Once replication has been configured and started, you normally won’t need more than minimal
involvement with the system.
To troubleshoot your system, if required, refer to The RecoverPoint Dashboard on page 24,
Manage Protection on page 63 and Manage Recovery on page 138.
The types of event notification in RecoverPoint, and how to configure events is detailed in System
Notifications on page 209.

Note: RecoverPoint contains intelligent System Analysis Tools on page 196. Use these tools to
help you make your replication environment as efficient as possible.

First steps in RecoverPoint

About this task
Perform the following steps after completing the installation process, and before starting to
configure your replication environment.
Procedure
1. Access your licenses and activate them on support.emc.com.
2. Install your RecoverPoint licenses, enable support, and register your RecoverPoint system
using the Getting Started Wizard.
3. (Optionally) Set the language and the time display.
4. Manage users, manage roles, and manage user authentication.
5. Register storage and Register resource pools.
6. (Optionally) Change the user security level.

Configuring replication
About this task
After you have completed the First steps in RecoverPoint, configure the RecoverPoint system to
start replication. The entire process is described step-by-step in Protecting Volumes.

Performing recovery activities

About this task
In case of a disaster, or simply to perform routine maintenance on your production site, you may
wish to test a copy, recover production or fail over operations to another site. Use cases and
procedures for doing so are outlined here.

20 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Getting Started

Monitoring and managing RecoverPoint

About this task
Once replication has been configured and started, you normally won’t need more than minimal
involvement with the system.
To troubleshoot your system, if required, refer to The RecoverPoint Dashboard, Managing
Protection and Managing Recovery.
The types of event notification in RecoverPoint, and how to configure events is detailed in System
Notifications on page 209.

System analysis
About this task
RecoverPoint contains intelligent System Analysis Tools on page 196 to help you make your
replication environment as efficient as possible.

RecoverPoint support
About this task
If you need support, use the Support tab to easily access all of the RecoverPoint support options
on support.emc.com.
For troubleshooting issues, be sure to collect system information before contacting Customer
Support.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 21

Getting Started

22 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 2
Dashboard

This section describes the RecoverPoint dashboard and how to use it to analyze and monitor
replication in RecoverPoint.

l The RecoverPoint Dashboard................................................................................................ 24

l Overall Health........................................................................................................................25
l System Limits........................................................................................................................30
l System Events...................................................................................................................... 32

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 23

Dashboard

The RecoverPoint Dashboard

The RecoverPoint Dashboard provides a high-level overview of the RecoverPoint system. It
presents important system information to help you analyze and monitor your RecoverPoint
environment.

Table 1 Dashboard options

Option When to use

Overall Health To graphically display an overview of the current status of the RecoverPoint
system.

System Limits To monitor how close you are to breaching your system limitations.

System To display the RecoverPoint event log.

Events

24 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Dashboard

Overall Health
The Overall Health tab graphically displays an overview of the current status of the RecoverPoint
system. The overall health tab contains widgets that allow you to easily monitor and analyze the
current state of the system.

The Overall Health tab of the Dashboard contains the following widgets:
l RPA Clusters Map on page 25
l Alerts on page 27
l System Traffic on page 28
l Consistency Group Transfer Status on page 28

RPA Clusters Map

The RPA Clusters Map widget provides a schematic representation of all RPA clusters in the
RecoverPoint system, the connectivity between them, and any system alerts received by the
clusters.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 25

Dashboard

The RPA clusters map displays the type of connection that exists between all RPA clusters in the
system. A dashed line represents an IP (WAN) connection and a solid line represents a Fibre
Channel (LAN) connection.
The RPA clusters map also displays the status of all major components in the system that are seen
by the RPA cluster, including; hosts, switches, storage devices, individual RPAs, the LAN, and the
WAN.
When the system detects a problem with one of these major components, the RPA clusters map
displays:

Table 2 Status icons

Icon Description

An error icon on each component that is not functioning properly.

A warning icon on each component that has warnings associated with it.

The status of a component, particularly until you have completed logging in to

the system, may also be Unknown. In that case, the icon is displayed on the
component.

Note: The errors and warnings in the RPA clusters map widget are also displayed in the Alerts
on page 27 widget.
Hover your cursor over an RPA cluster in the map to display a tooltip with the following links:

Table 3 Tooltip links

Option Description

Display Alerts To display the Alerts dialog box containing the number of alerts registered by
the RPA cluster.

Click Details in the Alerts dialog box to display the alert texts.

Display RPA To display the General Cluster Info on page 142.

Cluster
Details

Multipath monitoring
About this task
When multipathing monitoring is active, the system analyzes network errors at the level of
individual paths, and generates a warning in the RPA Clusters Map whenever there is not full
redundancy between the RPA and splitters or volumes. Full redundancy is defined as follows:
l For RPA-to-volume links, there must be at least two distinct paths between each RPA and
volume; that is, each RPA has access to at least two storage WWNs (and controllers, where
relevant) via non-overlapping paths.
l For RPA-to-splitter links, there must be at least two distinct paths between each RPA and
each splitter using different RPA ports and host (or switch) WWNs.
When RPA Multipath Monitoring is enabled, the system issues a warning upon logging in regarding
any existing links without full redundancy. In addition, warning events are written to the log.
By default, multipath monitoring is active for all copies, for links both to storage and to splitters.

26 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Dashboard

To enable or disable RPA multipath monitoring, use the config_multipath_monitoring CLI

command.
Note: Path information is displayed in the Storage screen.

Alerts
The Alerts widget provides a graphical overview of system health categorized by alert level.

Click the More details link at the bottom-right corner of the graph to display the alerts table.
The alerts table contains system errors and warnings. The errors and warnings are composed of
messages from the System Limits screen, and other general system warnings.

Hover over an error or warning in the table to display a tooltip containing the error or warning
properties.
When relevant, the dialog will show a severity, category, relevant RPA cluster, and description of
the error or warning.
Note: A system limit with a status of Critical equates to an Error in the alerts table. A system
limit with a status of Major or Minor equates to a Warning in the alerts table.
Click the Less details link at the bottom of the alerts table to close the alerts table and display the
Alerts widget.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 27

Dashboard

System Traffic
The System Traffic widget provides a graphical overview of the amount of SAN and WAN traffic
passing through each RPA cluster.

Consistency Group Transfer Status

The Consistency Group Transfer Status widget displays the transfer state of all consistency
groups in the RecoverPoint system.

Each consistency group and consistency group copy can be in any one of the following transfer
states:

Table 4 Transfer state

Transfer Description
State

Active Data is being transferred asynchronously to a copy.

Active Data is being transferred synchronously to a copy.

(Synchronize
d)

Paused Data is not being transferred to a copy, because transfer has been paused by
the user.

Paused by Data is not being transferred to a copy, because transfer has been paused by
system the system.

28 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Dashboard

Table 4 Transfer state (continued)

Transfer Description
State

Init (n%) A copy is being initialized, or undergoing a full sweep or volume sweep.

High-load The system enters a permanent high-load state while data is being transferred
to a copy.

High-load (n The system enters a temporary high-load state while data is being transferred
%) to a copy.

Replicating The link is replicating in snap-based replication mode.

snap

Snap idle The link is about to begin or has completed a snap-based replication process.

N/A Data is not being transferred to a copy, because the copy has been disabled
by the user.

The pie chart in the consistency group transfer status widget presents a breakdown of the
consistency groups in the system based on their current data transfer states, as follows:
l Active (green) - includes active, active (synchronized), Replicating snap and Snap idle
l Error (red)
l Init (orange) - includes initializing, high load, and high load (n%)
l Paused (yellow) - includes paused and paused by system
l Disabled (grey) - includes N/A
l Other (brown) - includes flushing, flushing buffer, flushing remote buffer to journal, and
unknown
Note: A consistency group’s transfer state is determined by its most severe link state. For
example, in a RecoverPoint system that is replicating to two copies, if one link is paused and
one link is active, the transfer state will be set as paused.
If there are no consistency groups in the system, the chart will be replaced by the text “No
consistency groups”.
Hover your mouse over a transfer state in the chart to see the names of the consistency groups in
that state.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 29

Dashboard

System Limits
The System Limits tab monitors important system values to let the user know how close they are
to their limits. The limits may be determined by the system, policies, licensing, or limitations of
external technologies.

You can sort the system limits by clicking in a column header.

You can filter monitored limits by clicking the Filter icon in the upper-right corner and entering
text to filter by in the text box.
All status severities of minor, major, and critical are also displayed in the Alerts widget.

System
The following information is displayed in the System tab:

Table 5 System Limits > System tab

Column Description

Status OK, minor, major, critical. Indicates how close a monitored setting is to its
limit.

Description The description of the monitored system limit.

RPA Cluster The relevant RPA cluster.

RPA The relevant RecoverPoint appliance.

Current Value of The current value of the setting and its limit.
Limit

Groups
The following information is displayed in the Groups tab:

30 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Dashboard

Table 6 System Limits > Group tab

Column Description

Status OK, minor, major, critical. Indicates how close a monitored setting is to its
limit.

Description The description of the monitored system limit.

Group The relevant consistency group.

Copy The relevant consistency group copy.

Current Value The current value of the setting and its limit.
of Limit

Storage
The following information is displayed in the Storage tab:

Table 7 System Limits > Storage tab

Column Description

Status OK, minor, major, critical. Indicates how close a monitored setting is to its
limit.

Description The description of the monitored system limit.

RPA Cluster The relevant RPA cluster.

Array The name of the relevant storage array.

Current Value The current value of the setting and its limit.
of Limit

Splitters
The following information is displayed in the Splitters tab (not relevant to XtremIO):

Table 8 System Limits > Splitters tab

Column Description

Status OK, minor, major, critical. Indicates how close a monitored setting is to its
limit.

Description The description of the monitored system limit, including:

l The number of RPA clusters attached to the splitter.
l The total number of volumes attached to the splitter.

RPA Cluster The relevant RPA cluster.

Splitter The name of the relevant splitter.

Current Value The current value of the setting and its limit.
of Limit

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 31

Dashboard

System Events
The System Events tab displays the RecoverPoint event log which contains all events logged by
the RecoverPoint system, in the order that they are logged. A total of 9000 events can be
displayed in the event log.

Display events
About this task
To display system events; select Dashboard > System Events tab.
The RecoverPoint event log is displayed, containing the last 9000 events logged in the
RecoverPoint system. Each event in the event log is displayed along with its relevant event ID,
summary, level, scope, point in time, RPA cluster, and topic.
Note: By default, only Normal scope events are displayed, but you can also Filter events on
page 33 to display Detailed events.

Display additional event information

About this task
When an event is selected in the event log, the Details tab under the event log displays additional
event information. To display more information, such as a recommended user action in cases that
warrant user intervention, click the More Information tab.

Sort events
About this task
To sort the events in the event log by ID, summary, level, scope, point in time, RPA cluster, or
topic, click the relevant column header but you can also Filter events on page 33 based on
advanced criteria.

32 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Dashboard

Filter events
About this task
Filters the events in the System Events on page 32 log, and saves the event filter settings for the
current RecoverPoint user.
Procedure
1. Select Dashboard and click the System Events tab.
2. Click Filter Events. The Event Filter dialog box is displayed.

3. Filter the events:

Setting Values

From The date and time (in GMT) from which events are to be displayed.
Select Unbounded to display the 9000 events preceding the date and time in
the To field.

To The date and time (in GMT) until which events are to be displayed. Select
Unbounded to display all events up until the current date and time.

Events to The IDs of the events that should not be displayed. Multiple event IDs can be
Exclude entered. Separate multiple event IDs with a comma.

Topics The topic of the events to display in the event log. Valid values are:
l RPA cluster
l Splitter
l Consistency group
l Management
l RPA
l Array

Scope The scope of the events to display in the event log:

l Normal: To display only the root cause for an entire set of Detailed and
Advanced events. In most cases, these events are sufficient for effective
monitoring of system behavior.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 33

Dashboard

Setting Values

l Detailed: To display all events.

l Advanced: In specific support cases, Customer Support may ask you to
display events in an Advanced scope. These events contain information
that is intended primarily for the technical support engineers.

Level The level of the events to display in the event log:

l Info: Messages are informative in nature, usually referring to changes in
the configuration, or normal system state.
l Warning: Message indicates a warning, usually referring to a transient
state or an abnormal condition that does not degrade system
performance.
l Error: Message indicates an important event that is likely to disrupt normal
system behavior and/or performance.

Containing Type the terms that must exist in the event summary in order for the event to
the text be displayed in the event log. Use commas to separate multiple terms. Select:
l Match all to display all events containing all of the specified terms in the
event summary.
l Match any to display all events containing any of the specified terms in the
event summary.

Reset to To reset all of the settings in the Event Filter dialog box to their default
Default settings.

OK To close the Event Filter dialog box, and apply the specified settings.

Cancel To close the Event Filter dialog box, without applying the specified settings.

Copy an event to the clipboard

Procedure
1. Select Dashboard and click the System Events tab.
2. Select the event in the event log and click Copy to Clipboard.

Results
The event info that is copied to the clipboard is in the following format:

Summary: RPA is successfully communicating with its cluster.

Level: Clear
ID: 3000
Topic: RPA
Scope: Normal
Point in Time (GMT): 4/17/2013 8:46:35 AM
RPA Cluster: London
Description : RPA is successfully communicating with its cluster(RPA2)

Collect system information around a specific event

Procedure
1. Attach volumes to the splitter on page 161 for all splitters in the system.
2. Select Dashboardand click the System Events tab.

34 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Dashboard

3. Select an event in the event log.

4. Click Collect System Information. The collect system information wizard is displayed and
the collection start and end fields are automatically set to 10 minutes before and after the
selected event.
5. Continue from step 3 of Collect system information on page 204.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 35

Dashboard

36 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 3
Protection

This section describes how to protect volumes, and how to monitor and manage protection and
consistency.

l RecoverPoint Protection....................................................................................................... 38
l Protect Volumes....................................................................................................................39
l Policy Templates................................................................................................................... 55
l Group Sets............................................................................................................................ 59
l Manage Protection................................................................................................................63

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 37

Protection

RecoverPoint Protection
In Unisphere for RecoverPoint, data protection is guided by wizards, and performed through the
Protection menu.

Table 9 Protection options

Option When to Use

Protect To add a new consistency group and define its protection plan.
Volumes Displays the Protect Volumes wizard to guide you through the process of
defining the production and its protection plan, the copies and their protection
plans, and the production and copy journals and their protection plans.

Policy To view or modify existing protection policy templates, or create a new

Templates protection policy template for copies or links.

Group Sets To create or modify sets of consistency groups, perform recovery activities or
periodically bookmark the same consistent point in time, across volumes in
multiple groups, simultaneously.

Manage To manage and monitor existing consistency groups and their protection
Protection plans, control transfer, or bookmark consistent points in time across groups
and sets of groups.

38 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Protect Volumes
Use Protection > Protect Volumes to create consistency groups (CGs) to protect your volumes.
In RecoverPoint, CGs are used to configure protection policies, and set RPO and RTO policies
according to specific resource allocation and prioritization.

How to protect volumes

Creates a new consistency group.
Before you begin
l Journal volumes can be automatically provisioned (except VMAX3/AF). To automatically
provision journal volumes, RecoverPoint requires dedicated resource pools. If you are planning
to use the automatic journal provisioning feature, make sure you have dedicated resource pools
on storage. You must register storage and register resource pools to enable automatic volume
provisioning.
Note: You do not need to dedicate resource pools for XtremIO arrays.

l For RecoverPoint with Unity, VNXe, or VNX with RecoverPoint/SE licenses, there is a
limitation of one array per side. If you have a local and a remote copy, make sure the local copy
is stored on the same Unity/VNXe/VNX array as the production copy.
l Ensure you have your RecoverPoint environment planning document describing the groups and
journals you will need to create, the volumes that you will need to define in each, and the RPAs
that will handle the data transfer. If you do not have this document, contact your RecoverPoint
account executive.
Your environment planning document should detail:
n The number of consistency groups that you will need, and their names.
n The LUNs to include in each group, and at each copy.
n The journal LUNs at each copy.
n Which consistency groups to set as distributed.
n The required RPO and RTO settings per consistency group.
n The RPA that will handle the replication of each group.
n The priority of each consistency group with relation to the other groups in the system.
l Decide whether you will want to Initialize from backup on page 247, and prepare accordingly.
When a consistency group is first created, or a replication set is first added to the system, the
system automatically starts a first-time initialization process at the copies (that is,

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 39

Protection

synchronizing the copy volumes with the production volumes by sending the complete image
of each production volume to each copy’s storage).
Depending on the amount of data being transferred, this process can be both time-consuming
and bandwidth-consuming. To save time and bandwidth, see First-time initialization is taking
too long on page 246.
l If one volume at a copy is on an XtremIO array, all other XtremIO volumes at that copy must be
on the same array.
l If one volume at a copy is on a VMAX3 or VMAX/AF array, all other VMAX3/AF volumes at
that copy must be on the same array.
l Ensure you have mapped all replication LUNs to RecoverPoint WWNs. Only the volumes that
are mapped and zoned to the RPA cluster are displayed in the available volumes list in
RecoverPoint.
Note: In RecoverPoint/SE only, all of the volumes of the Unity or VNX array are displayed
in the available volumes list.
l In VNX storage systems:
n There is a limit on the number of LUNs that are supported per storage group (see the
RecoverPoint Release Notes for this limit).
n If you need more LUNs than are currently available to support your replication sets and
journals, either because you have calculated your system needs or because you have
received a message that you have exceeded “the maximum number of supported LUNs”,
you may be able to create additional storage groups, according to the procedure presented
in Add more LUNs than allowed per VNX storage group on page 256.
l The Unity/VNXe storage system does not use storage groups.
l In Symmetrix VMAX2 splitter environments:
n Volumes attached to VNX splitters and volumes attached to Symmetrix splitters may be
mixed in one consistency group. See the RecoverPoint Deploying with Symmetrix VMAX2
Arrays and Splitter Technical Notes for other splitter-specific limitations.
n If any volume added is a device on a Symmetrix VMAX2 10K, 20K or 40K array, refer to
“Device Tagging” in the RecoverPoint Deploying with Symmetrix VMAX2 Arrays and Splitter
Technical Notes.
l In VNX splitter environments:
n The same consistency group can contain volumes attached to multiple splitters.
n The same consistency group can contain volumes using a VNX splitter to split writes to one
RPA cluster and volumes using a different splitter type to split writes to a different RPA
cluster.
l In Unity/VNXe splitter environments, a consistency group can contain only volumes attached
to Unity/VNXe splitters.
l In VPLEX splitter environments:
n The VPLEX consistency group name will only be displayed in the VPLEX Group column of
the volume list if you Attach volumes to the splitter on page 161 for the VPLEX splitter
(including certificate).
n After you register your VPLEX storage, you will not be able to select VPLEX volumes and
non-VPLEX volumes in the same consistency group copy. It is recommended that all
volumes in a VPLEX consistency group be configured in a single consistency group copy,
and all volumes in a non-VPLEX consistency group be configured in another consistency
group copy.

40 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

n A VPLEX MetroPoint consistency group can contain a maximum of one remote copy and
from zero to two local copies. If there is no remote copy, there must be two local copies,
one at each side of the VPLEX Metro.
n To turn a non-MetroPoint group into a MetroPoint group, when the production volume is a
VPLEX distributed volume and there exists no more than one remote copy, Add a copy to a
group on page 101.
n To turn a MetroPoint group into a non-MetroPoint group, Remove a copy from a group on
page 107.
l For replicating Oracle databases, see the instructions on how to replicate an Oracle database,
including using Oracle hot backup procedures with RecoverPoint bookmarks for point-in-time
snapshots and quick testing and disaster recovery in the RecoverPoint Replicating Oracle with
RecoverPoint Technical Notes.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Protect Volumes.
2. In the Select Production Volumes screen:
a. Define the consistency group name, the production name, and the RPA cluster that will
manage the production.

Note: A MetroPoint Group checkbox is displayed if one or more distributed volumes

exists at the production copy, and is mapped to the RPA cluster of the production
copy. To create a MetroPoint group, select the MetroPoint group check box. When
selected, only VPLEX distributed volumes are displayed in the volume list.
Note: For VMAX3/AF, you assign protection per storage group, where each storage
group encompasses a set of volumes. Use the Volumes links in the Volumes Details
column to display details about the volumes in each storage group. If the Protection
Units parameter is displayed (that is, when both VMAX3/AF and other storage
systems are available), select Storage Groups. Then select your storage groups in

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 41

Protection

the storage group list.

b. Select your production volumes in the volume list.

Note: If one volume at a copy is on an XtremIO array, all other XtremIO volumes at
that copy must be on the same array. Use the toolbar at the top-right corner of the
screen to help you identify the volumes.
Note: If one volume at a copy is on a VMAX3 or VMAX/AF array, all other
VMAX3/AF volumes at that copy must be on the same array. Use the toolbar at the
top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the volumes.

Table 10 Toolbar options

Icon Description

To filter the volumes in the list by Size, Product, Vendor, Name, UID, LUN, or
VPLEX Group.
Note: The VPLEX Group column is only displayed after you Attach volumes to
the splitter on page 161 for your VPLEX splitter.

To select the table columns that you want to display.

Note: You can also click and drag the column dividers to make the columns
wider or thinner. In most cases, RecoverPoint will remember the column
width that you define, and display the columns accordingly in each
subsequent launch of this wizard.

To export the data in the volume list to a *.CSV file.

To display context-sensitive help for this wizard screen.

c. Optionally, click Modify Policies to define the group policies and copy policies now, or
skip this step and define the policies later.
The policy settings are optional. The default values provide a practical configuration. It is
recommended to accept the default settings unless there is a specific business need to
set other policies.

d. Click Next Define the Production Journal to select journal volumes that have already
been provisioned on storage.

42 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Defining the production journal

Use the Define Production Journal screen to define the production journal, after you have
manually provisioned it on storage.
Before you begin
l If your copy volumes are located on a Unity, VNXe, or VNX array and a resource pool has been
registered on the same array for the journal volume, select Automatically Provision Journal
Volumes to allow RecoverPoint to provision your journal volumes.
l Copy journal volumes have been manually provisioned on storage.
l For applications running on a host cluster, the journal volumes must not be resources of the
host cluster.
l When replication volumes are on VMAX3/AF storage, journal volumes at that copy may be on
the same or another VMAX3/AF array, or even on an array of a different storage type.
l If you selected the MetroPoint group checkbox in the previous screen of the wizard, the
Standby Production screen is displayed.

In the Standby Production screen, enter a name for the copy in the Standby production
copy name field before you continue with this procedure.
Procedure
1. Ensure Select Provisioned Journal Volumes is selected.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 43

Protection

2. Select the volumes to add to the journal.

For best performance, select volumes that are identical in size. If identically sized volumes
are not available, select volumes that are similar in size.
Note: The journal for an XtremIO array need not be larger than 2 GB for a copy with
non-distributed consistency groups, 40 GB for distributed consistency groups.
In RecoverPoint/CL and RecoverPoint/EX, only the volumes that are mapped and zoned to
the RPA cluster are displayed in the available volumes list.
In RecoverPoint/SE, all of the volumes of the supported Unity Series and VNX Series arrays
are displayed in the available volumes list.

3. Use the toolbar icons at the top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the required
volumes in the volume list. For best performance, select volumes that are identical in size. If
identically sized volumes are not available, select volumes that are similar in size.
Note: In RecoverPoint/CL and RecoverPoint/EX, only the volumes that are mapped and
zoned to the RPA cluster are displayed in the available volumes list. In RecoverPoint/SE,
all of the volumes of the supported Unity Series and VNX Series arrays are displayed in
the available volumes list.

4. Optionally, click Modify Policy to define the journal policies now, or skip this step and
define the policies later using the Manage Protection screen.
Note: The Modify Policy link is only enabled after volumes are selected in the volume
list.

5. Optionally, apply a policy template.

a. Use the Select Template drop-down to select one of your policy templates.
b. Click Load to load the settings in the template.
c. Click OK to apply the settings.
6. Click Next Add a Copy.

Automatically provisioning the production journal

Use the Journal Provisioning Method screen to automatically provision the production journal.
Before you begin
l Automatic journal provisioning is not supported on VMAX3/AF arrays.
l Ensure copy volumes are located on a Unity, VNXe, VNX, or XtremIO array.
l Ensure one or more resource pools have been registered on any Unity, VNXe, or VNX arrays
containing copy volumes.
l If you have an XtremIO copy, the following procedure is not relevant. Instead, ensure that the
option Automatically Provision Journal Volumes is selected, select the XtremIO array, click
Next Add a Copy and skip to Adding a copy in XtremIO on page 48.
Note: The journal size for automatically provisioned XtremIO journal volumes is set to 2 GB.

Procedure
1. Select Automatically Provision Journal Volumes.

44 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

2. Define the journal settings.

Option Description
Journal size Enter a value for the journal size to define an absolute journal size at the
copy.
Predicted Select this option and enter a value for predicted incoming write-rate
incoming write- and required protection window to have RecoverPoint calculate the
rate required journal size based on your consistency group’s predicted write-
rate and a required protection window.
As you change this value, the journal size that is required to sustain the
entered values for predicted incoming write-rate and the required
protection window is dynamically updated in the Calculated journal size
field.

Required Note: Only relevant if Predicted incoming write-rate is selected.

protection
window Enter a value for the required protection window to have RecoverPoint
calculate the required journal size based on your consistency group’s
predicted write-rate and a required protection window.
As you change this value, the journal size that is required to sustain the
entered values for predicted incoming write-rate and the required
protection window is dynamically updated in the Calculated journal size
field.

Tiering Policy (Optionally) Select one of the available tiering policies displayed in the
Resource pool provisioning information table below to automatically
apply the policy to the selected volumes.
Back to Select Go back to the previous screen and re-select the production volumes,
Production or (optionally) redefine the production protection policy.
Volumes

3. If there are Available Tiering Policies on storage, you can select a Tiering policy to apply
to the journal volumes from the combo-box at the bottom of the resource pool table now.
4. Select the relevant resource pool from the table.
The following information is displayed for each resource pool in the table:

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 45

Protection

Information Description
Name The name of the registered resource pool in the RecoverPoint
system.
Type The resource pool type. Valid resource pool types are:
l RAID groups
l Storage groups
l Datastores

Total Size The total capacity of the resource pool.

Available Size The total capacity of the resource pool minus the capacity of the
volumes that were already allocated in the resource pool.
Tiers The physical type of the storage. For example, Fibre Channel,
SATA, etc.
Available Tiering The tiering policies that are available on storage and can be
Policies automatically applied to volumes in RecoverPoint when users
automatically provision volumes.
Storage Name The name of the storage array in RecoverPoint.
Serial Number Serial number of the storage array.
Array Type The type of the array.
IP The array’s IP address.

5. Click Next Add a Copy.

Adding a copy
Procedure
1. In the Add a Copy screen:

a. Define the copy name and the RPA cluster that will manage the copy volumes.
Define the replication mode.

For each production volume, click the Select volume link to add a volume to the copy.
The selected volume is the volume that the production volume is replicated to.

46 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

The volume list is displayed. The volume list only contains volumes of sizes that are equal
to, or greater than, the specified production volume.
Note: If the copy array is VMAX3/AF, click the Select storage group link to identify
each storage group whose volumes are to be added to the copy. The production and
copy storage groups must be identical. In almost all cases, use the Automatically
match volumes button to match the volumes of the currently selected production
and copy storage groups. Only if you want to manually match volumes, click the
Select volume links to add individual volumes to the copy.
Note: If one volume in a copy is on an XtremIO array, all the volumes in the
consistency group at that copy must be on an XtremIO array. Similarly, If one volume
is on a VMAX3/AF array, then all the volumes in the consistency group at that copy
must be on the same VMAX3/AF array. If the copy is on an XtremIO or VMAX3/AF
array, it must be exactly the same size as all other copies in the consistency group. It
cannot be either larger or smaller.

Note: In RecoverPoint/CL and RecoverPoint/EX, only the volumes that are mapped
and zoned to the RPA cluster are displayed in the available volumes list. In
RecoverPoint/SE, all of the volumes of the supported Unity Series or VNX Series
array are displayed in the available volumes list.
Use the toolbar icons at the top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the
required volumes in the volume list. For best performance during failover, select volumes
that are the same size as the production volume. If volumes of the same size are not
available, select volumes that are as similar in size as possible.
NOTICE
You cannot proceed to the next step until the replication sets icon under the volume
list shows a green check mark to indicate that the number of replication sets is equal
to the number of production volumes.

b. Optionally, click Modify Policies to define the copy policies and link policies now, or skip
this step and define the policies later from the Manage Protection screen.
If you want to change the protection settings using policy templates, in the Link tab, use
the Select Template drop-down to select one of your templates. Click Load to load the
settings in the template and click OK to apply the settings.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 47

Protection

Note: The Modify Policy link is only enabled after volumes are selected in the
volume list. You can set a copy policy for the production, however, the copy policy of
the production is only relevant after failover, when the production becomes a copy.

c. Click Next Define Copy Journal and:

l Allow RecoverPoint to automatically provision the copy journal volumes.
or
l Select copy journal volumes that have already been provisioned on storage.

Adding a copy in XtremIO

About this task
Use the Add a Copy screen to provision XtremIO copy volumes.
Procedure
1. In the Add a Copy screen, define the copy name and the RPA cluster that will manage the
copy volumes:

The screen changes to allow you to Select Provisioned Copy Volumes or Automatically
Provision Copy Volumes.

2. When the screen changes:

a. Perform one of the following:

48 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

l Select Select Provisioned Copy Volumes and choose a production volume. Click
Select volume, choose the copy volume to which the production volume will
replicate, and skip to step 2.b on page 49.
If there are copy volumes in the system with the same names (case sensitive) and
sizes as production volumes, the system automatically matches them and displays the
copy volumes without you having to select the volume. You can change the copy
volume by clicking the copy volume name link.

l Select Automatically Provision Copy Volumes. The screen changes again.

Select an array from the Registered Storage table.

Optionally, use Expose Volumes to Initiator Groups. Clicking Expose Volumes to
Initiator Groups opens a popup screen displaying a list of Initiator Groups. The list
(which filters out Initiator Groups of RPAs) enables you to expose new auto provisioned
volumes to a specific host. By default, no Initiator Group is selected.

b. Select the replication mode.

3. Click Next Define Copy Journal and:
l Allow RecoverPoint to automatically provision the copy journal volumes.
or
l Select copy journal volumes that have already been provisioned on storage.

Defining the copy journal

Use the Define Copy Journal screen to define the copy journal, after you have manually
provisioned it on storage.
Before you begin
l Copy journal volumes have been manually provisioned on storage.
l For applications running on a host cluster, the journal volumes must not be resources of the
host cluster.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 49

Protection

Procedure
1. Ensure Select Provisioned Journal Volumes is selected.

2. Select the volumes to add to the journal.

Note: The journal for an XtremIO array need not be larger than 2 GB for a copy with
non-distributed consistency groups, 40 GB for distributed consistency groups.

3. Use the toolbar icons at the top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the required
volumes in the volume list. For best performance, select volumes that are identical in size. If
identically sized volumes are not available, select volumes that are similar in size.
Note: In RecoverPoint/CL and RecoverPoint/EX, only the volumes that are mapped and
zoned to the RPA cluster are displayed in the available volumes list. In RecoverPoint/SE,
all of the volumes of the supported Unity Series or VNX Series array are displayed in the
available volumes list.

4. Optionally, click Modify Policy to define the journal policies now, or skip this step and
define the policies later using the Manage Protection screen.
Note: The Modify Policy link is only enabled after volumes are selected in the volume
list.

5. Optionally, apply a policy template.

a. Use the Select Template drop-down to select one of your policy templates.
b. Click Load to load the settings in the template.
c. Click OK to apply the settings.
6. Click Next Display Group Summary.

Automatically provisioning the copy journal

Use the Journal Provisioning Method screen to automatically provision the copy journal.
Before you begin
l Copy volumes are located on a Unity, VNXe, VNX, or XtremIO array.
l A resource pool has been registered on the Unity, VNXe, or VNX array containing the copy
volumes.

50 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

l If you have an XtremIO copy, the following procedure is not relevant. Instead, ensure that the
option Automatically Provision Journal Volumes is selected, select the XtremIO array, and
click Next Display Group Summary.
Note: The journal size for automatically provisioned XtremIO journal volumes is set to 2 GB.

Procedure
1. Select Automatically Provision Journal Volumes.

2. Define the journal settings.

Option Description
Journal size Enter a value for the journal size to define an absolute journal size at the
copy.
Predicted Select this option and enter a value for predicted incoming write-rate
incoming write- and required protection window to have RecoverPoint calculate the
rate required journal size based on your consistency group’s predicted write-
rate and a required protection window.
As you change this value, the journal size that is required to sustain the
entered values for predicted incoming write-rate and the required
protection window is dynamically updated in the Calculated journal size
field.

Required Note: Only relevant if Predicted incoming write-rate is selected.

protection
window Enter a value for the required protection window to have RecoverPoint
calculate the required journal size based on your consistency group’s
predicted write-rate and a required protection window.
As you change this value, the journal size that is required to sustain the
entered values for predicted incoming write-rate and the required
protection window is dynamically updated in the Calculated journal size
field.

Tiering Policy (Optionally) Select one of the available tiering policies displayed in the
Resource pool provisioning information table below to automatically
apply the policy to the selected volumes.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 51

Protection

Option Description
Back to Select Go back to the previous screen and re-select the production volumes,
Production or (optionally) redefine the production protection policy.
Volumes

3. If there are Available Tiering Policies on storage, you can select a Tiering policy to apply
to the journal volumes from the combo-box at the bottom of the resource pool table now.
4. Select the relevant resource pool from the table.
The following information is displayed for each resource pool in the table:

Information Description
Name The name of the registered resource pool in the RecoverPoint
system.
Type The resource pool type. Valid resource pool types are:
l RAID groups
l Storage groups
l Datastores

Total Size The total capacity of the resource pool.

Available Size The total capacity of the resource pool minus the capacity of the
volumes that were already allocated in the resource pool.
Tiers The physical type of the storage. For example, Fibre Channel,
SATA, etc.
Available Tiering The tiering policies that are available on storage and can be
Policies automatically applied to volumes in RecoverPoint when users
automatically provision volumes.
Storage Name The name of the storage array in RecoverPoint.
Serial Number Serial number of the storage array.
Array Type The type of the array.
IP The array’s IP address.

5. Click Next Display Group Summary.

Displaying the group summary

Procedure
1. In the Group Summary screen:

52 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

a. Use the following options until the consistency group diagram reflects your
requirements:

Table 11 Group summary screen

Action Description

Edit Opens the Add a Copy screen of the copy whose Edit link you clicked, allowing
you to edit the copy settings, and modify the copy volume configuration,
replication mode, or protection plan.

Delete Removes the copy whose Delete link you clicked, from the consistency group.
Note: You cannot delete the production copy.

Replication Displays detailed volume information on all replication set volumes that have been
Sets defined for the consistency group. Select a row in the replication sets table in the
top section to display the associated volume information in the bottom section.
For each volume the following information is displayed; vendor, array, serial
number, volume, UID, size and VPLEX group.
Click on the replication set name to open the Edit Replication Set dialog box,
and rename the replication set.

Note: When you add a replication set to a consistency group, RecoverPoint

ensures consistency between the copies and the production source by
performing a volume sweep synchronization on all of the volumes in the new
replication set. Selecting the Attach as Clean checkbox overrides the default
synchronization process by informing the system that the new copy volumes
are known to be an exact image of their corresponding production volumes. If
Attach as Clean is checked, and the copy volumes are inconsistent with their
corresponding production volumes, they will remain inconsistent. To ensure

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 53

Protection

Table 11 Group summary screen (continued)

Action Description

consistency, best practice is not to use Attach as Clean and allow

RecoverPoint to perform the volume sweep.

Start When selected, starts transfer for the group as soon as the group is created.
replication ... NOTICE If a consistency group contains one journal created using automatic
when I click volume provisioning and one journal whose volumes were selected manually
'Finish' this setting will not work and you will have to start transfer for the group
manually.

A first-time initialization (or fast first-time initialization) occurs when a

consistency group is enabled for the first time.

Add a Copy Opens the Add a Copy screen, allowing you to create another copy, define the
new copy’s settings, and define the copy’s volume configuration, replication
mode, and protection plan.

Finish Note: Before you start transfer to any copy, ensure that the copy volumes
are unmounted from any hosts and any volume groups are deported from the
logical volume manager.

Creates the group, applies all of the specified settings, and starts a first-time
initialization process to synchronize the production volumes to the copy volumes.
Before you click Finish, note the following:
l If First-time initialization is taking too long on page 246, instead of allowing
RecoverPoint to send the initialization data to the copy storage, you can
initialize the copy volumes from a backup disk, saving the time it would
otherwise take to synchronize the data over a WAN or FC connection.
l By default, RecoverPoint writes the first snapshot directly to the copy
storage, bypassing the copy journal. Using the fast_first_init
parameter of the config_link_policy CLI command, you can override
the default setting and write the initialization snapshot first to the journal
(which is more time-consuming but provides greater data protection).
l To enable failover during initialization, set the value of the
allow_long_resync parameter of the config_copy_policy CLI
command to no (default is yes).

b. Click Finish to create the group, and all of it's copies.

The group is created and the Manage Protection screen is displayed.
After you finish
You can now Manage Protection on page 63 or start RecoverPoint Recovery on page 128.

54 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Policy Templates
Use Protection > Policy Templates to view or modify existing protection policy templates or
create new protection policy templates, for copies or links.

Policy templates are re-useable pre-defined protection settings for both copies and links.
Three default policy templates are included in RecoverPoint; default copy, default remote link and
default local link.
Policy templates work in the following way, the user:
1. Modifies an existing policy template or creates a new policy template.
2. Applies the settings in the policy template to existing links or copies using the Protect
Volumes wizard or the Manage Protection screen.

Display all policy templates

Displays the list of policy templates currently configured in the RecoverPoint system.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Policy Templates.
2. You cannot remove the default policy templates, but you can create new ones based on the
default template settings and modify any of the user-defined policy templates.

Create new policy templates

Creates a new user-defined policy template.
Before you begin
l Only users with Group permissions can create new policy templates.
l Use the Copy policy template to control your Journal policies on page 70.
l If a policy template contains an invalid value for an array, you will not be able to apply it to a
consistency group.
l Copy policy templates cannot be applied to copies with volumes on an XtremIO array.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Policy Templates.
2. In the list of policy templates, click Add.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 55

Protection

The Add Policy Template dialog box is displayed.

3. In the Type field, select the type of policy template that you want to create.
Valid types of policy templates are Copy and Link.
The settings change according to the type of template that you select.
4. In the Name field, enter a descriptive name for your new policy template.
5. Depending on the type of template you selected, configure the Journal policies on page 70
and/or the Link policies on page 67 according to your requirements.
6. Click OK.

Modify existing policy templates

Modifies an existing user-defined policy template.
Before you begin
l Only users with Group permissions can modify policy templates.
l When you modify a policy template, all settings based on the template do not automatically
change. You will need to re-load and apply the modified policy template to use the new
settings.
l Use the Copy policy template to control your Journal policies on page 70.
l If a policy template contains an invalid value for an array, you will not be able to load it to the
array.
l Copy policy templates cannot be applied to copies with volumes on an XtremIO array.
l You cannot modify any of the default Policy Templates on page 55.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Policy Templates.
2. In the list of policy templates, select a template and click Edit.

56 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

The Edit Policy Template dialog box is displayed.

3. Depending on the type of template you selected, configure the Journal policies on page 70
and/or the Link policies on page 67 according to your requirements.
4. Click OK.

Remove a policy template

Removes a user-defined policy template from the RecoverPoint system.
Before you begin
l Only users with Group permissions remove policy templates.
l You cannot remove the default Copy and Link policy templates, and you cannot change their
settings. You can, however, create new policy templates and base them on the settings of the
default policy templates.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Policy Templates.
2. In the list of policy templates, select a template.
3. Click Remove, and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

Apply a policy template to a new consistency group

About this task
Use the Protect Volumes wizard to apply policy templates to copies, journals and links during
group creation.

Apply a policy template to an existing consistency group

About this task
Use the Protection > Manage Protection to apply policy templates after group creation.

Define a protection policy for existing group links

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group and select one of its copies.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 57

Protection

3. In the right pane, click the Link Policy tab.

4. In the Link Policy tab, for each link:
a. Select the link to which you want to apply the template settings.
b. Use the Select Template drop-down to select the template.
c. Click Load to load the settings in the template.
The settings have not yet been applied, and they can now be modified to reflect your
requirements.

d. Click Apply to apply the settings to the selected link.

Define a protection policy for existing group journals

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group and select one of its copies.
3. In the right pane, click the Copy Policy tab.
4. In the Copy Policy tab:
a. Use the Select Template drop-down to select the template.
b. Click Load to load the settings in the template.
The settings have not yet been applied, and they can now be modified to reflect your
requirements.

c. Click Apply to apply the settings to the copy journal.

Define policies while adding a copy to an existing group

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
3. In the right pane, select Status > Add Copy.
4. In the production journal and copy journal creation screens, define the journal policies:
a. Select the Modify Policy link.
b. Use the Select Template drop-down to select one of your templates.
c. Click Load to load the settings in the template.
The settings have not yet been applied, and they can now be modified to reflect your
requirements.

d. Click OK to apply the settings.

5. In the copy creation screen, define the link policies:
a. Select the Modify Policies link.
b. Select the Link tab.
c. Use the Select Template drop-down to select one of your templates.
d. Click Load to load the settings in the template.
The settings have not yet been applied, and they can now be modified to reflect your
requirements.

58 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

e. Click OK to apply the settings.

Group Sets
Use Protection > Group Sets to create or modify sets of consistency groups, perform operational
and recovery activities, and periodically bookmark the same consistent point in time across
volumes in multiple groups, simultaneously.

Note: Parallel bookmarks cannot be enabled for group sets containing consistency groups with
volumes that reside on an XtremIO array or a Data Domain.

How group sets work

The user selects a set of groups, enters a name for the group set, and (optionally) sets the
frequency at which parallel bookmarks will be periodically applied to the group set.
If parallel bookmarking is enabled, a bookmark is generated at the specified interval for all groups in
the group set. The bookmark will consist of the group set name that the user specifies and an
automatically incremented number starting at zero, and incremented up to 65535 (and then,
beginning at zero again).
Group sets can be used to perform actions on all of the groups defined in it simultaneously, such
as; enabling and disabling image access, enabling direct access, undoing writes, failing over,
recovering production, starting and stopping transfer, and enabling or disabling groups.

Display all group sets

Displays all existing group sets in the RecoverPoint system.
Before you begin
l Only users with Group permissions can add, edit or remove group sets.
l The Enable, Disable, Start Transfer, and Pause Transfer buttons are only enabled if they are
relevant for at least one of the groups in the group set.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Group Sets.
2. All of the group sets in the system are displayed, along with their system information.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 59

Protection

Create a group set

Before you begin
l Parallel bookmarks cannot be enabled for group sets containing consistency groups with
volumes that reside on an XtremIO array or a Data Domain.
l Only users with Group permissions can add, edit or remove group sets.
l The maximum number of group sets in a RecoverPoint system is limited to 128. However, each
group set can contain an unlimited number of consistency groups, unless parallel bookmarking
is enabled.
l While parallel bookmarking is enabled for a group set:
n The maximum number of groups in the group set is limited to 32.
n You cannot add or remove groups from the group set.
n The parallel bookmarking interval should be greater than 20 seconds.
n You cannot create the group set if any of the groups that you want to include are already
part of another group set that has parallel bookmarking enabled.
n You cannot create the group set if any of the groups that you want to include contain links
for which snap-based replication mode has been enabled.
l You cannot create a group set if one of its groups is not replicating in the same direction (that
is, from the same source) as other groups in the group set.
l Although groups with mixed topologies (that is, with a different number of copies) can be
included in the same group set, for recovery purposes, this is not recommended.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Group Sets .
2. Click Add. The Add Group Set dialog box is displayed.

3. In the Add Group Set dialog box:

a. In the Name field, enter a descriptive name for the group set.
b. In the list of consistency groups, select one or more consistency groups to add to the
group set.
All consistency groups in a group set must be replicating in the same direction.

60 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

You cannot enable parallel bookmarking for a group set if any of the groups in the group
set are part of another group set that has parallel bookmarking enabled.

c. Ensure that the Enable Parallel Bookmarking checkbox reflects your requirements. If it
is selected, ensure that the Frequency list box contains the required value.
Enabling parallel bookmarking limits the maximum number of groups in the group set to
32. You cannot add or remove groups from a group set with parallel bookmarking
enabled. The parallel bookmarking frequency should be no less than 20 seconds. Parallel
bookmarks cannot be enabled for group sets containing consistency groups with volumes
that reside on an XtremIO array.

d. Click OK.

Edit a group set

Modifies the settings of an existing group set.
Before you begin
l Parallel bookmarks cannot be enabled for group sets containing consistency groups with
volumes that reside on an XtremIO array.
l Only users with Group permissions can edit group sets.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Group Sets .
2. Select a group set in the list of group sets.
3. Click Edit. The Edit Group Set dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Edit Group Set dialog box:

a. In the Name field, modify the group set name as required.
Although you can modify the group set name, it is not recommended.

b. Select or clear the checkboxes of groups in the list of groups to include or exclude them
from the groups set.
You will not be able to enable parallel bookmarking for the group set if any of the groups
in the group set are part of another group set that has parallel bookmarking enabled.

c. Ensure that the Enable Parallel Bookmarking checkbox reflects your requirements. If it
is selected, ensure that the Frequency list box contains the required value.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 61

Protection

Parallel bookmarks cannot be enabled for group sets containing consistency groups with
volumes that reside on an XtremIO array. You cannot disable parallel bookmarking if it is
enabled, but you can change the Frequency. Enabling parallel bookmarking limits the
maximum number of groups in the group set to 32. You cannot add or remove groups
from a group set with parallel bookmarking enabled. The parallel bookmarking frequency
should be no less than 20 seconds.

d. Click OK.

Remove a group set

Deletes a group set from the RecoverPoint system.
Before you begin
l Only users with Group permissions can remove group sets.
l This action cannot be undone.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Group Sets .
2. Select one or more group sets in the list of group sets.
3. Click Remove.

Enable or disable all groups in a group set

Simultaneously enables or disables all groups in a group set.
Before you begin
l When transfer starts for a disabled group, a full sweep occurs.
l The Enable and Disable buttons are only enabled if they are relevant for at least one of the
groups in the group set.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Group Sets .
2. Select the group set from the list of group sets.
3. Click Enable or Disable.

Pause or start transfer for all groups in a group set

Simultaneously starts or stops the transfer of writes between the production and all of its copies
for all groups in a group set.
Before you begin
l After transfer starts, a short initialization occurs.
l The Start Transfer and Pause Transfer buttons are only enabled if they are relevant for at
least one of the groups in the group set.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Group Sets .
2. Select the group set from the list of group sets.
3. Click Start Transfer or Pause Transfer.

62 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Apply a bookmark to all of the groups in a group set

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Group Sets .
2. Select the group set from the list of group sets.
3. Click Apply Bookmark.

Initiate recovery activities for a group set

Simultaneously initiates a recovery activity for all groups in a group set.
About this task
You can trigger recovery activities for a group set from both the Protection and the Recovery
menus.
l To test a copy, undo writes, enable direct access or disable image access for all consistency
groups in a group set:
n Select Protection > Group Sets. Select a group set from the list of group sets, click Test
Copies, and follow the instructions in Test a Copy on page 128.
n Select Recovery > Test a Copy and follow the instructions in Test a Copy on page 128.
l To test a copy and recover production of all consistency groups in a group set:
n Select Protection > Group Sets. Select a group set from the list of group sets, click
Recover Production, and follow the instructions in Test a Copy and Recover Production on
page 132.
n Select Recovery > Recover Production and follow the instructions in Test a Copy and
Recover Production on page 132.
l To test a copy and fail over all consistency groups in a group set:
n Select Protection > Group Sets. Select a group set from the list of group sets, click Fail
Over, and follow the instructions in Test a Copy and Fail Over on page 134.
n Select Recovery > Fail Over and follow the instructions in Test a Copy and Fail Over on
page 134.

Manage Protection
Use the Manage Protection screen to manage and monitor your existing consistency groups and
their protection plans, control transfer, and mark consistent points in time across groups and sets
of groups.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 63

Protection

When the Manage Protection screen is first displayed, the Consistency Groups node is selected
in the left pane, and the list of all consistency groups in the system is displayed in the right pane
along with the status of every consistency group in the RecoverPoint system.
Use this screen for monitoring all consistency groups, as follows:

Column Description

Name The name of the consistency group.

Status Whether a group is Enabled or Disabled.

Transfer The group transfer status (Paused, Active, Initializing, etc.). When a group is
configured to transfer data synchronously, the word Synchronized is
displayed next to the state of transfer. You can also see the Consistency
Group Transfer Status on page 28 through the Consistency Group Transfer
Status on page 28 widget in the Dashboard.

Alerts The number of alerts that have been logged for a group. If alerts have been
logged, click the link to display the alert texts.

Protected The size of the data that is being protected by the group.
Size

Active RPA The RPA that is the preferred RPA.

Group Set The group set name, if the group has been added to a group set.

You can also perform the following actions on multiple groups in the system simultaneously, by
clicking the relevant button at the bottom of the screen:

Table 12 Multiple consistency group actions

Button Description

Remove Remove the selected consistency groups.

Group

Enable Group Enabling a disabled consistency group starts replication and causes a full
sweep.

Disable Only enabled if the selected consistency groups are enabled. Disables the
Group selected consistency groups. Disabling a consistency group stops all
replication, deletes journals, and causes a full sweep when the group is
enabled.

Create Create a bookmark and define snapshot policies across multiple groups on
Bookmark page 124

The RecoverPoint protection policies

RecoverPoint protection is policy-driven. A protection policy, based on the particular business
needs of your company, is uniquely specified for each consistency group, each copy (and copy
journal) and each link. Each policy comprises settings that collectively govern the way in which
replication is carried out. Replication behavior changes dynamically during system operation in light
of the policy, the level of system activity, and the availability of network resources.
Note: There are various advanced protection policies that cannot be accessed through
Unisphere for RecoverPoint, and can only be configured using the RecoverPoint CLI. See the
RecoverPoint CLI Reference Guide for your RecoverPoint product version for more information
on these policies.

64 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Group policies
Describes the policy settings for consistency groups.
To display these settings, select Protection > Manage Protection, select a consistency group in
the left pane, and click the Group Policy tab in the right pane.

Table 13 Group policies

Setting Description

Group Name The name of the consistency group.

Primary RPA The RPA that you prefer to replicate the consistency group. When the primary
RPA is not available, the consistency group will switch to another RPA in the
RPA cluster. Whether data will transfer when replication is switched to
another RPA depends on the value of the transfer_by_non_preffered
parameter of the config_group_policy CLI command.
Note: Best practice is to ensure that groups that replicate in synchronous
replication mode are set to use different RPAs than groups that replicate
in asynchronous replication mode . Mixing between the two may result in
low I/O rates for the synchronous groups. It is also recommended that
dynamic sync and purely synchronous consistency groups reside on
different RPAs, whenever possible.

Priority Default = Normal

Only relevant for remote replication over the WAN or Fibre Channel, when
two or more consistency groups are using the same Primary RPA.
Select the priority assigned to this consistency group. The priority determines
the amount of bandwidth allocated to this consistency group in relation to all
other consistency groups using the same Primary RPA.
Possible values are:
l Idle
l Low
l Normal
l High
l Critical
In asynchronous replication, groups with a priority of Critical are provided ten
times the priority of normal groups. Groups with a priority of High are
provided three times the priority of normal groups. Groups with a priority of
Low are provided 50% of the priority of normal groups. Groups with a priority
of Idle are provided 1% of the priority of normal groups.

Preferred Note: Only relevant when MetroPoint group is selected.

Cluster
Default = Follow VPLEX bias rules
Sets the preferred RPA cluster of the MetroPoint group to the active or
standby production, or to follow the VPLEX bias rules.

Distribute Default=disabled
group writes Only supported if the journal is at least 40 GB.
across
Note: Both enabling and disabling this setting causes the journal of all
multiple
copies in the consistency group to be lost.
RPAs

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 65

Protection

Table 13 Group policies (continued)

Setting Description

Distributed consistency groups across multiple RPAs to significantly increase

the maximum available RPA throughput, allowing for a significantly larger
group. For throughput performance statistics (during synchronous and
asynchronous replication) and feature limitations, see the RecoverPoint
Performance Guide.
When enabled, a minimum of one and a maximum of three secondary RPAs
can be selected.
Note: Before changing this setting, ensure all preferred RPAs (both
primary and secondary) are connected by Fibre Channel and can see each
other in the SAN .

External Default=none
Application Possible values are None and SRM.
l None: Using an external management application (SRM) is disabled.
l SRM: To enable support for VMware Site Recovery Manager. This option
is only valid if a RecoverPoint Storage Replication Adapter for VMware
Site Recovery Manager is installed on the vCenter Servers. For more
information, refer to the RecoverPoint Adapter for VMware Site Recovery
Manager Release Notes.

Recovery Specifies which copy the external application should fail over to.
Copy

External Only relevant for MetroPoint configuration and if External Application =

Management SRM.
Side SRM supports only one production copy. When RecoverPoint is managed by
external management, the external management application (SRM) must be
connected via a fixed management IP address. If the other cluster becomes
active, SRM will fail. External Management Side determines the RecoverPoint
IP address of which RecoverPoint production copy is used for management by
SRM. This IP address cannot be changed, even if the active production copy
changes over to the other side, and SRM therefore fails.
The External Management Side parameter cannot be changed unless:
l RecoverPoint is replicating correctly.
l In vCenter, neither SRM Test nor a Recovery Plan is running.
After changing the External Management Side parameter, Rescan Scan
must be run in vCenter, otherwise SRM will fail.

Managed by When any value other than None is selected, Managed By is enabled and you
have the following options:
l RecoverPoint: Check this option for planned or unplanned maintenance
of the RecoverPoint system. When activated, external application support
is disabled and user-initiated RecoverPoint capabilities are enabled. When
activated, RecoverPoint user-initiated capabilities, such as image access,
image testing, changing policies and creating bookmarks are available.
l External Application: When activated, the specified external application
manages RecoverPoint. All RecoverPoint user-initiated capabilities are
disabled. The user cannot access images, change policies, or change

66 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 13 Group policies (continued)

Setting Description

volumes. Bookmarks cannot be created in the RecoverPoint GUI, but they

can be created using the RecoverPoint CLI bookmark commands.
When Managed by = External Application, Site Recovery Manager
manages the group, and can perform automatic failover and test failover.

Link policies
Describes the policy settings for the links between two copies.

Table 14 Link policies

Setting Description

Asynchronous Default=enabled
When enabled, RecoverPoint replicates the consistency group data in
asynchronous replication mode.

Snap Replication Default=disabled

When enabled, RecoverPoint replicates the consistency group data in
asynchronous, snap-based replication mode.
Possible values:
l None: Disables snap-based replication mode.
l Periodic: A new snap starts after the specified interval has passed
since the previous snap was started. If the time interval has
passed, but the previous snap has not been finished, the next snap
will start as soon as the previous one is finished. Sets the interval
between snaps to any value between 30 and 1440 minutes. When
set to Periodic, an interval should be defined. The default interval
is 30 minutes. The RPO will be twice the specified interval, and
cannot be changed.
Note: The recommended snap replication mode for XtremIO
replication is Periodic. For sizing guidelines when using
Continuous snap-based replication mode consult Customer
Support.
l On Highload: Uses asynchronous replication mode as the default
replication mode and dynamically switches to snap-based
replication mode upon high load. When highload is over,
dynamically switches back to asynchronous replication mode .
l Continuous: A new snap starts as soon as the previous snap is
completed. Specify the RPO. RPO is determined by the XtremIO
snapshot consolidation policy and by the Maximim Number of
Snaps specified. The RPO specified here can shorten the RPO
determined by the other parameters, but cannot lengthen it.
Default RPO = 1 minute.

Synchronous Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint and XtremIO.

Default=disabled

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 67

Protection

Table 14 Link policies (continued)

Setting Description

When enabled, RecoverPoint replicates the consistency group data in

synchronous replication mode.

Dynamic by latency Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint.

Default=disabled
Only relevant for synchronous replication mode.
When enabled, RecoverPoint uses dynamic sync mode and alternates
between synchronous and asynchronous replication modes, as
necessary, according to latency conditions (the number of
milliseconds or microseconds between the time the data is written to
the local RPA and the time that it is written to the RPA or journal at
the remote site).
l Start async replication above: When the specified limit is reached,
RecoverPoint automatically starts replicating in asynchronous
replication mode.
l Resume sync replication below: When the specified limit is
reached, RecoverPoint goes back to replicating in synchronous
replication mode.

Dynamic by Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint.

throughput
Default=disabled
Only relevant for synchronous replication mode.
When enabled, RecoverPoint uses dynamic sync mode and alternates
between synchronous and asynchronous replication modes, as
necessary, according to throughput conditions (the total writes that
reach the local RPA, per copy, in kb/s).
l Start async replication above: When the specified limit is reached,
RecoverPoint automatically starts replicating in asynchronous
replication mode.
l Resume sync replication below: When the specified limit is
reached, RecoverPoint goes back to replicating in synchronous
replication mode.

RPO Default = 25 seconds

This setting defines the required lag of the each link in a consistency
group, and is set manually in MB, GB, writes, seconds, minutes, or
hours.
In RecoverPoint, RPO starts being measured when a write made by
the production host reaches the local RPA, and stops being measured
when the write reaches either the target RPA or the target journal
(depending on the value of the transfer_by_non_preferred
parameter of the config_group_policy CLI command).
When the value of the regulate_application parameter of the
config_link_policy CLI command is set to no (default is no), the
specified RPO is not guaranteed. RecoverPoint will try its best to
replicate within the specified RPO without affecting host
performance.

68 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 14 Link policies (continued)

Setting Description

Compression Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint.

Default = Low
To compress data before transferring it to a remote RPA cluster. Can
reduce transfer time significantly.
Note: Only relevant for asynchronous remote replication. Both the
enabling and disabling of compression causes a short pause in
transfer and a short initialization. Compression decreases transfer
time, but increases the source RPA’s CPU utilization.
l High: Yields the highest bandwidth reduction ratio and requires
the most RPA resources.
l Medium: Yields an average bandwidth reduction ratio and requires
an average amount of RPA resources.
l Low: Yields the lowest bandwidth reduction ratio and requires the
least RPA resources.
l None: Compression is disabled and requires no RPA resources.
See the RecoverPoint Release Notes for the supported throughput
for each compression level.

Enable Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint.

Deduplication
Default = disabled
To eliminate repetitive data before transferring the data to a remote
RPA cluster. Can reduce transfer time significantly.
Note: Only relevant for asynchronous remote replication.
Compression must be enabled before deduplication can be
enabled. Both the enabling and disabling of deduplication causes a
short pause in transfer and a short initialization. Deduplication
decreases transfer time, but increases the source RPA’s CPU
utilization.

Snapshot Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint and XtremIO.

Granularity
Default = fixed (per second)
l Fixed (per write): To create a snapshot for every write operation,
over a specific (local or remote) link.
l Fixed (per second): To create one snapshot per second, over a
specific (local or remote) link.
l Dynamic: To have the system determine the snapshot granularity
of a specific (local or remote) link, according to available
resources.
Note: When you use distributed consistency groups, the
snapshot granularity of all links in the consistency group can
be no finer than one second.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 69

Protection

Copy policies
To display the copy policy settings, select Protection > Manage Protection, expand a consistency
group, select one of its copies, and click the Copy Policy tab.

Table 15 Copy policies

Setting Description

Host OS Default = Other/Mixed

The operating system of the host writing to the volumes in the consistency
group.

Clear journal Note: Only relevant in ProtectPoint

upon removal

Journal policies
To display the journal policies, select Protection > Manage Protection, expand a consistency
group and select one of its copies. Then, click the Copy Policy tab and note the settings in the
Journal Policy section.

Table 16 Journal policies

Setting Description

Journal Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint and XtremIO.

Compression
Default = none
When enabled, instructs the target RPA of the consistency group to
compress the snapshots in the journal so that more images (that is, a
longer protection window) can be saved in the same journal capacity,
saving storage cost.
Compression impacts the CPU resources of the target RPA of the
consistency group, and can impact that RPA’s ability to sustain its write-
load. If the target RPA of the consistency group for which you wish to
enable this option is also transferring the data of other consistency groups
across the WAN, note that enabling this setting will affect the RPAs
transfer rate. See the RecoverPoint Release Notes for throughput
limitations.
Note: Enabling journal compression while a consistency group is
enabled will result in the loss of all snapshots in the journal. To change
the value of journal compression, the consistency group must be in one
of the following states: disabled, direct image access, or distributing.

Maximum Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint and XtremIO.

Journal Lag
Default = unlimited
Defines the data access aspects of RTO for each copy.
Note: The industry term RTO includes the time during which the
disaster was being fixed, the actual disaster recovery, testing, and
communication to the users. The RTO setting in RecoverPoint only
defines the actual disaster recovery time.

70 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 16 Journal policies (continued)

Setting Description

When data is received by the RPA faster than it can be distributed to

storage volumes, it accumulates in the journal. The Maximum Journal Lag is
the maximum amount of snapshot data (in bytes, KB, MB, or GB) that is
permissible to hold in the copy journal before distribution to the copy
storage. In other words, the maximum amount of data that would have to
be distributed to the copy storage before failover to the latest image could
take place. In terms of RTO, this is the maximum time that would be
required in order to bring the copy up-to-date with production.
When the Maximum Journal Lag value is reached, the system switches to
three-phase distribution mode, and no longer retains rollback information.
As soon as the lag is within the allowed limits, rollback data is retained
again.

Enable Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint and XtremIO.

RecoverPoint
snapshot Default = disabled
consolidation When selected, enables automatic snapshot consolidation to allow for the
storage of a longer history in the copy journal.
Automatic snapshot consolidation cannot be enabled for a group that is
part of a consistent group set.
When enabled, the Predicted Protection Window is not calculated.
Do not consolidate any snapshots for at least
Default = 2 days
Minimum = 12 hours.
The period during which snapshot data is not to be consolidated. The
period’s start time is always today, and the period’s end time is <n>
hours / days / weeks / months ago.
If no daily or weekly consolidations are specified, the remaining
snapshots are consolidated monthly.

Consolidate snapshots that are older than x to one snapshot per

day for y days
Default = 5 days
Snapshots are consolidated every ~24 hours.
Select the Indefinitely checkbox to consolidate all subsequent
snapshots in ~24 hour intervals.

l If the Indefinitely checkbox is not selected, and no weekly

consolidations are specified, the remaining snapshots are
consolidated monthly.
l If the Indefinitely checkbox is selected, weekly and monthly
consolidations are disabled, and the remaining snapshots are
consolidated daily.
Note: The snapshot consolidation process will fail if at least
24 hours worth of data do not exist in the journal in addition
to the unconsolidated duration, or if there is not a minimum of

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 71

Protection

Table 16 Journal policies (continued)

Setting Description

1 GB of data between the starting and closing points of the

consolidation.

Consolidate snapshots that are older than x to one snapshot per

week for y weeks
Default = 4 weeks
Snapshots are consolidated every ~168 hours.
Select the Indefinitely checkbox to consolidate all subsequent
snapshots in ~168 hour intervals.

l If the Indefinitely checkbox is selected, the remaining snapshots

are consolidated weekly. The first weekly consolidation cannot
happen unless there are at least seven daily snapshots in the
journal, in addition to the required number of weekly snapshots
and the specified unconsolidated duration.
l If the Indefinitely checkbox is not selected, the remaining
snapshots are consolidated monthly. The first monthly
consolidation cannot happen unless there are at least four weekly
snapshots, or 28 daily snapshots in the journal in addition to the
required number of monthly snapshots.

Maximum Note: Only relevant for XtremIO.

Number of
Snaps Default=80
The maximum number of snaps to be saved at the copy (2–500). The value
of this setting may change if the detailed consolidation policy is modified.

Required Default = disabled

Protection Note: In XtremIO, this setting is enabled by default, with a value of 2
Window days, and it cannot be disabled.
Indicates how far in time the copy image can be rolled back.
When a required protection window is specified, the status of the current
protection window and the predicted protection window are displayed in
the Journal tab of the copy.

Edit Detailed Note: Only relevant for XtremIO copies.

Consolidation
Settings Displays the number of snapshots to retain and consolidate per time
duration (specified in minutes, hours, days, weeks, or months.
The detailed consolidation policy is deduced by RecoverPoint when a
Maximum Number of Snaps and a Required Protection Window is
defined, or when an Snap-based replication interval is defined in the
copy Table 14 on page 67. One to three consolidation policies may be
deduced.
You can specify between one and three detailed consolidation policies in
parallel. The system uses the entered consolidation policy values as
guidelines. The actual number of snapshots per timeframe is displayed
beside each policy.

72 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 16 Journal policies (continued)

Setting Description

Note: For the detailed consolidation policy values to be valid, the first
consolidation policy in the list must be of the shortest duration and the
last policy in the list must be of the longest duration. The first average
snapshot frequency in the list must be lower than the last.

Monitoring and managing protection

After a consistency group has been created, use the Manage Protection screen to monitor and
modify the group's settings and policies.

Use Manage Protection for:

l Monitoring and managing groups on page 73
l Monitoring and managing copies on page 89
l Monitoring group performance on page 76
l Monitoring copy journals on page 93
l Modifying consistency groups on page 99
l Modifying copies on page 113
l Modifying links on page 115
l Modifying replication sets on page 116
l Modifying journals on page 119
l Modifying snapshots on page 121

Monitoring and managing groups

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a group.
3. In the right pane, select the Status tab.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 73

Protection

Results

The Status tab displays a graphical representation of the consistency group and copy statuses.
The following information is displayed:

Table 17 Status tab

Label Displays

<Group The group name and the RPA which is handling the group data, both of which
Name> can be modified through the group policies. Group policies on page 65
Running on includes more information about group policies.
<RPA>
<Copy The relevant copy and RPA cluster names. The copy name can be modified
Name> at through the copy policies. Copy policies on page 70 includes more information
<Cluster about copy policies.
Name>
Replication A visual representation of the current replication modes and states.
modes and
l A dashed green line means that the system is replicating asynchronously.
states
l A dashed green line on top of a solid line means that the system is
replicating synchronously.
l A greyed out line means that replication has stopped.
Note: The lines move in the direction of replication.

The transfer state is displayed in the center of each link between the
production and the copy. The transfer state displayed here correlates to what
is displayed in the CG Transfer State widget of the system Dashboard.

When replicating synchronously, the word synchronized is displayed.

Role The current role of the copy with regards to failover and regulation.
l Before failover: Production, Local Copy and Remote Copy
l After failover: Target at Production, Local Source and Remote Source
l During regulation: Regulated

Storage The image access modes.

74 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 17 Status tab (continued)

Label Displays

Image The image currently being distributed to storage in the distribution phase.

When a group is selected in the left pane, you can click the buttons at the bottom of the Status
tab to perform the following actions:

Table 18 Status tab options when a group is selected

Button Description

Create Create a bookmark and define snapshot policies for one group on page 123 by
Bookmark providing a bookmark name for the current snapshot.

Add Copy Displays the Add a copy to a group on page 101 wizard, enabling you to add a
copy to the selected consistency group.

Test Copy Displays the Test a Copy on page 128 wizard, enabling you to select and test a
copy of the selected consistency group.

Fail Over Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint

Displays the Test a Copy and Fail Over on page 134 wizard, enabling you to
select and test a copy of the selected consistency group, as well as fail over to
it permanently or temporarily.

Recover Displays the Test a Copy and Recover Production on page 132 wizard,
Production enabling you to select and test a copy of the selected consistency group, and
recover production from it.

Start Only displayed if transfer is paused for the selected consistency group.
Transfer Causes the transfer of writes from the production host to all copies of the
selected consistency group to start.

Pause Only displayed if transfer is active for the selected consistency group. Causes
Transfer the transfer of writes from the production host to all copies of the selected
consistency group to pause.
Note: Best practice is not to use this command. Use Group policies on
page 65 to set policies for use of bandwidth. Pause transfer may be used
when WAN bandwidth is very limited and you wish to give the largest
bandwidth possible to another consistency group. In that case, you may
temporarily pause transfer for lower-priority consistency groups.

Disable Only displayed if the group is enabled for the selected consistency group.
Group Disables the selected consistency group.
Note: Disabling a consistency group stops all replication, deletes journals,
and causes a full sweep when the group is enabled.

Enable Group Only displayed if the group is disabled for the selected consistency group.
Enables the selected consistency group.
Note: Enabling a disabled consistency group starts replication and a full
sweep commences.

Remove Removes the selected consistency group from the system.

Group Note: Cannot be undone.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 75

Protection

Monitoring group performance

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a group.
3. In the right pane, select the Statistics tab.

The following traffic statistics are displayed in the Traffic sub-tab:

Note: When the production copy is on an XtremIO array, only Total Traffic and
Initialization Traffic statistics are available.
l The Total Traffic widget displays the total traffic that the consistency group data
generates on the RPA transferring the group data at the production and copy sites, as
well as between RPA clusters in your RecoverPoint system (in Mb/sec). The total traffic
includes the Initialization Traffic and the Application Traffic.
l The Application Traffic widget displays the traffic that the consistency group generates
on the RPA transferring the group data at the production and copy sites, as well as
between RPA clusters in your RecoverPoint system (in Mb/sec). The application traffic
includes Incoming Writes as well as RecoverPoint replication process traffic.
l The Initialization Traffic widget displays the traffic that the consistency group
generates between copies and RPA clusters in your RecoverPoint system, during
consistency group initialization (in Mb/sec). Initialization traffic can be high, as old
writes are transferred between source and target copies to synchronize between the
production volumes and the copy volumes.
l The Incoming Writes widget displays the writes to the production storage that the
consistency group generates at copies in your RecoverPoint system (in writes per
second), where each write is one I/O to the production storage.
The following statistics are displayed in the Replication Performance sub-tab:

76 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

l The Bandwidth Reduction widget displays the ratio by which RecoverPoint was able to
compress the consistency group data that is transferred between RPA clusters in your
RecoverPoint system. The bandwidth reduction ratio includes both data compression
and deduplication.
Note: Compression and deduplication are only relevant for asynchronous replication
to a remote RPA cluster.
The gains realized will vary depending on the compressibility of the replicated data.
Typically, enterprises can save 50% – 90% of their bandwidth by enabling the
compression setting.
NOTICE While enabling compression saves bandwidth, it also increases RPA CPU
utilization, which lowers RPA throughput. See the “Performance” section of the
RecoverPoint Release Notes for the impact of each compression setting on RPA
throughput. Also, both the enabling and disabling of compression causes a short
pause in transfer and a short initialization.
l The Time Lag widget displays the lag of the selected consistency group (in seconds),
when transferring data between all local and remote RPA clusters in your RecoverPoint
system.
l The Write Lag widget displays the lag of the selected consistency group (in writes),
when transferring data between all local and remote RPA clusters in your RecoverPoint
system. The write lag includes any writes generated by RecoverPoint replication
processes as well as internal RecoverPoint overhead.
l The Data Lag widget displays the lag of the selected consistency group (in MB), when
transferring data between all local and remote RPA clusters in your RecoverPoint
system.

Enabling deduplication
Before you begin
l Deduplication is only relevant for asynchronous remote replication.
l Both the enabling and disabling of deduplication causes a short pause in transfer and a short
initialization.
l Data compression must be enabled before deduplication can be enabled.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 77

Protection

l Deduplication is only supported in RecoverPoint environments in which all (local and remote)
RPAs are:
n Physical RPAs with at least 8GB of RAM
n Virtual RPAs with at least 4GB RAM
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
3. In the right pane, click the Link Policy tab.
a. In the Select link to set policy diagram, select the relevant link.
b. In the Bandwidth Reduction section, if Compression is set to None, enable
compression by changing this value to Low, Medium, or High.
c. Check the Enable Deduplication checkbox.
4. Click the Apply button.
NOTICE There is a short pause in transfer, followed by a short initialization.

After you finish

To display the effects of deduplication on your bandwidth:
l Display short-term deduplication statistics on page 78—the system displays the current
(sampled over the past seconds) and average (sampled over the past minutes) performance
statistics.
l Display long-term deduplication statistics on page 79—the user defines the period in time for
which to generate performance statistics.
Note: A bandwidth reduction or deduplication ratio value that is not significantly higher than 1
would indicate that the deduplication (and/or compression) process is not very effective. If so,
consider disabling these policies (as they do consume RPA CPU resources).

Display short-term deduplication statistics

About this task
To display the short-term effects of deduplication on your bandwidth:
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
3. In the right pane; click the Statistics tab and click on the Replication Performance tab.
Note the performance statistics in the Bandwidth Reduction pane. The Bandwidth >
Reduction pane displays the current bandwidth reduction ratio, including compression and
deduplication.
To display the short-term effects of deduplication on your bandwidth through the RecoverPoint
CLI:
4. Run the get_group_statistics command.
5. Note the Current bandwidth reduction ratio and Average bandwidth reduction ratio
values. These values are the current (seconds) and average (minutes) bandwidth reduction
ratios, including compression and deduplication.

78 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

6. Note the Current deduplication ratio, and Average deduplication ratio values. These
values are the current (seconds) and average (minutes) bandwidth reduction ratios, of only
the deduplication process.

Display long-term deduplication statistics

About this task
The long-term effects of deduplication on your bandwidth can only be monitored through the
RecoverPoint CLI.
To display the long-term effects of deduplication on your bandwidth:
l Detect bottlenecks
l Export consolidated statistics
Both bottleneck detection and exporting consolidated statistics allows you to define the period in
time for which to generate long-term bandwidth reduction and deduplication ratios.

Configuring lag optimization

Describes how to set the lag optimization of a specific consistency group.
Before you begin
l You should:
n Document the RPO of your consistency groups (for example, according to regulation rules).
n Evaluate the importance and value of your consistency group’s data in relation to each
other, and verify that the default values of the priority setting (as described in the following
table) reflect your business objectives. If they do not, contact Customer Support and ask
them to change the values.
Table 19 Priority setting default values

Setting Value

Idle 0.01 x Normal

Low 0.5 x Normal

Normal Normal

High 3 x Normal

Critical 10 x Normal

Note: Changing the default values is optional, as they provide a practical configuration.
It is recommended to accept the default settings unless there is a specific business
need to set other policies.
l Lag optimization is performed per RPA.
l The lag is optimized only if the bandwidth is the cause of the lag. It is not relevant, for example,
if the lag is caused by the distribution process at the remote site (which can happen when
replicating over Fibre Channel).
l The lag optimizer is only relevant for groups replicating asynchronously, that are not
experiencing a high load or an initialization. Groups replicating synchronously are always
prioritized over groups replicating asynchronously.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 79

Protection

3. In the right pane, select the Group Policy tab

4. Specify the group Policy setting.
5. In the left pane, expand the group and select a copy.
6. Specify the copy RPO policy, according to your company's business objectives.

Distributing group writes across RPAs

Before you begin
NOTICE When modifying a group’s topology, journal loss will occur.

l The snapshot granularity of all links in the consistency group can be set in the link policies to
no smaller than one second.
l Journal loss will occur when modifying a group’s topology (setting a non-distributed group as
distributed, or setting a distributed group as non-distributed).
l When configuring journals for a distributed consistency group, keep the following in mind:
n All copies of distributed consistency groups must have journals that are at least 20 GB in
size.
n The recommended journal size for distributed groups with snapshot consolidation enabled is
at least 40GB.
n If the capacity of an existing copy journal is less than the minimum journal size required for
distributed consistency groups (see the RecoverPoint Release Notes for this limit) the
consistency group will need to be disabled and then enabled again after you add journal
volumes or change the size of a journal LUN on storage
Enabling a disabled group causes a full sweep.
l Distributed consistency groups are only supported if there is a Fibre Channel connection
between all RPAs in each RPA cluster in the RecoverPoint system, therefore:
n In Fibre Channel environments, make sure all of the RPAs at each RPA cluster are
connected to the SAN through a Fibre Channel switch, and zoned together so that they all
see each other in the SAN.
n Groups running on vRPAs cannot be distributed.
l If any of the primary or secondary RPAs associated with a consistency group becomes
unavailable, there will be a brief pause in transfer on all of the group’s primary and secondary
RPAs, and all of the group segments will undergo a short initialization.
l Under certain circumstances (for example, if one of the primary or secondary RPAs becomes
unavailable) two consistency group segments could be handled by the same RPA.
l In general, distributed consistency groups offer better performance than non-distributed
(regular) consistency groups, as distributed groups run on a minimum of two RPAs (one
primary RPA and one secondary RPA). There is only a small improvement in performance when
a group is run on three RPAs. However, there is a steep improvement in performance when a
group is run on four RPAs.
l The following are example journal configurations for distributed consistency groups:
n One 40 GB volume + optional smaller volumes
n Two 20 GB volumes + optional smaller volumes
n Three 16 GB volumes + optional smaller volumes
n Four 10 GB volumes + optional smaller volumes

80 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Procedure
1. Review the relevant limitations and performance statistics of distributed groups in the
RecoverPoint Release Notes
2. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
3. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
4. In the right pane, click the Group Policy tab
5. Check or clear the Distribute group checkbox. The Secondary RPA checkboxes are
enabled or disabled accordingly.
6. If you are enabling this feature, select one to three secondary RPAs, by checking the
relevant checkboxes in the Secondary RPA section.
Results
The group writes are distributed across the selected RPAs.
After you finish
To monitor each group segment’s performance separately, and in relation to the group as a whole,
detect botttlenecks.
You can tell whether or not a group is distributed by navigating to Protection > Manage
Protection, clicking on a consistency group name in the left pane and looking at the top of the
consistency group’s Status tab. If the group is distributed, the text (primary) followed by a
comma-separated list of numbers indicating the designated secondary RPAs is displayed.

Figure 2 Identifying a distributed group

If the group is not distributed, only one RPA is specified in this area. You can also tell which of all
of your groups are distributed by navigating to Protection > Manage Protection, clicking on
Consistency Groups in the left pane and looking in the Active RPA column of the consistency
group table. Distributed consistency groups are displayed with the text (primary) followed by a
comma-separated list of numbers indicating the designated secondary RPAs.

Figure 3 Identifying a distributed group

For groups that are not distributed, only one RPA is specified in this column.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 81

Protection

Exporting consolidated statistics

The export_consolidated_statistics CLI command provides data series for a selection of important
RecoverPoint operational statistics. It enables advanced users, customer support representatives,
and implementation specialists to analyze system traffic and workload trends, to identify
correlation between spikes in two or more settings, and to discover the root causes of high loads
and other significant system behaviors.
About this task
With the export_consolidated_statistics command, you specify the granularity at which to collect
statistics (minute, hour, and/or day) and, for each granularity, the time frame over which to
collect the statistics. The resulting CSV file organizes the output for each entry according to the
standard bottleneck detection settings.
Procedure
1. Create a secure SSH connection to the RecoverPoint CLI and log in one of the pre-defined
users with admin privileges.
2. Run the export_consolidated_statistics command.
3. When prompted, specify the required time frame and report granularity.
The consolidation statistics are collected, placed in multiple comma-separated-value (*.csv)
files, and archived into one compressed file with the extension tar.gz.

4. Open an Internet browser window and connect to an RPA with the address:
http://<RPA IP address>/info
Note: You can connect to the RPA through either an HTTP or an HTTPS connection.

5. When prompted, log in to the RPA using boxmgmt privileges.

6. In the browser, navigate to the following directory:
../info/long_term_stats

7. Download and unzip the long_term_stats.tar.gz file into a folder on your local machine.
Results
The following table lists the statistics that are output by the export_consolidated_statistics
command. All statistics are valid for the sampled time interval, that is, the difference between the
“time from” and “time to” values on that row.
Table 20 Consolidated statistics output

Statistic Unit of measure Description

Incoming writes rate for link MB/sec Throughput of writes that

arrived at a link on the
production side.

Incoming IOs rate for link IOs/sec Number of writes that arrived
at a link on the production
side. Average IO size can be
computed as (Incoming writes
rate for link) / (Incoming IOs
rate for link).

82 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 20 Consolidated statistics output (continued)

Statistic Unit of measure Description

Non - initialization output rate MB/sec Rate at which normal write

for link traffic was transferred for the
link.

Initialization output rate for MB/sec Rate at which data was

link actually transferred for the
link for purpose of
synchronization.

Data synchronization rate for MB/sec Rate at which data was

link checked for possible transfer
for the link for purpose of
synchronization. In first-time
initialization, this is the rate at
which the data from the
replication set volumes is
transferred. In other cases,
comparison of signatures
increases the rate.

Compression CPU utilization % Depending on the relevance

(link, site or RPA), either:
l Link: Portion of
processor time used to
compress the incoming
data over a link. This
statistic is relevant only
for remote links.
l Site: Portion of processor
time used to compress
the incoming data over all
links for all RPAs at a site.
l RPA: Portion of
processor time used to
compress the incoming
data over all links on the
RPA.

Percentage time in transfer % of time Portion of time link was in

active transfer state.
Percentage time of % of time Portion of time link was in
initialization initializing transfer state.
RPO - lag in time between sec Actual recovery point
replicas during transfer after objective for link, as measured
init in seconds. It is measured
only when the transfer state
for the link was active.

RPO - lag in data between MB Actual recovery point

replicas during transfer after objective for link, as measured
init in megabytes of data. It is

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 83

Protection

Table 20 Consolidated statistics output (continued)

Statistic Unit of measure Description

measured only when the

transfer state for the link was
active.
RPO - lag in IOs between IOs Actual recovery point
replicas during transfer after objective for link, as measured
init in number of IOs. It is
measured only when the
transfer state for the link was
active.
Group-Link utilization % Aggregate measure of portion
of RPA capacity used by the
link, based on number of IOs,
writes throughput, and CPU
utilization.

Distributor receiver regulation % of time Depending on the relevance

duration (link, site or RPA), either:
l Link: Portion of time that
the distribution process
for a copy was forced to
regulate the incoming
data rate. A high value
indicates a slow storage
journal volumes relative to
the rate of the incoming
data.
l RPA: Portion of time that
the distribution process
across all copies served
by the RPA was forced to
regulate the incoming
data rate. A high value
indicates slow storage
journal volumes relative to
the rate of the incoming
data.
l Site: Portion of time that
the distribution process
across all copies at a site
was forced to regulate
the incoming data rate. A
high value indicates slow
storage journal volumes
relative to the rate of the
incoming data.

Distributor phase 1 thread % of time Portion of time used to

load receive data and write it to
the journal volumes for the
link. The value is dependent

84 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 20 Consolidated statistics output (continued)

Statistic Unit of measure Description

on the performance of the

journal volumes.

Distributor phase 1 effective MB/sec Depending on the relevance

speed (link, site or RPA), either:
l Link: Rate at which data
was received and written
to the journal volumes for
the link. The value is
dependent on the
performance of the
journal volumes.
l RPA: Rate at which data
was received and written
to the journal volumes for
all copies served by the
RPA. The value is
dependent on the
performance of the
journal volumes.
l Site: Rate at which data
was received and written
to the journal volumes for
all copies at the site. The
value is dependent on the
performance of the
journal volumes.

Distributor phase 2 thread % of time Portion of time used to read

load data from the journal volumes
and write to the copy
volumes, using either normal
or fast-forward distribution
mode. The value is dependent
on the performance of the
journal and copy volumes.

Distributor phase 2 effective MB/sec Depending on the relevance

speed (link, site or RPA), either:
l Link: Rate at which data
was read from the journal
volumes and written to
the copy volumes, using
either normal or fast-
forward distribution
mode. The value is
dependent on the
performance of the
journal and copy volumes.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 85

Protection

Table 20 Consolidated statistics output (continued)

Statistic Unit of measure Description

l RPA: Rate at which data

was read from the journal
volumes and written to
the copy volumes for all
copies served by the
RPA, using either normal
or fast-forward
distribution mode. The
value is dependent on the
performance of the
journal and copy volumes.
l Site: Rate at which data
was read from the journal
volumes and written to
the copy volumes for all
copies at a site, using
either normal or fast-
forward distribution
mode. The value is
dependent on the
performance of the
journal and copy volumes.

Fast forward distribution % of time Portion of time at copy when

duration distribution was in fast-
forward mode.

WAN throughput from box Mb/sec Outgoing throughput from

(over IP) RPA to remote site.
or
Cross-site throughput from
box (over FC)

Total incoming writes rate for MB/sec Throughput of writes that

box arrived at an RPA on the
production side. For
concurrent local and remote
replication, this is the sum of
throughputs for all local and
remote links on this RPA
(which is double the actual
incoming writes rate).

Incoming IOs rate for box IOs/sec Number of writes that arrived
at an RPA on the production
side. For concurrent local and
remote replication, this is the
sum of incoming IOs for all
local and remote links (which
is double the actual number of
incoming writes). Average IO
size can be computed as

86 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 20 Consolidated statistics output (continued)

Statistic Unit of measure Description

(Total incoming writes rate

for box) / (Incoming IOs rate
for box).

Non - initialization output rate MB/sec Rate at which normal write

for box (average over all traffic was transferred by the
period) RPA.

Initialization output rate for MB/sec Rate at which data was

box (average over all period) actually transferred by the
RPA for purpose of
synchronization.

Data synchronization rate for MB/sec Rate at which data was

box (average over all period) checked for possible transfer
by the RPA for purpose of
synchronization. In first-time
initialization, this is the rate at
which the data from the
replication set volumes is
transferred. In other cases,
comparison of signatures
increases the rate.

Replication process CPU % Portion of processor time

utilization – per box used for the replication
process on the RPA, including
compression and other
replication activities.

SAN target thread load % of time Portion of time used by RPA

for initial processing of writes,
before assigning them to the
relevant links.

Box utilization % Aggregate measure of portion

of RPA capacity used, based
on both IO load and processor
utilization.

WAN throughput from site Mb/sec Combined outgoing

(over IP) throughput from a site (to
or remote site).
Cross-site throughput from
site (over FC)

Total incoming writes rate for MB/sec Throughput of writes that

site arrived on the production
side. For concurrent local and
remote replication, this is the
sum of throughputs for all
local and remote links at the
site (which is double the
actual incoming writes rate).

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 87

Protection

Table 20 Consolidated statistics output (continued)

Statistic Unit of measure Description

Incoming IOs rate for site IOs/sec Number of writes that arrived
on the production side. For
concurrent local and remote
replication, this is the sum of
incoming IOs for all local and
remote links at the site
(which is double the actual
number of incoming writes).
Average IO size can be
computed as (Total incoming
writes rate for box) /
(Incoming IOs rate for box).

Non - initialization output rate MB/sec Rate at which normal write

for site (average over all traffic was transferred by all
period) RPAs at the site.

Initialization output rate for MB/sec Rate at which data was

site (average over all period) actually transferred by all
RPAs at the site for purpose
of synchronization.

Data synchronization rate for MB/sec Rate at which data was

site (average over all period) checked for possible transfer
by all RPAs at the site for
purpose of synchronization. In
first-time initialization, this is
the rate at which the data
from the replication set
volumes is transferred. In
other cases, comparison of
signatures increases the rate.

Line latency between sites msec Time it takes for data to be

transferred from a site to the
other site.

Packet loss % of packets Measure of the reliability of

the line between a site and
the other site, as measured in
portion of packets that must
be resent. Latency and packet
loss impact the effective
throughput on a line between
two sites.

Table 20 Consolidated statistics output

(1) In an RPA, a “link” is a logical channel from

production to copy, either local or remote, for
a given consistency group.
(2) An “actual recovery point objective” is the
time/data/writes that were waiting to be

88 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 20 Consolidated statistics output

transferred over the link to the copy,

averaged over the sampled time interval.

Monitoring and managing copies

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a group, and select a copy.
3. In the right pane, select the Status tab.
Results

The Status tab displays a graphical representation of the copy statuses. The following information
is displayed:

Table 21 Status tab

Label Displays

<Group The group name and the RPA which is handling the group data, both of which
Name> can be modified through the group policies. Group policies on page 65
Running on includes more information about group policies.
<RPA>

<Copy The relevant copy and RPA cluster names. The copy name can be modified
Name> at through the copy policies. Copy policies on page 70 includes more information
<Cluster about copy policies.
Name>
Replication A visual representation of the current replication modes and states.
modes and
l A dashed green line means that the system is replicating asynchronously.
states
l A dashed green line on top of a solid line means that the system is
replicating synchronously.
l A greyed out line means that replication has stopped.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 89

Protection

Table 21 Status tab (continued)

Label Displays

Note: The lines move in the direction of replication.

The transfer state is displayed in the center of each link between the
production and the copy. The Transfer state displayed here correlates to
what is displayed in the Consistency Group Transfer Status on page 28 widget
of the system Dashboard.

When replicating synchronously, the word synchronized is displayed.

Role The current role of the copy with regards to failover and regulation.
l Before failover: Production, Local Copy and Remote Copy
l After failover: Target at Production, Local Source and Remote Source
l During regulation: Regulated

Storage The image access mode.

Image The image currently being distributed to storage in the distribution phase.

When a copy is selected in the left pane, you can click the buttons at the bottom of the Status tab
to perform the following actions:

Table 22 Status tab options when a group is selected

Button Description

Test Copy Displays the Test a Copy on page 128 wizard, enabling you to test the
selected copy of the selected consistency group.

Fail Over Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint

Displays the Test a Copy and Fail Over on page 134 wizard, enabling you to
test and fail over to the selected copy permanently or temporarily.

Recover Displays the Test a Copy and Recover Production on page 132 wizard,
Production enabling you to test and recover production from the selected copy.

Start Only displayed if transfer is paused for the selected copy.

Transfer
Causes the transfer of writes from the production host to the selected copy
to start.

Pause Only displayed if transfer is active for the selected copy.

Transfer
Causes the transfer of writes from the production host to the selected copy
to pause.

Note: Best practice is not to use this command. Use Group policies on
page 65 to set policies for use of bandwidth. Pause transfer may be used
when WAN bandwidth is very limited and you wish to give the largest
bandwidth possible to another consistency group. In that case, you may
temporarily pause transfer for lower-priority consistency groups.

Disable Copy Only displayed if the selected copy is enabled. Disables the selected copy.

90 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 22 Status tab options when a group is selected (continued)

Button Description

Note: Disabling a copy stops all replication, deletes journals, and causes a
volume sweep when the copy is re-enabled.

Enable Copy Only displayed if the selected copy is disabled. Enables the selected copy.
Note: Enabling a disabled copy starts replication and a volume sweep
commences.

Remove Removes the copy from the consistency group.

Copy Note: You cannot remove the production copy.

Controlling RTO
Describes how to set and monitor the RPO at a specific copy.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a consistency group, and select a copy.
3. In the right pane, click the Copy Policy tab.
4. Control the part of RTO dedicated to data access using the Maximum journal lag setting in
the Journal policies on page 70.
Results
When the system approaches the value of Maximum journal lag, it moves to three-phase
distribution mode.
After you finish
To monitor the RTO:
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
3. In the right pane, click the Journal tab.
The value displayed in the Journal Lag field indicates the RTO in terms of data size.
Alternatively, run the get_group_statistics CLI command to display the journal lag.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 91

Protection

Controlling RPO
Describes how to set and monitor the RTO at a specific copy.
Before you begin
Only relevant in asynchronous replication mode
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
3. In the right pane, click the Link Policy tab.
a. In the Select link to set policy diagram, select the relevant link.
b. In the Protection Settings, set the RPO policy and click the Apply button.
4. Control the RPO for each consistency group through the RPO setting in the group Link
policies on page 67.

In RecoverPoint, RPO can be expressed in terms of time, quantity of data, ornumber of

writes. To guarantee the RPO, host applications can be throttled upon approaching the
defined RPO setting, using application regulation. To control application regulation, run the
regulate_application parameter of the config_link_policy CLI command. In
synchronous replication mode, the regulate_application parameter of the
config_link_policy CLI command is automatically enabled, and cannot be modified.

92 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

After you finish

To monitor the RPO:
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
3. In the right pane, click the Statistics tab and then, click the Replication Performance sub-tab
to monitor the consistency group's RPO in terms of time, writes, or quantity of data.
Note: You can also select Dashboard > System Limits, and then click on the Groups tab to
monitor the RPO of all consistency groups in RecoverPoint simultaneously.
In the RecoverPoint CLI, run the get_group_statistics command, and identify the Lag
output in the Link stats area.

Monitoring copy journals

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a group and select a copy.
3. In the right pane, select the Journal tab.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 93

Protection

Results

The following table describes the information displayed in the Journal tab of each copy.

Table 23 Copy journal tab

Info Description

Current Snapshot currently being distributed to the journal.

Storage Storage access status. The current condition of a volume at the copy storage
can be:
l No access, during normal replication.
l Direct Access, during direct image access.
l Logged Access, during logged access.

Journal Lag Amount of data (represented by snapshots) in the copy journal that has not
yet been distributed to the copy storage. The maximum journal lag setting
defines the current recovery point objective. In the event of a disaster, this is
the maximum amount of data loss that may be incurred.

Compression Note: This feature is relevant for both synchronous and asynchronous
Ratio replication.

Default = none
When enabled, instructs the target RPA of the consistency group to compress
the snapshots in the journal so that more images (that is, a longer protection
window) can be saved with the same journal capacity (saving storage cost).
Enabling this option is encouraged if you have cost considerations, a low
incoming write-rate, and/or limited bandwidth.
Take note of the following:
l Compression is not available in RecoverPoint/SE.
l Compression is not relevant for the production journal (since the
production journal does not contain snapshots).
l Compression impacts the CPU resources of the target RPA of the
consistency group, and can impact that RPA’s ability to sustain its write-
load. If the target RPA of the consistency group for which you want to

94 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 23 Copy journal tab (continued)

Info Description

enable this option is also transferring the data of other consistency

groups across the WAN, note that enabling this setting will affect the
RPAs transfer rate. See the RecoverPoint Release Notes for throughput
limitations.

Required Default = disabled

Protection Indicates how far in time the copy image can be rolled back.
Window

Current Indicates how far the copy journal can be rolled back. If the Required
Protection Protection Window is defined, the Current Protection Window will be in one of
Window the following statuses (indicated in parentheses after the Current Protection
Window):
l Sufficient: Image can be rolled back far enough to meet the Required
Protection Window
l Insufficient: Image cannot be rolled back far enough to meet the Required
Protection Window
l Extending: Replication has not been running long enough to be roll backed
as far as the Required Protection Window.
If the Required Protection Window is not defined, the status will be N/A.

Predicted System’s prediction of the eventual size of the protection window. Note that
Protection there is no guarantee on how long it will take to reach the predicted
Window protection window, and no guarantee that it will ever be reached (conditions
may change before it is reached).
If the Required Protection Window is defined, the Predicted Protection
Window is in one of the following statuses:
l Sufficient: Predicted Protection Window is large enough to meet the
Required Protection Window
l Insufficient: Predicted Protection Window is not large enough to meet the
Required Protection Window
If the Required Protection Window is not defined or replication has not
been running long enough to make predictions, no status will be indicated.
It can take 24 hours or longer of journal entries before the system finishes
calculating the predicted protection window.
Note: When snapshot consolidation is enabled, the Predicted
Protection Window value is displayed as N/A.

Space Saved Note: Not relevant for XtremIO snapshot consolidation

by
Consolidation Amount of space saved by RecoverPoint snapshot consolidation. This value is
updated only after a consolidation process completes.

If a snapshot consolidation job is in process, the following information is also displayed (not
relevant in XtremIO):

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 95

Protection

Table 24 Journal Tab: Snapshot Consolidation Progress information

Info Description

Consolidation Type of consolidation: Manual, Daily, Weekly, Monthly.

Type

Consolidation Start and end times of snapshots being consolidated.

Range

Progress Completion percentage. A pending status indicates that the consolidation is

waiting for additional snapshots in the journal to be distributed to the user
volume. The consolidation will begin automatically once the snapshots have
been distributed.

Stop Cancels the consolidation process. The consolidation process stops after it
completes processing the PIT it is currently working on. Stopping a
consolidation process returns the journal to the same state it was in before
the consolidation started.

The image list in the copy Journal tab displays the following information:

Table 25 Journal tab image list

Info Description

Point in Time Closing time of the snapshot.

Size Size of snapshot.

Bookmark Displays the bookmark name.

For consolidated snapshots, displays the consolidation type (manual, daily,
weekly, monthly). A tool tip indicates how much space was saved by the
consolidation.

Consistency Whether the snapshot is known by the user to be application-consistent or

not. The two possible values for this field are Application-Consistentand
Crash-Consistent. All snapshots are crash-consistent by default. Snapshots
are automatically marked application-consistent by KVSS during snapshot
creation, and can be manually marked by the user using the Snapshot Policy
button in the copy Journal tab.
Note: Marking a snapshot as application-consistent does not create an
application-consistent snapshot, it only tags the snapshot as application-
consistent. Snapshots marked as application-consistent have a higher

96 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 25 Journal tab image list (continued)

Info Description

probability of being included in the snapshots displayed in the image list. If

snapshot consolidation is enabled, consider setting a Consolidation Policy
of Never Consolidate for snapshots that are marked as application-
consistent.

Consolidation Consolidation policy applied to this snapshot (Always Consolidate, Never

Policy Consolidate, Survive Daily, Survive Weekly, Survive Monthly).
XtremIO snapshot consolidation policy is displayed as Always Consolidate.

Monitoring distribution performance

Describes how to monitor distribution performance at a specific copy.
Procedure
1. Detect Bottlenecks on page 196.
2. Select the General detection including initialization and high load periods with peak
writing analysis option.
3. Select both Advanced overview and Detailed overview.
4. Specify the other required information.
5. In the output, scroll-down until you reach a section that starts with the text: System
overview of the copy:<copyname

6. In five-phase distribution mode, note the process steps labeled as Distributor phase 1 and
Distributor phase 2, and note their performance statistics.

7. In three-phase distribution mode, note the process labeled Fast forward distribution
duration, and note the statistics.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 97

Protection

Enabling snapshot consolidation for non-XtremIO copies

Before you begin
l The total size of all snapshots between the specified start and end times must be at least 1 GB.
l Snapshots that account for 90% of the consolidation period must be available in journal.
For example, for daily consolidation to take place, the starting and ending snapshots must be at
least 22 hours apart. Likewise, automatic consolidation will not take place if the snapshots in
the journal exceed 110% of the consolidation period. For example, daily consolidation will not
take place if the starting and ending snapshots are more than 26 hours apart.
l You cannot enable automatic consolidation on a consistency group that belongs to a consistent
group set.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group and select a copy.
3. In the right pane, click the Copy Policy tab.
4. Select the Enable RecoverPoint Snapshot Consolidation checkbox to begin consolidating
the snapshots in your copy journal according to the default settings, or adjust the settings
to your specific requirements.
Results
Automatic snapshot consolidation begins according to the values set in the Copy Policy tab,
provided the system is in the distribution phase and initialization is over.
After you finish
To display the consolidation progress and space saved by the process:
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group and select a copy.
3. In the right pane, click the Journal tab.

Changing the snapshot consolidation policy of XtremIO copies

Before you begin
l There can be a minimum of one and a maximum of three snapshot consolidation policies.
l Changing the periodic Interval of the Snap-based replication policy in the group Link policies
on page 67 automatically updates the XtremIO detailed snapshot consolidation policies.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group and select a copy.
3. In the right pane, click the Copy Policy tab.

98 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

4. Change the XtremIO copy Journal policies on page 70:

l (Quick path) Define a Maximum Number of Snaps and a Required Protection

Window. The system automatically deduces the most efficient snapshot consolidation
policy based on your settings. Up to three policies may be deduced.
l (Advanced users only) Click the Edit Detailed Consolidation Settings link.
In the Edit Detailed Consolidation Settings dialog box, specify one to three
consolidation policies.

The system uses the entered values as guidelines. The actual number of snapshots per
timeframe is displayed beside each policy.
Note: For the consolidation policy values to be valid, the first consolidation policy in
the list must be of the shortest duration and the last policy in the list must be of the
longest duration. The first average snapshot frequency in the list must be higher
than the last.

Modifying consistency groups

Use the Manage Protection screen to:
l Modify a group’s protection policy on page 100
l Modify a link’s protection policy on page 100
l Remove a group on page 101
l Add a copy to a group on page 101
l Remove a copy from a group on page 107
l Add replication sets on page 107
l Remove replication sets on page 111
l Pause transfer for a group on page 112
l Start transfer for a group on page 112
l Disable groups on page 112
l Enable groups on page 112

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 99

Protection

l Rename a replication set on page 116

Modify a group’s protection policy

Modifies the protection policies of an existing consistency group.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. Select the consistency group in the left pane.
3. Click the Group Policy tab in the right pane.

Results
All of the group protection policies can be modified through the Group Policy tab. Group policies
on page 65 includes more information about group protection policies.

Modify a link’s protection policy

Modifies the protection policies of the links between an existing consistency group's copies.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. Select the consistency group and click the Link Policy tab.

100 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Results
All of the Link policies on page 67 can be modified through the Link Policy tab.
If you have created Policy Templates on page 55, use the Select Template drop-down to select a
policy template. Click Load to load the template settings into the dialog box.
NOTICE After loading a policy template, modify the Link policies on page 67 as required, and
click Apply to use the settings. The settings are not applied until the Apply button is clicked.

Remove a group
About this task
NOTICE This action cannot be undone.

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. Perform one of the following:
l Remove one group by selecting the consistency group in the left pane, clicking the
Status tab, and clicking Remove Group.
l Remove multiple groups by clicking Consistency Groups in the left pane, selecting one
or more groups in the right pane, and clicking Remove Group.

Add a copy to a group

Before you begin
l The Cancel button closes the wizard and disables image access without creating the copy.
l The Finish button closes the wizard, creates the copy, and optionally, starts replication to the
new copy.
NOTICE VPLEX Metro users can also use this procedure to turn a non-MetroPoint group into a
MetroPoint group.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
3. In the right pane, select the Status tab, and click Add Copy. The Add a Copy wizard is
displayed.
4. In the Add a Copy screen:
Note: This screen changes depending on whether or not VPLEX distributed volumes
have been mapped to RPA cluster at the production, and the group contains no remote
copies, or one remote copy.

l If the there are VPLEX distributed volumes mapped to the RPA cluster at the production,
and the group contains no remote copies, or one remote copy, the Add a Copy screen
will contain two options for adding a copy.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 101

Protection

If you are not a VPLEX Metro user or you do not want to turn a non-MetroPoint group
into a MetroPoint group, skip to the next bullet. If you are a VPLEX Metro user, and want
to turn a non-MetroPoint group into a MetroPoint group:
a. Select the Add Standby > Production Copy radio button.
b. Enter a name for the copy in the Standby production copy name field.
c. In the volume list, mark the checkboxes of each journal volume that you want to use
in your standby production journal.
Use the toolbar options at the top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the
required volumes in the volume list. For best performance, select volumes that are
identical in size. If identically sized volumes are not available, select volumes that are
similar in size.
These are the copy journal volumes for the standby copy, not the copy volumes.
d. Optionally, click Modify Policy to define the Journal policies on page 70 now, or skip
this step and define the policies later when you Modify a copy’s protection policies on
page 113.
The policy settings are optional. The default values provide a practical configuration.
It is recommended to accept the default settings unless there is a specific business
need to set other policies.
If you want to change the protection settings using Policy Templates on page 55, use
the Select Template drop-down to select one of your templates. Click Load to load
the settings in the template and click OK to apply the settings.
Note: This link is only enabled after volumes are selected in the volume list.

e. Click Next Display Copy Summary, and continue to the next step.
l Configure the copy settings:
If the group’s production volumes are not VPLEX distributed volumes or the group
contains more than one remote copy, in the Add a Copy screen:

102 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

a. Define the copy name, the RPA cluster that will manage the copy volumes, and the
replication mode.
b. For each production volume, click the Select volume link to add a volume to the
copy. The selected volume is the volume that the production volume is replicated to.
Note: If one volume at a copy is on an XtremIO array, all other XtremIO volumes
at that copy must be on the same array.
The volume list is displayed. The volume list only contains volumes of sizes that are
equal to, or greater than, the specified production volume.

Note: In VPLEX splitter environments, the VPLEX consistency group name will
only be displayed in the VPLEX Group column of the volume list if you Attach
volumes to the splitter on page 161 for the VPLEX splitter (including certificate).
After you enter VPLEX credentials, you will not be able to select VPLEX volumes
and non-VPLEX volumes in the same consistency group copy. It is recommended
that all volumes in a VPLEX consistency group be configured in a single
consistency group copy, and all volumes in a non-VPLEX consistency group be
configured in another consistency group copy.
In RecoverPoint/CL and RecoverPoint/EX, only the volumes that are mapped and
zoned to the RPA cluster are displayed in the available volumes list. In
RecoverPoint/SE, all of the volumes of the supported VNX Series array are displayed
in the available volumes list. See the appropriate technical notes for your splitter for
more information.
Use the toolbar options at the top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the
required volumes in the volume list. For best performance during failover, select
volumes that are the same size as the production volume. If volumes of the same size
are not available, select volumes that are as similar in size as possible.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 103

Protection

NOTICE You cannot proceed to the next step until the replication sets icon under
the volume list shows a green check mark to indicate that the number of
replication sets is equal to the number of production volumes.

a. Optionally, click Modify Policy to define the Copy policies on page 70 and Link policies
on page 67 now.
The policy settings are optional. The default values provide a practical configuration. It is
recommended to accept the default settings unless there is a specific business need to
set other policies.
If you want to change the protection settings using Policy Templates on page 55, in the
Link tab, use the Select Template drop-down to select one of your templates. Click
Load to load the settings in the template and click OK to apply the settings.

b. To continue configuring the group, click Next Define Copy Journal.

5. In the Define Copy Journal step:
If the volume that you specified in the last step is not on a Unity/VNXe/VNX array, skip to
step a.

l If the volume that you specified in the last step resides on a Unity/VNXe/VNX array that
has already been registered in RecoverPoint, and a resource pool was already registered
for the same Unity/VNXe/VNX array, the Journal Provisioning Method screen is
displayed.

If you want to allow RecoverPoint to automatically provision your journal volumes for
you, keep the Automatically Provision Journal Volumes radio button selected, and
select one of the following options:

104 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Option Description
Journal size Enter a value for the journal size to define an absolute journal size at
the copy.
Predicted Select this option and enter a value for predicted incoming write-rate
incoming and required protection window to have RecoverPoint/SE calculate the
write-rate required journal size based on your consistency group’s predicted
write-rate and a required protection window.
As you change this value, the journal size that is required to sustain the
entered values for predicted incoming write-rate and the required
protection window is dynamically updated in the Calculated journal
size field.

Required Note: Only relevant if Predicted incoming write-rate is selected.

protection
window Enter a value for the required protection window to have
RecoverPoint/SE calculate the required journal size based on your
consistency group’s predicted write-rate and a required protection
window.
As you change this value, the journal size that is required to sustain the
entered values for predicted incoming write-rate and the required
protection window is dynamically updated in the Calculated journal
size field.

When you are done configuring your journal settings, click Next Display Copy Summary.
l If you do not want RecoverPoint to automatically provision your journal volumes on
storage, ensure the Select Provisioned Journal Volumes radio button is selected.

For applications running on a host cluster, the journal volumes must not be resources of
the host cluster.
In the volume list:
a. Select the volumes to add to the journal.
On XtremIO arrays, the journal does not need to be larger than 2 GB for non-
distributed consistency groups, 40 GB for distributed consistency groups.
Use the toolbar options at the top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the
required volumes in the volume list. For best performance, select volumes that are
identical in size. If identically sized volumes are not available, select volumes that are
similar in size.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 105

Protection

b. Optionally, click Modify Policy to define the Journal policies on page 70 now.
The policy settings are optional. The default values provide a practical configuration.
It is recommended to accept the default settings unless there is a specific business
need to set other policies.
If you want to change the protection settings using Policy Templates on page 55, use
the Select Template drop-down to select one of your templates. Click Load to load
the settings in the template and click OK to apply the settings.
c. Click Next Display Copy Summary.
6. In the Copy Summary screen:
a. Select a copy to display its volume details and ensure the copy summary reflects your
anticipated copy configuration:

In RecoverPoint/SE:
l If you selected to Automatically provision journal volumes based on a pre-defined
Journal Size, the Journal Size is displayed at the bottom of the Copy Summary
screen.
l If you selected to Automatically provision journal volumes based on a Predicted
incoming write-rate, and a Required protection window, the Calculated Journal Size is
displayed at the bottom of the Copy Summary screen.

b. Use the following options to create the copy, and optionally, start replication.

Table 26 Options

Action Description

Start replication When selected, starts transfer to the copy as soon as the copy is created.
to copy when I Note: Before you start transfer to any copy, ensure that the copy volumes
click 'Finish' are unmounted from any hosts and any volume groups are deported from
the logical volume manager.

Finish Creates the copy, applies all of the specified settings, and starts a first-time
initialization process to synchronize the production volumes to the copy
volumes.
Before you click Finish, note the following:

106 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Table 26 Options (continued)

Action Description

l If First-time initialization is taking too long on page 246, instead of

allowing RecoverPoint to send the initialization data to the copy storage,
you can initialize the copy volumes from a backup disk, saving the time it
would otherwise take to synchronize the data over a WAN or FC
connection.
l By default, RecoverPoint writes the first snapshot directly to the copy
storage, bypassing the copy journal. Using the fast_first_init
parameter of the config_link_policy CLI command, you can override
the default setting and write the initialization snapshot first to the journal
(which is more time-consuming but provides greater data protection).
l To enable failover during initialization, set the value of the
allow_long_resync parameter of the config_copy_policy CLI
command to no (default is yes).

Remove a copy from a group

About this task
NOTICE This action cannot be undone.

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group and select the copy.
Note: If you want to turn a MetroPoint group into a non-MetroPoint group, select the
standby production copy.

3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, click Remove Copy.

Add replication sets

Before you begin
l The journal of all copies of the consistency group will be lost if all RPA clusters in your system
are not running RecoverPoint 4.4 or later.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select the consistency group.
3. In the right pane; select the Replication Sets tab, and click Add Replication Sets.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 107

Protection

The Add Replication Sets wizard opens and the Select Production Volumes screen is
displayed.
Note: For VMAX3/AF, the Select Production Storage Groups screen is displayed, and
you must choose whether the storage group you want to add at production contains
unprotected volumes only, or a mix of protected and unprotected volumes. If all volumes
are unprotected, click the Select storage group link to identify each storage group
whose volumes are to be added to the copy. The production and copy storage groups
must be identical. Use the Automatically match volumes button to match the volumes
of the production and copy storage groups. Alternatively, if the storage group at
production contains a mix of protected and unprotected volumes, click the Select
volume links to add individual volumes to the copy. Use the Volumes links in the
Volumes Details column to display details about the volumes in each storage group.

4. In the Select Production Volumes screen:

a. Select your production volumes in the volume list.
For VMAX3/AF, select storage groups.
Note: If one volume at a copy is on an XtremIO array, all other XtremIO volumes at
that copy must be on the same array.
Note: If one volume at a copy is on a VMAX3 or VMAX/AF array, all other
VMAX3/AF volumes at that copy must be on the same array.

108 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Use the toolbar options at the top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the
volumes.
The VPLEX consistency group name will only be displayed in the VPLEX Group column if
you have entered the VPLEX storage credentials (including certificate).
When you enter VPLEX credentials, you will not be able to select VPLEX volumes and
non-VPLEX volumes in the same RecoverPoint consistency group copy. It is
recommended that all volumes in a VPLEX consistency group be configured in a single
RecoverPoint consistency group copy, and vice versa.

b. To continue configuring the replication set, click Next Select Copy Volumes.
5. In the Select Copy Volumes screen:

a. Click the Select volume link to add a volume to the copy.

The selected volume is the volume that the production volume is replicated to. The
volume list is displayed.
The volume list only contains volumes of sizes that are equal to, or greater than, the
specified production volume.
Note: If one volume at a copy is on an XtremIO array, all other XtremIO volumes at
that copy must be on the same array.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 109

Protection

Note: If one volume at a copy is on a VMAX3 or VMAX/AF array, all other

VMAX3/AF volumes at that copy must be on the same array.

Use the toolbar options at the top-right corner of the screen to help you identify the
required volumes in the volume list.
For best performance during failover, select volumes that are the same size as the
production volume. If volumes of the same size are not available, select volumes that are
as similar in size as possible.
You cannot go on to the next step until the Replication sets icon under the volume list
shows a green check mark to indicate that the number of Replication sets is equal to the
number of production volumes.

b. When you are done selecting the volumes at each copy, click Next Review Replication
Sets.
6. In the Review Replication Sets screen:

110 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

a. Select a row in the replication sets table in the top section of the screen to display the
associated volume information in the bottom section.
b. Click on the replication set name to open the Edit Replication Set dialog box.

c. If required, rename the replication set.

d. Optionally, select the Attach as Clean checkbox (advanced users ONLY).
NOTICE When you add a new replication set to an existing consistency group,
RecoverPoint ensures consistency between the new copy volume(s) and their
production source(s) by performing a volume sweep on all of the volumes in the new
replication set. Selecting the Attach as Clean checkbox overrides the default
synchronization process by informing the system that the new copy volumes are
known to be an exact image of their corresponding production volumes. If Attach as
Clean is checked, and the new copy volumes are inconsistent with their
corresponding production volumes, they will remain inconsistent. To ensure
consistency, best practice is not to use this option and allow the default
RecoverPoint synchronization process to ensure consistency between the new copy
volumes and the production.

7. Click Finish.
Results
All of the consistency group volumes undergo a short pause in transfer and a short initialization,
and a volume sweep occurs on the newly added volumes.

Remove replication sets

Before you begin
l Enabled consistency groups must contain at least one replication set. If you want to remove all
of the replication sets in the group, click the Status tab and then click Disable Group.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. Select the consistency group.
3. Select the Replication Sets tab.
4. Select one or more replication sets to remove.
Note: Clicking on a cell in any of the copy columns displays the relevant volume
information in the bottom pane.

5. Click Remove Replication Set.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 111

Protection

Results
All of the consistency group volumes undergo a short pause in transfer and a short initialization.

Pause transfer for a group

Pauses transfer between the production and all copies of a consistency group.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select the consistency group.
3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, click Pause Transfer, and click yes in the
confirmation dialog box.
Results
Transfer is paused between the production and all copies of the consistency group.

Start transfer for a group

Starts transfer between the production and all copies of a consistency group.
Before you begin
l Before you start transfer to any copy, ensure that the copy volumes are unmounted from any
hosts and any volume groups are deported from the logical volume manager.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select the consistency group.
3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, click Start Transfer, and click yes in the
confirmation dialog box.
Results
Transfer starts between the production and all copies of the consistency group.

Disable groups
About this task
Note: Disabling a group stops replication, deletes all copy journals, and causes a full sweep on
all copies in the group when the group is re-enabled.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. Disable the group(s):
l To disable one group, select the group in the left pane, click the Status tab, and click
Disable Group.
l To disable multiple groups, click Consistency Groups in the left pane, select one or
more groups in the right pane, and click Disable Group.

Enable groups
Before you begin
l Enabling a consistency group automatically starts transfer.

112 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

l Before you start transfer to any copy, ensure that the copy volumes are unmounted from any
hosts and any volume groups are deported from the logical volume manager.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.

2. Enable the group(s):

l To enable one group, select the group in the left pane, click the Status tab, and click
Enable Group.
l To enable multiple groups, click Consistency Groups in the left pane, select one or more
groups in the right pane, and click Enable Group.

NOTICE When transfer starts, a full sweep occurs.

Modifying copies
Use the Manage Protection screen to:
l Modify a copy’s protection policies on page 113
l Pause transfer to a copy on page 114
l Start transfer to a copy on page 114
l Disable a copy on page 114
l Enable a copy on page 115

Modify a copy’s protection policies

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group and select a copy.
3. In the right pane, click the Copy Policy tab.

4. Modify the Copy policies on page 70 and the copy Journal policies on page 70 as required.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 113

Protection

5. If you have created Policy Templates on page 55, use the Select Template drop-down to
select one of them, and click Load to load their settings into the dialog box.
6. Click Apply to use the settings.
Note: The settings are not applied until the Apply button is clicked.

Remove a copy from a group

About this task
NOTICE This action cannot be undone.

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group, and select the copy.
3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, click Remove Copy, and click yes in the
confirmation dialog box.

Pause transfer to a copy

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a consistency group, and select the copy.
3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, click Pause Transfer, and click yes in the
confirmation dialog box.

Start transfer to a copy

Before you begin
l Ensure that the copy volumes are unmounted from any hosts and any volume groups are
deported from the logical volume manager.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a consistency group, and select the copy.
3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, click Start Transfer, and click yes in the
confirmation dialog box.

Disable a copy
Before you begin
l Disabling a copy stops replication, deletes the copy journal, and causes a volume sweep when
the copy is re-enabled.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a consistency group, and select the copy.
3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, click Disable Copy, and click yes in the
confirmation dialog box.

114 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

Enable a copy
Before you begin
l Enabling a copy automatically starts transfer.
l Before you start transfer to any copy, ensure that the copy volumes are unmounted from any
hosts and any volume groups are deported from the logical volume manager.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a consistency group, and select the copy.
3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, click Enable Copy, and click yes in the confirmation
dialog box.
NOTICE A volume sweep commences when transfer starts.

Modifying links
Modifies the protection policy of links between consistency group copies.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. Select the consistency group.
3. Click the Link Policy tab.
Results

All of the Link policies on page 67 can be modified through the Link Policy tab.
If you have created Policy Templates on page 55, select a link in the diagram and use the Select
Template drop-down to select a policy template. Click Load to load the template settings into the
Link Policy dialog box.
NOTICE After loading a policy template, modify the Link policies on page 67 as required, and
click Apply to use the settings. The settings are not applied until the Apply button is clicked.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 115

Protection

Modifying replication sets

Use the Replication Sets tab to:
l Rename a replication set
l Modify (replace volumes) in a replication set
l Resize volumes in a replication set
l Remove replication sets on page 111

Rename a replication set

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select the consistency group.
3. In the right pane; select the Replication Sets tab, select a replication set, and click Edit
Replication Set.

4. Change the value in the Name field.

5. Click OK.

Edit replication sets

Before you begin
Best practice is that all volumes in a replication set should be of the same size.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. Select the consistency group.
3. Select the Replication Sets tab, select a replication set, and click Edit Replication Set. In
the Edit Replication Set dialog box:

116 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

a. Click the link next to the RPA cluster containing the volume you want to replace.

In the Select Volume dialog box, note the production volume specified in the
Production volume area at the top of the screen.

b. Select the volume to which you want to replicate the specified production volume.
c. Click OK.
Results
Data transfer is briefly paused for the group. A volume sweep occurs on any added volume(s) and
a short initialization occurs on all other volumes in the group, when data transfer re-starts.

Resize volumes in a replication set

There are two procedures that can be used to resize volumes in a replication set:
l Resizing volumes dynamically on page 117
l Resizing volumes on page 118 (not relevant in XtremIO)

Resizing volumes dynamically

Before you begin
Only dynamic expanding of volumes is supported, not shrinking.
In XtremIO environments:
l XtremIO 4.0.4-41 or later must be available at all XtremIO copies.
l If you resize a production volume without resizing all of the copy volumes, transfer is paused
until the copy volumes are resized.
l If you resize a copy volume without resizing its production volume, failover and production
recovery will not be possible until the production volume is resized.
l To minimize the time that transfer is paused, best practice is to resize the copy volumes first,
and then the production volumes.
In Unity/VNXe/VNX environments:
l All volumes in a replication set must be attached to a Unity/VNXe/VNX splitter.
l VNX OE for Block 05.32 or later must be available at all copies.
l Thick volumes cannot be resized while snap-based replication is enabled.
Procedure
1. Resize the LUNs on storage.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 117

Protection

l On the Unity/VNXe/VNX array, in Unisphere:

a. Click the LUN tab.
b. Select the copy LUN or LUNs, right-click on the LUN name, select Expand, and enter
the new size.
c. Select the production LUN, select Expand, and enter the new size.
Once the LUNs have been resized, RecoverPoint will fake the sizes (as if they were still
the old sizes). Replication continues using the faked sizes.
l On the XtremIO array:
a. Access the XtremIO array containing the copy volumes.
b. Click the Configuration icon.
c. Right-click on the copy volume, click Modify, and enter a new size.
d. Click OK.
e. Repeat these steps on the production array.
In RecoverPoint, a short initialization process starts on all volumes in the group.
2. Display the new volume sizes in Unisphere for RecoverPoint.
Note: It can take up to half an hour for RecoverPoint to display the new LUN sizes. To
update the display immediately, run the rescan_san CLI command.

l For Unity/VNXe/VNX arrays:

a. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
b. In the left pane, select the consistency group.
c. In the right pane; select the Replication Sets tab, select the replication set, and click
Edit Replication Set.

It may take a few minutes for RecoverPoint to display the new volume sizes.
l For XtremIO arrays:
a. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
b. Select the consistency group.
c. Select the Replication Sets tab.

Resizing volumes
Before you begin
This procedure is not relevant for XtremIO.
Procedure
1. In RecoverPoint:

118 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

a. In Unity/VNXe/VNX only: Detach volumes from the splitter on page 162.

b. Remove replication sets on page 111.
2. On the storage, resize all LUNs in the replication set.
On VMAX3/AF arrays, first remove the volume that you want to resize from its storage
group at production. After resizing, add the resized volume back to the storage group.
Ensure the availability of volumes at each copy that match the size of the resized production
volume. Run the Solutions Enabler protect command to re-apply RecoverPoint protection
to the storage group.
3. In RecoverPoint:
a. Create a new replication set containing the resized LUNs according to Add replication
sets on page 107.
A short initialization process starts on all volumes in the group.
b. In Unity/VNXe/VNX only: Attach the volumes to the splitter according to Attach
volumes to the splitter on page 161.
Results
A volume sweep starts on the replication set.

Modifying journals
There are two ways to change the storage capacity of an existing journal:
l Add or edit journal volumes on page 119; this process does not trigger a full sweep
synchronization, nor does it erase all history in the existing journal. After this procedure, the
copy can still be rolled back to a previous point-in-time.
l Change the size of a journal LUN on storage on page 120; this process does trigger a full sweep
synchronization, and it does erase all history in the existing journal. After this procedure, the
copy cannot be rolled back to a previous point-in-time.

Add or edit journal volumes

Changes the storage capacity of a journal at a copy by adding or removing journal volumes.
Before you begin
l In RecoverPoint/CL and RecoverPoint/EX only: Only the volumes that are exposed to the
RPA cluster are displayed in the available volumes list. If the required volumes are not in the
available volumes list, mask the LUNs to RecoverPoint WWNs, and click the Rescan button to
update the list of available volumes.
l In RecoverPoint/SE, all of the volumes of the supported array are displayed in the available
volumes list.
l For best performance, select volumes that are identical in size. If identically sized volumes are
not available, select volumes that are similar in size.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand the consistency group, and select a copy.
3. In the right pane:
a. Select the Journal tab.
b. Click Edit Journal Volumes. The Edit Journal Volumes dialog box is displayed.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 119

Protection

c. Mark the checkboxes of the volumes that you want to add to the journal.
Clear the checkboxes of the volumes that you want to remove from the journal. Multiple
volumes can be selected.

d. Click OK.
After you finish
If you performed this procedure to enlarge the journal capacity after distributing the writes of this
consistency group across multiple RPAs, disable and then re-enable this group to trigger a full
sweep.

Change the size of a journal LUN on storage

Resizes journals by resizing an existing journal volume LUN on storage.
About this task
Note: Not relevant in XtremIO.

Procedure
1. In RecoverPoint, select Recovery > Test a Copy:
a. Enable access to the Latest Image at the copy containing the journal volume(s), in
Logged Access mode.
b. Exit the wizard without disabling image access.
Note: This ensures that all writes up until the latest image are transferred from the
copy journal to the copy storage, and only the host writes from that point forward
will need to be synchronized at the end of this procedure.

2. In RecoverPoint, disable the copy and remove the journal volume(s). Select Protection >
Manage Protection:
a. In the left pane, expand the group that the journal volume belongs to and select the
copy.
b. In the right pane; select the Journal tab, and click Edit Journal > Volumes. The Edit
Journal Volumes dialog box is displayed.

120 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

c. Clear the checkbox of the journal volume whose size you want to change and click OK.
The journal volume is removed from the RecoverPoint system.
3. At the copy’s SAN, dedicate more storage resources to the required LUN(s).
4. In RecoverPoint, click Edit Journal Volumes .
The RecoverPoint SAN discovery utility automatically detects the change in the physical
size of the volume.

5. Select the resized LUN(s).

6. Click the OK button to apply the changes and exit the dialog box.
7. In the right pane, select the Status tab.
8. Select Recovery > Manage Recovery, and select Finish Testing in the Select Next Action
combo box of the copy containing the expanded journal volume(s).
Results
Data transfer is briefly paused for the group, and a full sweep occurs, but only the writes that
occurred after image access was enabled to the copy will be synchronized.

Modifying snapshots
All of the points in time (snapshots) created by RecoverPoint are crash-consistent by default. You
can set or modify the Snapshot policies on page 121 of one or more snapshots by using the
following procedures:
l Modify the policies of one snapshot on page 122
l Create a bookmark and define snapshot policies for one group on page 123
Note: To automatically create parallel bookmarks at pre-defined intervals, Create a group
set on page 60.
l Create a bookmark and define snapshot policies across multiple groups on page 124
Use KVSS to Create and mark an application-consistent point in time on page 124.

Snapshot policies
Setting Description

Bookmark The name applied to a point in time snapshot. Bookmarks are used to
uniquely identify a consistent point in time across all volumes in the group.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 121

Protection

Setting Description

Mark as The two possible values for this field are Application-Consistentand Crash-
Consistent. All snapshots are Crash-Consistent by default. Select
Application-Consistentfrom the drop down if the selected snapshot is
known to be application-consistent.
Selecting Application-Consistent does not create an application-consistent
snapshot, it only tags the snapshot as application-consistent.
Note: Snapshots are automatically marked as application-consistent by
KVSS during snapshot creation, and can be manually marked by the
user using the Snapshot Policy button. Snapshots marked as
application-consistent have a higher probability of being displayed in
the image list. If snapshot consolidation is enabled, consider selecting
Define a Consolidation Policy for this Snapshot and Never Consolidate
this Snapshot for snapshots that are marked as application-consistent.

Define a Note: Not relevant for XtremIO nor Data Domain.

Consolidation
Policy for this Sets the consolidation policy for the snapshot.
Snapshot The default consolidation policy for a snapshot is Always Consolidate,
which means that the snapshot is consolidated the next time that the
consolidation process runs. Select Never Consolidate this Snapshot if
you never want this snapshot consolidated.
Select Snapshot must survive Daily/Weekly/Monthly consolidations
for:
l Daily: Snapshot remains after daily consolidations, but is consolidated
in weekly, monthly, and manual consolidations.
l Weekly: Snapshot remains after daily and weekly consolidations, but is
consolidated in monthly and manual consolidations.
l Monthly: Snapshot remains after daily, weekly, and monthly
consolidations, but is consolidated in manual consolidations.

Limit the Note: Relevant only for XtremIO and Data Domain copies. For XtremIO,
Retention Time relevant only in RecoverPoint 5.0.1 and later.
for this
Defines the period of time during which a snapshot is to be retained in the
Snapshot
copy journal. When the specified retention time is reached, the snapshot
will be prioritized for deletion with the same rules as all other snapshots.
Note: For Data Domain copies, the Retention policy can only be
changed using the set_backup_copy_retention_policy CLI
command.

Modify the policies of one snapshot

About this task
Note: Relevant only for XtremIO and Data Domain copies. For XtremIO, relevant only in
RecoverPoint 5.0.1 and later.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a consistency group, and select a copy.
3. In the right pane; select the Journal tab, select a snapshot in the list, and click Snapshot
Policy. The Snapshot Policy dialog box is displayed.

122 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

4. Enter or modify any of the Snapshot policies on page 121 and click OK.

Delete a snapshot
About this task
Note: Only relevant in RecoverPoint 5.0.1 and later with XtremIO at the copy.

Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, expand a consistency group, and select a copy.
3. In the right pane; select the Journal tab, select a snapshot in the list, and click Delete
Snapshot.
Results
The snapshot is deleted.

Create a bookmark and define snapshot policies for one group

Changes a snapshot’s settings and policies across all volumes in a group.
Before you begin
You can only bookmark a snapshot in a consistency group that is enabled and actively transferring.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select a consistency group.
3. In the right pane; select the Status tab, and click Create Bookmark.

4. Enter a descriptive name in the Bookmark field.

5. Enter or modify any of the Snapshot policies on page 121.
6. Click OK.
Note: All RecoverPoint snapshots are crash-consistent. Use KVSS to Create and mark
an application-consistent point in time on page 124.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 123

Protection

Create a bookmark and define snapshot policies across multiple groups

Identifies a similar recovery point across multiple consistency groups.
Before you begin
l You can only create a bookmark for a consistency group that is enabled and actively
transferring.
l When creating a bookmark for multiple groups in parallel, the system creates a bookmark with
the same name and snapshot policies at a similar point in time on each of the relevant
consistency group volumes.
About this task
Note: This procedure does not create parallel bookmarks. To create parallel (consistent)
bookmarks at pre-defined intervals, Create a group set on page 60.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
2. In the left pane, select Consistency Groups.
3. In the right pane; select two or more consistency groups, click Create Bookmark.

The Create Bookmark dialog box is displayed.

4. Enter a descriptive name in the Bookmark field.
5. Enter or modify any of the Snapshot policies on page 121.
6. Click OK.

Create and mark an application-consistent point in time

The RecoverPoint KVSS utility is a command-line utility that enables applying bookmarks to
Windows 2012 R2 and 2008-based applications that support Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy
Service (VSS). Microsoft Exchange and SQL are examples of Windows applications that support
Volume Shadow Copy Service.
About this task
A single bookmark can be used to bookmark VSS-aware applications in many consistency groups.
VSS guarantees that the applications are in a consistent state at the point-in-time when each
bookmark is applied to an image. As a result, recovery using an image with a KVSS bookmark is
faster than recovering from normal RecoverPoint images.

124 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Protection

The RecoverPoint Replicating Microsoft SQL Server Technical Notes and the RecoverPoint Replicating
Microsoft Windows File Systems Technical Notes contain additional detailed information on how to
download, install, and use RecoverPoint KVSS to create application-consistent bookmarks.
KVSS bookmarks are created using the kvss.exe bookmark command.
The working folder for running KVSS commands is %SystemDriver%/
EMCRecoverPointVSSProvider/.
Note: Any bookmarks created using KVSS are automatically marked as Application
Consistent- in the RecoverPoint Snapshot policies on page 121.
When using KVSS to apply bookmarks:
l Surround parameter values with quotation marks.
l You can use the vssadmin list writers command to obtain a list of registered writers on
the host.
l You can use the kvss.exe list command to display the components of each of the writers
found using the vssadmin list writers command.
l You can run the kvss.exe set_credentials command once per Windows user to define
the ip, user and password. After doing so, you will not need to type these values again.
l Multiple writers and groups can be entered simultaneously separated by a space.
To use KVSS in a Microsoft Cluster Server environment with Symmetrix DMX™ storage, the
SPC-2 flag must be enabled on the Symmetrix ports. The syntax is as follows:

kvss.exe bookmark
bookmark=<bookmark_name>
writers=<writer_name> <writer_name>
[groups=<group_name> <group_name>]
[consolidation_policy=never|survive_daily|survive_weekly|survive_monthy|
always]
[type=[FULL|COPY]][ip=<RecoverPoint_cluster_management_ip_address>]
[user=<RecoverPoint_username>]
[password=<RecoverPoint password>]

Note: Parameters that are surrounded by square brackets [ ] are optional.

Where:
l writer = a VSS-aware host application
l group = RecoverPoint consistency group
l bookmark = name by which you can identify the applied bookmark
l consolidation_policy = consolidation policy to set for this snapshot. Valid values are:
n never Snapshot is never consolidated.
n survive_daily Snapshot remains after daily consolidations, but is consolidated in
weekly, monthly, and manual consolidations.
n survive_weekly Snapshot remains after daily and weekly consolidations, but is
consolidated in monthly and manual consolidations.
n survive_monthly Snapshot remains after daily, weekly, and monthly consolidations, but
is consolidated in manual consolidations.
n always Snapshot is consolidated in every consolidation process, whether manual or
automatic.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 125

Protection

Note: The default policy is always. If the consolidation_policy parameter is not

specified, the snapshot is consolidated in both automatic and manual consolidation
processes.
l type = The shadow copy type: either FULL or COPY. This setting is optional. The default is
COPY. The writer application implements the full and copy settings. Generally, when type
= full, backup logs are truncated. When type = copy, backup logs are not truncated.
l ip = RPA cluster management IP
l user = RecoverPoint username
l password = RecoverPoint password
NOTICE You can use the kvss.exe set_credentials command to define the IP address,
user, and password one time per Windows user, instead of entering these values each time you
create a bookmark.
For example, to create a bookmark for a Microsoft Exchange application for the first time:

kvss.exe set_credentials
ip=”10.10.0.145”
user=”admin”
password=”admin”

kvss.exe bookmark
writers="Microsoft Exchange Writer"
groups="exchange\comp1" “exchange\comp2”
bookmark="exchange hourly snapshot"
consolidation_policy=”survive_daily”

To create a bookmark every subsequent time for a Microsoft Exchange application after defining
the ip, user, and password through the kvss.exe set_credentials command:

kvss.exe bookmark
writers="Microsoft Exchange Writer"
groups="exchange\comp1" “exchange\comp2”
bookmark="exchange hourly snapshot"
consolidation_policy=”survive_daily”

126 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 4
Recovery

This section describes how to test copies, recover from disasters, and migrate to a different
storage system.

l RecoverPoint Recovery....................................................................................................... 128

l Test a Copy..........................................................................................................................128
l Test a Copy and Recover Production................................................................................... 132
l Test a Copy and Fail Over.................................................................................................... 134
l Manage Recovery................................................................................................................ 138

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 127

Recovery

RecoverPoint Recovery
In Unisphere for RecoverPoint, data testing and recovery is guided by wizards, and performed
through the Recovery menu.
NOTICE Test a Copy and Fail Over is not relevant in ProtectPoint.

In Unity/VNXe/VNX environments you cannot enable image access in Virtual Access mode to a
snapshot created before replication volumes were resized. To access an image created before
volumes were resized, use Logged Access mode.
In XtremIO, if you enable access to a snapshot that was created before you resized LUNs,
RecoverPoint automatically adjusts the LUNs at the accessed point in time to the resized volume
size.

Test a Copy
Use the Test a Copy wizard to briefly access and test your copy images.

How to test a copy

Procedure
1. At the copy host, mount the copy volumes.
2. In Unisphere for RecoverPoint, select Recovery > Test a Copy.
3. In the Select a Copy screen, select a consistency group or a group set:

128 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Recovery

l If you selected a consistency group, select a non-production copy from the list of copies
or the copy diagram.

l If you selected a group set, select a target RPA cluster.

4. Click Next Select an Image.

Selecting an image
Procedure
1. In the Select an Image screen, select the copy image that you want to access.
To test the image, you may want to start with the last image known to be valid. To analyze
data, you generally want the latest image.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 129

Recovery

2. Unless your copy is on an XtremIO array, you will have to select the required Image access
mode. If your copy is on an XtremIO array, skip this step.
Virtual Access without Roll image in background is preferred. However, if you need to
test images for a longer period of time or need maximum performance while testing, select
Virtual Access and check the Roll to image in background checkbox, or select Logged
Access.
3. Mount the copy volumes that you want to access and import any volume groups.

4. Click Next Test the Image to start enabling image access to the copy volumes.

Testing the image

About this task
The Test the Image screen differs depending upon whether you selected a consistency group or a
group set.

130 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Recovery

If any of the groups or copies in a group set are not legal for the requested operation, they are not
displayed in the Relevant copies at target cluster table.
Procedure
1. Use the Test the Image screen to monitor your testing activity.
2. Before you begin testing, wait for image access to be enabled.
If you are accessing the image in logged access mode, wait for the system to roll to the
selected image.

Note the status of the Image access log capacity progress bar. It indicates the amount of
time that you have left to access the image before writes to the copy are blocked and you
will have to add journal volumes, undo writes, enable direct access or disable image access.
3. Test the copy image, to ensure its suitability to your purposes.
While testing the copy image, you can click Roll to Image to physically roll to the desired
image (in Virtual Access mode), Enable Direct Access to bypass the image access log and
write directly to the copy storage, Undo Writes to undo all writes to the copy volumes,
Cancel to disable image access, or Save & Close to exit the wizard without disabling image
access and display the Manage Recovery screen.
Note:
l If you Enable Direct Access you cannot roll back to an earlier image of the accessed
copy if you discover corrupted data. Moreover, in the event of a disaster at the
production during testing, you will not be able to remove any new data written to the
copy during testing unless the group contains another non-production copy.
l Before you Undo Writes, at the copy host, shut down all applications accessing the
group volumes, unmount all copy volumes, and deport any volume groups. After the
writes are undone, at the copy host, mount the copy volumes and import volume
groups to continue testing.

4. When you are done testing, click Cancel to disable image access.
5. At the copy host, stop all applications and unmount the copy volumes. Deport any copy
volume groups.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 131

Recovery

Test a Copy and Recover Production

Use Test a Copy and Recover Production to display the Recover Production wizard. The
Recover Production wizard guides you through the process of correcting file or logical corruption,
by rolling the production back to a previous point-in-time.

How to recover production

Procedure
1. Select Recovery > Test a Copy and Recover Production.
2. In the Select a Copy screen, select either a consistency group or a group set.
l If you selected a consistency group, select a non-production copy from the list of copies
or the copy diagram.

l If you selected a group set, select a target RPA cluster from the list.

132 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Recovery

3. Click Next Select an Image.

Selecting an image
Procedure
1. In the Select an Image screen, select the image that you want to recover production from.
To restore your production from a copy, you generally want the most recent copy image
that you know to be valid. For example, if you are using Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy
Service, you probably want to select the most recent shadow copy.

2. Select your preferred image access mode.

3. Mount the copy volumes that you want to access and import any volume groups.

4. Click Next Start Recovery.

RecoverPoint starts enabling access to the selected image at the copy.

Starting recovery
About this task
The Start Recovery screen differs depending upon whether you selected a consistency group or a
group set.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 133

Recovery

If any of the groups or copies in a group set are not legal for the requested operation, they are not
displayed in the Relevant copies at target cluster table.
Procedure
1. Use the Start Recovery screen to monitor your copy testing, and start recovery.
2. Wait for image access to be enabled.
Note the status of the Image access log capacity progress bar. It indicates the amount of
time that you have left to access the image before writes to the copy are blocked and you
will have to add journal volumes, undo writes, enable direct access, or disable image access.
3. Test the copy image, to ensure its suitability to your purposes.
Note the status of the Image access log capacity progress bar. It indicates the amount of
time that you have left before writes to the copy are blocked and you will have to add
journal volumes, undo writes, enable direct access or disable image access.
While testing the copy image, click Undo Writes to undo all writes to the copy volumes
without disabling image access, Cancel to disable image access, or Save & Close to exit the
wizard without disabling image access.
Note: Before you click Undo Writes, at the copy host, shut down all applications
accessing the copy volumes, unmount all copy volumes, and deport any volume groups.
After the writes are undone, mount the copy volumes and import any volume groups to
continue testing.
To recover individual XtremIO production volumes having an XtremIO or Data Domain copy,
click Volumes to Recover....
Note: Not available when recovering production for a group set.

4. Before starting recovery, if necessary, click Undo Writes to remove any writes to the copy
before production recovery. Then, at the copy host, unmount the copy volumes and deport
any volume groups.
Note: If you do not Undo Writes now, any writes made to the copy while image access
was enabled will be transferred to the production when you click Finish. Before you
click Undo Writes, at the copy host, shut down all applications accessing the copy
volumes, unmount all copy volumes, and deport any volume groups. After the writes are
undone, mount the copy volumes and import any volume groups to start production
recovery.

5. Click Finish to start production recovery and display the Manage Recovery on page 138
screen.
Note: After production recovery is complete, the group undergoes a short initialization
to synchronize the new production data at the copies.

Test a Copy and Fail Over

Use Test a Copy and Fail Over to display the Failover wizard. The failover wizard guides you
through the process of migrating all of your production activities to a copy. For groups with more
than one non-production copy, you can also use the failover wizard to temporarily fail over to a
copy while performing routine maintenance on the production system, and then fail back to the
production.

134 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Recovery

How to fail over

Before you begin
l You can only fail over temporarily if you have more than one non-production copy in the group.
l If your group(s) only contain one non-production copy, the failover will be permanent. Before
you begin a permanent failover, shut down any production host activities on Windows Server
platforms. To ensure an up-to-date image of the file system, flush all file systems that reside
on the production volumes. Some applications, such as Exchange, have their own cache, which
should be flushed as well. Close all applications that are using the consistency group volumes
at the production site and place each drive volume used by the consistency group into an
offline state.
Procedure
1. Select Recovery > Test a Copy and Fail Over.
2. In the Select a Copy screen, select either a consistency group or a group set.
l If you selected a consistency group, select a non-production copy from the list of copies
or the copy diagram.

l If you selected a group set, select a target RPA cluster from the list.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 135

Recovery

3. Click Next Select an Image.

Selecting an image
Procedure
1. In the Select an Image screen, select the image to fail over to.

To permanently fail over to a copy, you generally want the most recent copy image that you
know to be valid, that was created after placing all consistency group drives into an offline
state at the production. For example, if you are using Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy
Service, you probably want to select the most recent shadow copy.
2. Select your preferred image access mode.
3. Mount the copy volumes that you want to access and import any volume groups.

4. Click Next Start Failover.

RecoverPoint starts enabling access to the specified copy image.

Starting failover
About this task
The Start Failover screen differs depending upon whether you selected a consistency group or a
group set.

136 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Recovery

If any of the groups or copies in a group set are not legal for the requested operation, they will not
be displayed in the Relevant copies at target cluster table.
Procedure
1. Use the Start Failover screen monitor your testing activity, and start failover.
2. Wait for image access to be enabled.
Note the status of the Image access log capacity progress bar. It indicates the amount of
time that you have left to access the image before writes to the copy are blocked and you
will have to add journal volumes, undo writes, enable direct access or disable image access.
3. If you are only failing over temporarily, and planning to fail back, skip this step.
If you are failing over permanently; resume production disk activities by placing each
production drive volume used by the consistency group into an online state now.
4. At the copy host, mount the copy volumes that you want to access and import any volume
groups.
5. Test the copy image, to ensure its suitability to your purposes.
While testing the copy image, click Undo Writes to undo all writes to the copy volumes
without disabling image access, Cancel to disable image access, or Save & Close to exit the
wizard without disabling image access and display the Manage Recovery on page 138
screen.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 137

Recovery

Note: Before you click Undo Writes, at the copy host, shut down all applications
accessing the group volumes, unmount all group volumes, and deport any volume
groups. After the writes are undone, mount the copy volumes and import any volume
groups to continue testing.

6. When testing is complete and you are ready to fail over, if your group only contains one non-
production copy, the failover will be permanent.
At the copy host, unmount the copy volumes and deport any volume groups now.
7. Click Finish.
l If there is only one non-production copy in your group(s), the marking information in the
production journal is deleted, the copy journal is deleted, and the group undergoes a full
sweep before normal replication is resumed.
l If there is more than one non-production copy in your group(s), the Manage Recovery on
page 138 screen is displayed. You can repair the production while your applications and
business operations continue at the copy. When you are done, use the Manage Recovery
on page 138 screen to:
n Fail back to production
n Set your copy (or copies) as production

Manage Recovery
Use Manage Recovery to monitor and manage all of the accessed copies and recovery activities
currently occurring in the system.

The Manage Recovery screen displays an activity bar for each copy (or copies, in the case of a
group set) on which an image has been accessed by RecoverPoint. In each copy activity bar, click
the Show Activity Diagram link to monitor the activity progress and use the Select Next Action
drop-down to complete the activity.

138 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Recovery

Note: If an action that is part of a recovery activity fails for one or more of the groups in a
group set, you may want to manually perform the action for each group on which the action
failed in order to bring all of the group set's groups to the same recovery state.

Testing a copy
While Testing a copy, click Select Next Action to:
Continue Testing
Opens the Test a Copy wizard to Testing the image on page 130.

Finish Testing
Stops testing and disables image access to the relevant group or group set copies.

Failing over
While Failing Over, click Select Next Action to:
Fail Back to Production
When repairs at the production site are complete, resumes production activities at the original
production site.
Opens the Failover wizard to Starting failover on page 136. In the Start Failover screen, click
Fail Over to start failing back.
Note: The production journal is deleted.

Replication is resumed. The direction of replication is restored from the original production to
the original copies.
After failback, at the copy host(s), unmount the copy volumes and deport any volume groups.

Set Copy/Copies as Production

Fails the production over to the selected accessed copy (or copies).
Note: Before selecting this option, at the relevant copy host(s), close any applications
accessing the copy(s), unmount the copy volumes and deport any volume groups.

If the group contained more than one non-production copy, the Set Production dialog box is
displayed, prompting you to decide what you want to do with any target copies of the new
production after failover. If you are failing over a group set containing groups with more than

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 139

Recovery

one non-production copy, the Set Production dialog box is not displayed. In this case, before
setting a copy as the new production, you will need to manually Modify a link’s protection
policy on page 100 between the new production and all of the new target copies.

If you want to use a copy, configure a new link for it and define a link policy (not necessary for
Data Domain copies). Removing a copy deletes the copy data and settings from storage.
Disabling a copy retains the copy data and settings on storage.
Note: The journal of the new production is deleted. Replication starts from the new
production to the new copies.

Back to Wizard
Opens the Failover wizard to the Start Failover screen.

Recovering production
While recovering production only Back to Wizard is available. Click Back to Wizard to open the
Recover Production wizard to the Start Recovery screen. In the Start Recovery screen, click
Recover Production to start the recovery activity.

140 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 5
RPA Clusters

This section describes the RPA Clusters menu and how to use it to manage and monitor replication
in RecoverPoint.

l RecoverPoint clusters..........................................................................................................142
l General Cluster Info............................................................................................................. 142
l Storage................................................................................................................................ 145
l Splitters............................................................................................................................... 157
l RPAs....................................................................................................................................162
l vCenter Servers...................................................................................................................169

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 141

RPA Clusters

RecoverPoint clusters
Monitoring or administration of components in a RecoverPoint system that are managed by RPA
clusters is performed through the RPA Clusters interface. The information for each RPA cluster is
displayed in a separate tab of the interface.

Table 27 RPA cluster options

Option When to use

General To display the specified RPA cluster graphically as part of a site map and view
Cluster Info general cluster information, or to display any alerts that may have been logged
for any of the physical components of your RecoverPoint system, at the
selected RPA cluster.

Storage To register arrays, vCenter Servers, and resource pools and manage their
registration in the RecoverPoint system.

Splitters Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint

To display the splitter table, add/remove splitters, or attach/detach volumes

from splitters at the selected RPA cluster.

RPAs To display the RPA table containing all RPAs in the selected RPA cluster, and
the status and properties of each.

vCenter Note: Not relevant in ProtectPoint

Servers
To monitor, register, or remove vCenter Servers.

General Cluster Info

Use the RPA Clusters > RPA-Cluster-Name tab > General Cluster Info link to graphically display
an overview of the current state of individual components in your RecoverPoint system.

142 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Figure 4 RPA Clusters: General Cluster Info

The General Cluster Info section contains a Cluster Diagram and a Cluster Details section that
allow you to easily monitor and analyze the current state of the RPA cluster. The cluster diagram
contains all of the major components of the RecoverPoint system (host, storage, and RPAs) and
the connectivity between them and the RPA cluster. An icon is displayed on any system
component for which system alerts have been registered.

The following information is displayed in the details section below the cluster diagram:

Table 28 RPA cluster information

Information Description

RecoverPoint The version of the RecoverPoint software that is currently installed on the
Version RPA cluster.
If the system is in maintenance mode, the RecoverPoint version will display
“N/A System is in maintenance mode”.

Internal RPA The internal system name given to RPA clusters, and used in upgrade
Cluster Name scenarios.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 143

RPA Clusters

Table 28 RPA cluster information (continued)

Information Description

Management The IP address assigned to the LAN interface of the RPA cluster in order to
IPv4 define the management interface network, in IPv4 format.
Note: Use this IP to connect to the RPA in the RPA cluster that is running
the cluster control, in IPv4 format.

Management The IP address assigned to the LAN interface of the RPA cluster in order to
IPv6 define the management interface network, in IPv6 format.
Note: Use this IP to connect to the RPA in the RPA cluster that is running
the cluster control, in IPv6 format.

Software One of the system parameters sent to SyR.

Serial ID

Number of The number of RPAs in the RPA cluster.

RPAs

RPA Type The type of the RPA cluster. Valid values are Physical or Virtual.

Maintenance Unisphere for RecoverPoint will enter maintenance mode:

Mode
l During minor version upgrade.
l During major version upgrade.
l When replacing an RPA in an existing cluster.
l When adding new RPAs to existing clusters.
l When converting an environment to a RecoverPoint/SE or
RecoverPoint/CL configuration.
l When entering maintenance mode through CLI.
l If an external system causes the system to enter maintenance mode.
When in this mode, Unisphere for RecoverPoint can only monitor the
system; user-initiated capabilities are disabled. Once the system exits this
mode, Unisphere for RecoverPoint will return to standard managing and
monitoring function.
Whether or not the system is in maintenance mode. If so, the specific
maintenance activity that is currently being performed is displayed.
RecoverPoint system maintenance is performed using the Deployment
Manager. See the RecoverPoint Installation and Deployment Guide for more
information on maintenance mode.
Valid values are:
l None (when the system is not in maintenance mode)
l Minor Upgrade
l Major Upgrade
l Hardware Replacement
l RPA Cluster Upgrade
l Repository Change
l RP/SE Conversion
l System Modification
l User-Initiated Maintenance Mode

144 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Table 28 RPA cluster information (continued)

Information Description

l RPA Cluster Connection

l Unknown

Time Zone The time zone used by the RPA cluster.

Storage
Use the RPA Clusters > RPA-Cluster-Name tab > Storage link to enable RecoverPoint storage
awareness by registering new arrays, vCenter Servers and resource pools or manage existing
registered arrays, vCenter Servers, and resource pools.
Note: In RecoverPoint, Data Domain block services for ProtectPoint pools are referred to as
resource pools

Figure 5 RPA Clusters: Storage

Use the Storage link to:

l Display registered storage on page 146

l Register storage on page 147
l Unregister storage on page 152
l Edit storage registration details on page 152
l Display registered resource pools on page 154
l Register resource pools on page 155
l Unregister resource pools on page 156

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 145

RPA Clusters

Display registered storage

About this task
Use the following procedure to display all of the storage systems currently registered at an RPA
cluster.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, select Storage.

Results
The Registered Storage table is displayed. The Registered Storage table contains the list of all
of the storage currently registered at the selected RPA cluster with the following storage-specific
information:

Table 29 Storage information

Information Description

Name The name of the registered storage in the RecoverPoint system.

Serial The name of the splitter in the RecoverPoint system.

Number

Type The type of storage. Valid storage types are:

l VNX
l ScaleIO
l VPLEX
l vCenter Server
l VMAX AF / VMAX3
l XtremIO
l Data Domain

IP The IP address of the array or vCenter Server management interface. In the

case of ScaleIO storage, it may be a list of IP addresses.

146 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Table 29 Storage information (continued)

Information Description

Version The version of the operating system running on the storage.

Splitter The name of the splitter in the RecoverPoint system.

Note: Only available in VNX.

Connectivity Whether or not there is connectivity between the storage and the RPA
Status cluster.

Connectivity Whether the connection between the storage and the RPA cluster is via Fibre
Type Channel (FC) or IP.

Register storage
Before you begin
Note: To add Unity and VNXe storage arrays, do not use this procedure; rather, use the "Add
splitters" procedure.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click Storage.
Note: You can also register vCenter Servers by selecting RPA Clusters > <RPA-
Cluster-Name> tab > vCenter Servers .

In the right pane, the Registered Storage table is displayed. The Registered Storage table
contains the list of all of the Data Domains, arrays and vCenter Servers that are currently
registered at the selected RPA cluster and their storage information.

3. In the right pane, in the Registered Storage tab, click Add. The Register Storage dialog
box is displayed.
4. In the Register Storage dialog box:
l Register an array seen by this RPA cluster
To register any Data Domain, XtremIO, VPLEX, ScaleIO, VNX, VMAX AF / VMAX3, or
vCenter Server that has already been masked to the RPA cluster:

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 147

RPA Clusters

a. Select an array from the list

b. Define the storage login credentials (not required for VMAX AF / VMAX3):
n Define Data Domain login credentials on page 150
n Define ScaleIO login credentials on page 149
n Define vCenter login credentials on page 151
n Define Unity/VNXe/VNX login credentials on page 151
n Define VPLEX login credentials on page 151
n Define XtremIO login credentials on page 149
l Register any storage
To register any Data Domain, XtremIO, VPLEX, ScaleIO, VNX or vCenter Server,
regardless of whether or not it is masked to the RPA cluster:

148 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

a. Select the storage type from the drop-down.

b. Define the storage login credentials:
n Define Data Domain login credentials on page 150
n Define ScaleIO login credentials on page 149
n Define vCenter login credentials on page 151
n Define Unity/VNXe/VNX login credentials on page 151
n Define VPLEX login credentials on page 151
n Define XtremIO login credentials on page 149

Define ScaleIO login credentials

About this task
For ScaleIO storage, the ScaleIO MDM credentials and IP1 address are mandatory.

Define XtremIO login credentials

About this task
Note: When registering an XtremIO array, RecoverPoint automatically creates an initiator
group on the XtremIO array and registers all RPA initiators. This initiator group contains all
WWNs of all RPAs in the cluster.
Procedure
1. Enter the Serial number (PSNT) of the XtremIO cluster.
2. Enter the IP address of the XtremIO Management Server (XMS).

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 149

RPA Clusters

If the XtremIO Management Server manages more than one cluster, register each cluster
separately.
3. Enter the XtremIO rp_user as the User.
4. Enter the rp_user password as the Password. This password can only be changed using the
XtremIO user interface.

Define Data Domain login credentials

Procedure
1. Enter the Data Domain IP address.

2. Enter the username and password for the block services for ProtectPoint pool and DD Boost
storage-unit in the Username and Password fields.
3. Enter the DD Boost Storage Unit to use as the ProtectPoint catalog.

150 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

4. By default, the Use FC for data transfer checkbox is selected. Uncheck to use IP only for
data transfer.

Define VPLEX login credentials

About this task
For VPLEX storage, the storage IP address, username and password are mandatory. Alternatively,
retrieve a certificate from system or manually select it.

Define Unity/VNXe/VNX login credentials

About this task
For VNX storage, all of the fields are mandatory. Enter the IP addresses of SP-A and SP-B, the
username and password of your storage and an authentication scope.

Define vCenter login credentials

About this task
For vCenter Server storage, all of the fields are mandatory and the default TCP port is 443. Best
practice is to configure the vCenter Server to require the use of a certificate because once
RecoverPoint has read the certificate, it does not need further access to the location. The default
certificate locations are:
l Windows 2003 Server:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\VMware\VMware
VirtualCenter\SSL\rui.crt.
l Windows 2008 Server:
C:\Users\All Users\Application Data\VMware\VMware VirtualCenter\SSL
\rui.crt.
For more information about the location of the security certificate, refer to Replacing vCenter
Server Certificates VMware vSphere 4.0, available at www.vmware.com.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 151

RPA Clusters

Unregister storage
Unregisters storage from an RPA cluster.
About this task
Note: You can also unregister vCenter Servers by selecting RPA Clusters > RPA-Cluster-
Name > vCenters Server.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click Storage.

In the right pane, the Registered Storage tab is displayed. The Registered Storage tab
contains the list of all of the storage currently registered at the selected RPA cluster, and its
storage information.

3. In the right pane:

a. Select your storage in the Registered Storage tab.
b. Click Remove.

Edit storage registration details

About this task
Use the following procedure to edit the registration details of a Data Domain, an array, or a
vCenter Server at an RPA cluster.

152 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click Storage.
Note: You can also edit the registration details of a vCenter Servers from the vCenter
Servers on page 169 link.
In the right pane, the Registered Storage table is displayed. The Registered Storage table
contains the list of all of the arrays and vCenter Servers that are currently registered at the
selected RPA cluster and their storage information.

3. In the right pane:

a. Select storage in the Registered Storage table.
b. Click Edit. The Edit Storage Registration dialog box is displayed.

c. In the Edit Storage Registration dialog box:

If required, modify the storage name.
a. If required, define the login credentials for your array:

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 153

RPA Clusters

l Define Data Domain login credentials on page 150

l Define ScaleIO login credentials on page 149
l Define vCenter login credentials on page 151
l Define Unity/VNXe/VNX login credentials on page 151
l Define VPLEX login credentials on page 151
l Define XtremIO login credentials on page 149
b. Click OK.

Display registered resource pools

About this task
Use the following procedure to display all of the resource pools that have been registered at an
RPA cluster.
Note: This procedure is not relevant for XtremIO arrays.

Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, select Storage.

In the right pane, the Registered Storage table is displayed.

3. In the Registered Storage table, select an array or vCenter Server.

The Registered Resource Pools table is displayed under the Registered Storage tab. The
Registered Resource Pools table contains the list of all of the resource pools of the
selected storage, that are currently registered at the selected RPA cluster. The following
storage-specific information is displayed for each registered resource pool:

Table 30 Resource pool storage information

Information Description

Name The name of the registered resource pool in the RecoverPoint system.

Type The resource pool type.

154 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Table 30 Resource pool storage information (continued)

Information Description

Valid resource pool types are:

l RAID groups
l Storage pools
l Data stores
l vDisk pools

Total Size The total capacity of the resource pool.

Available The total capacity of the resource pool minus the capacity of the volumes that
Size were already allocated in the resource pool.

Tiers The physical type of the storage. For example, Fibre Channel, SATA, etc.

Available The tiering policies that are available on storage and can be automatically
Tiering applied to volumes in RecoverPoint when users automatically provision
Policies volumes.

Register resource pools

Registers resource pools at an RPA cluster.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters.
2. Select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
3. In the left pane, select Storage.
In the right pane, the Registered Storage tab is displayed. The Registered Storage tab
contains the list of all of the storage systems that are currently registered at the selected
RPA cluster and their storage information.

4. In the Registered Storage tab, select an array or vCenter Server.

5. Under the Registered Resource Pools table, click Add.
The Register Available Resource Pools dialog box is displayed.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 155

RPA Clusters

6. In the Register Available Resource Pools dialog box:

a. Select the resource pool that you want to register.
b. Click OK.

Unregister resource pools

About this task
Use the following procedure to unregister resource pools of an array or vCenter Server at an RPA
cluster.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, select Storage.
In the right pane, the Registered Storage table is displayed. The Registered Storage table
contains the list of all of the arrays and vCenter Servers that are currently registered at the
selected RPA cluster and their storage information.

3. In the Registered Storage tab, select the array or vCenter Server whose resource pools
you want to unregister.
The Registered Resource Pools table is displayed in the Registered Storage tab. The
Registered Resource Pools table contains the list of all of the resource pools of the

156 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

selected array or vCenter Server, that are currently registered at the selected RPA cluster
and their storage information.

4. In the Registered Resource Pools table:

a. Select the resource pool you want to unregister.
b. Click Remove.

Splitters
Note: This section is not relevant in XtremIO, which is a splitter-less solution.

Select RPA Clusters > RPA-Cluster-Name > Splitters to display all of the splitters that have
been added to RecoverPoint, add and remove splitters, and attach or detach volumes from
splitters.
Figure 6 RPA Clusters: Splitters

In RecoverPoint, all installed splitters are automatically added to the system, and all volumes that
are masked and zoned to the RPA are automatically attached to all existing splitters at a site. In
the rare case that a splitter is added to the system after the system is already installed, you will
need to add the splitter to the system, and attach the relevant volumes to the splitter. Multiple
splitters can be attached to one RPA cluster. See the RecoverPoint Release Notes for the limitation
on the maximum number of splitters that can be attached to a cluster.

Display splitter information

Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, select Splitters.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 157

RPA Clusters

Results

The Splitters table is displayed in the right pane, with the following splitter-specific information:

Information Description

Status Whether the splitter is up or down.

Name The name of the splitter in the RecoverPoint system.

Type The type of storage that the splitter is installed on.

RPA Link Whether or not there is connectivity between the RPA and the splitter.

Attached The number of RPA clusters attached to the splitter.

RPA Clusters

When a VPLEX splitter is selected in the Splitters table, the Directors are displayed above the
Volumes Attached to Selected Splitter section.

Display volume information

Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, select Splitters. The Splitter table is displayed in the right pane.
3. In the right pane; select a splitter in the Splitter table.
The Volumes Attached to Selected Splitter section displays the volumes attached to the
selected splitter, and the following volume-specific information:

158 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Table 31 Volume information

Information Description

Group The name of the group that the volume belongs to.

Copy The name of the copy that the volume belongs to.

Replication The name of the replication set that the volume belongs to.
Set

Access The data access state of the volume, with regards to the splitter. Once a
volume is configured in RecoverPoint, including attachment to a splitter, the
RPA can place the volume in any of the displayed states.

Also Whether or not the volumes is also replicated by the Symmetrix replication
Replicated technology, SRDF.
by SRDF

Add splitters
Connects the RecoverPoint write-splitters to RecoverPoint.
Before you begin
l Not relevant for XtremIO, which is a splitter-less solution.
l If splitters have been installed on the arrays before installing RecoverPoint, they are added
automatically to the RecoverPoint system, see splitter installation in the RecoverPoint
Installation and Deployment Guide and the RecoverPoint technical notes for the specific splitter
type. However, if a storage array was added to the system after deployment, the splitter will
need to be added to the system.
l All splitters that are masked and zoned to the RPAs are automatically added to the system,
unless they are already attached to another RPA cluster. VPLEX, VNX, and Symmetrix splitters
are automatically added to the system regardless of masking and zoning, unless they are
already attached to the maximum allowed number of RPA clusters. See the RecoverPoint
Release Notes for the maximum number of RPA clusters that can be attached to a splitter.
l Splitters residing on arrays that are not licensed are not automatically added to the system.
l Splitters that are removed by the user are re-added automatically by the system.
l ScaleIO splitters are added to the system after the automatic SAN rescan cycle is complete. If
the ScaleIO splitter is not visible in the system, manually run the rescan_san CLI command.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 159

RPA Clusters

l Volumes added to replication sets are automatically attached to all splitters.

l For VNX splitters: Although the two storage processors are displayed as separate entities
(Splitter 1-A and Splitter 1-B), they are managed as a single entity. If you add or remove a
splitter, the second storage processor instance is automatically added or removed.
n If a production storage volume is rolled back by a VNX SnapView session, the VNX splitter
automatically initializes a full sweep of any of the volumes that are attached to the splitter.
n Up to four RPA clusters can share a single VNX splitter. While attaching a VNX splitter to a
fifth RPA cluster appears to succeed, the splitter is in an error state for the newly attached
RPA cluster. All splitter operations for this RPA cluster fail and return the error: Maximum
RPA clusters per splitter exceeded. In this case, remove the VNX splitter from the fifth RPA
cluster.
l For Unity/VNXe splitters:
n The Unity/VNXe splitter is displayed as a single entity.
n The Unity/VNXe splitter has a designated Snapshot Mount Point for every LUN. No full
sweep occurs when adding or rolling back array snaps.
n The VNXe splitter does not support multiple clusters.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click Splitters.
3. In the right pane, click Add.

Note: The Add button is only enabled when there are splitters that are installed on the
storage and ready to add to the system.

4. In the Add Splitter dialog box; select the splitter that you want to add, and click OK.
If the selected splitter is a Unity/VNXe/VNX splitter, both SP-A and SP-B are added when
one of them is selected.

After you finish

Attach volumes to the splitter on page 161

Remove splitters
About this task
Note: You must Detach volumes from the splitter on page 162 before you can remove it from
the system. Only splitters that are not attached to any volumes can be removed.

160 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click Splitters.
3. In the right pane; select one or more splitters in the Splitters table, click Remove, and click
Yes in the confirmation dialog box. If the selected splitter is a VNX splitter, both SP-A and
SP-B are removed when one of them is selected.

Attach volumes to the splitter

Before you begin
l RecoverPoint automatically detects all paths from the splitter to the volume. If no path exists
between the splitter and the volume, you cannot attach the volume to that splitter.
l You cannot replicate a volume until it is attached to a splitter. You cannot fail over to a local or
a remote copy of a volume until it is attached to a splitter.
l For VNX splitters:
n Although the two storage processors are listed as separate entities (Splitter 1-A and
Splitter 1-B), they are managed as a single entity. If you attach or detach a volume at one
instance, the same volume will automatically be attached or detached at the other storage
processor instance.
n If you attach a volume to an RPA cluster, and that volume is already attached to a different
RPA cluster that shares the same VNX splitter, the volume appears to attach successfully
to the second RPA cluster, but then faults to the “Attached to other RPA cluster/s” error
state. The volume cannot be used by the RPA cluster to which it was just attached. To
correct this error, click Detach to detach the volume from the RPA cluster.
Note: To avoid this problem, a volume should be masked to a single RPA cluster. A
volume that is masked for one RPA cluster should not be masked for another RPA
cluster.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click Splitters.
3. In the right pane; select a splitter in the Splitters table, and click Attach in the Volumes
Attached to Selected Splitter section. The volumes that can be attached to the splitter are
displayed. Select one or more volumes to attach to the splitter. Click OK to attach to
selected volume to the splitter.

NOTICE When you attach a volume to a splitter, RecoverPoint ensures consistency

between the copy and the production source by performing a full sweep synchronization

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 161

RPA Clusters

of the volume. Checking the Attach as Clean checkbox overrides the default
synchronization process by informing the system that the copy volume is known to be
an exact image of its corresponding production volume. If Attach as Clean is checked,
and the copy volume being attached is inconsistent with its corresponding production
volume, it will remain inconsistent. To ensure consistency, best practice is not to select
this checkbox and use the default RecoverPoint synchronization process.

Detach volumes from the splitter

Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click Splitters.
3. In the right pane; select a splitter in the Splitters table, select a volume in the Volumes
Attached to Selected Splitter section, click Detach, and click Yes in the confirmation
dialog box.

RPAs
Select RPA Clusters > RPA-Cluster-Name > RPAs to display all of the RPAs in the RecoverPoint
system and the status and properties of each RPA.

The RPA table displays the following information for each RPA.

Table 32 RPA table information

Column Description

Status Indicates if the RecoverPoint appliance, LAN interface card, and WAN
interface card are alive.

ID The ID of the RPA. Each RPA in an RPA cluster has an RPA ID that starts with
the string “RPA” and ends with a number from 1-8. Only RPA1 and RPA2 can
run the cluster control.

WAN IP The WAN IP address of the RPA.

Management The LAN IP address of the RPA, in IPv4 format. Use this address to open a
IPv4 direct session with an RPA.

162 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Table 32 RPA table information (continued)

Column Description

Connectivity Indicates if communication to all RPAs in the RPA cluster is alive and if the
storage link, repository volume, data link, and communication with the remote
RPA are all alive; if one RPA is down, connectivity of every RPA in the cluster
will report an error.

When an RPA in the RPA table is selected, the tabs at the bottom of the screen display the RPA:
l Properties on page 163
l Status on page 164
l Interface on page 165

Properties
Displays the main properties of each RPA.

Select an RPA in the RPA table, and then click the Properties tab.

Table 33 Properties tab information

Field Description

RPA Cluster The RPA cluster that the RPA belongs to.

ID The ID of the RPA. Each RPA in an RPA cluster has an RPA ID that starts with
the string “RPA” and ends with a number from 1-8. Only RPA1 and RPA2 can
run the cluster control.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 163

RPA Clusters

Status
Displays the connectivity statuses of each RPA.

Select an RPA in the RPA table, and then click the Status tab.

Table 34 Status tab information

Field Description

RPA Status Whether or not the RPA is connected.

Repository Whether or not the RPA can access the repository volume.
Volume

Storage Link Whether or not the RPA can access storage.

WAN Interface Whether or not the physical WAN port is alive, the interface card is
functional, and communication with other local RPAs exists.

FC Connectivity Whether or not the RPA has access to the intranet.

Communication Whether or not the RPA has access to the remote RPA that it is paired
with Remote with for replication.
RPA Cluster

Data Link Whether or not data can be replicated to the remote RPA that the selected
RPA is paired with for replication.

LAN IPv4 Whether or not the physical LAN port is alive, the interface card is
Interface functional, and communication with other local RPA (if any) exists.

164 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Interface
The Interface tab displays the Fabric Interface settings of each RPA.

Select an RPA in the RPA table and click the Interface tab to display the Fabric Interface settings
for each RPA HBA port. These settings are required when replacing a faulty RPA.

Traffic Statistics
Select an RPA in the RPA table and click the Traffic Statistics tab to display the RPA’s traffic
statistics.

The Traffic Statistics tab displays the following statistics for the selected RPA:
l Total traffic on page 166
l Application traffic on page 166
l Initialization traffic on page 166

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 165

RPA Clusters

Total traffic
Displays the total amount of data that is transferred by the selected RPA in the SAN and between
clusters, in Mb/s.

Application traffic
Displays the total amount of application data that is transferred by the selected RPA in the SAN
and between clusters, in Mb/s.

Initialization traffic
Displays the total amount of data that is transferred by the selected RPA in the SAN and between
clusters during RecoverPoint initialization, in Mb/s.

166 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Usage Statistics
Select an RPA in the RPA table and click the Usage Statistics tab to display the RPA’s resource
usage statistics.

The Usage Statistics tab displays the following statistics for the selected RPA:
l Incoming writes on page 167
l Bandwidth reduction on page 168
l CPU usage on page 168

Incoming writes
Displays the amount of incoming writes that are transferred by the selected RPA, per second.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 167

RPA Clusters

Bandwidth reduction
Displays the ratio by which the bandwidth usage of the selected RPA is reduced per minute due to
RecoverPoint.

CPU usage
Displays the percent of the selected RPA’s CPU that is utilized per minute.

168 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

vCenter Servers
Select RPA Clusters > RPA-Cluster-Name > vCenter Servers to display the vCenter server
table, monitor, register, or remove vCenter Servers. The vCenter user should have the necessary
privileges to perform the desired tasks.

When the vCenter Server's IP address is selected, the bottom pane displays the vCenter Servers
object, and under it, all VMware vCenter Servers registered with RecoverPoint. The view displays
data extracted from the VMware vCenter Server together with RecoverPoint replication data.
In addition to displaying ESX servers and all their virtual machines, datastores, and RDM drives,
the RecoverPoint vCenter Server view also displays the replication status of each volume. The
RecoverPoint vCenter Servers view is for monitoring only (read-only).
Select the vCenter Servers link to:
l Display vCenter Server information on page 170
l Register vCenter Server on page 170
l Edit vCenter Server Registration on page 171
l Remove vCenter Server on page 171
l Rescan vCenter Server on page 171

Before you begin

Before you begin, note that the best practice is to configure the vCenter Server to require the use
of a certificate because once RecoverPoint has read the certificate, it does not need further
access to the location.
The default certificate locations are:
l Windows 2003 Server:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\VMware\VMware
VirtualCenter\SSL\rui.crt.
l Windows 2008 Server:
C:\Users\All Users\Application Data\VMware\VMware VirtualCenter\SSL
\rui.crt.
For more information about the location of the security certificate, refer to Replacing vCenter
Server Certificates VMware vSphere 4.0, available at www.vmware.com.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 169

RPA Clusters

Display vCenter Server information

Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters > RPA-Cluster-Name > vCenter Servers.
All vCenter Servers registered with RecoverPoint and their user names are displayed.
2. In the top pane, click the vCenter Server's IP address to display:
l Each ESX server in the vCenter Server and its IP address
l Each virtual machine running in the ESX server, with the following details:

Information Icon Description

Replication Fully configured for replication

status
Partially configured for replication

Not configured for replication

IP address The IP address of the virtual machine

l Every LUN and raw device mapping accessed by each virtual machine, with the following
details:
n Replication status: fully configured for replication or not configured for replication.
n For LUNs or devices configured for replication by RecoverPoint, the following are
displayed: consistency group, copy (Production, Local, Remote), replication set, and
which datastore for each LUN or raw device mapping is configured for replication.

Register vCenter Server

Creates a connection between RecoverPoint and a VMware vCenter Server, which allows
RecoverPoint to display the VMware view of volumes configured for replication.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click vCenter Servers.
3. In the right pane, click Add. The Register vCenter Server dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Register vCenter Serverdialog box, enter the following information:

170 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 RPA Clusters

Setting Description

vCenter IP address of the vCenter Server. This is also the display name of the vCenter
Server IP Server in the top pane.

Port TCP port number of the vCenter Server. Default = 443.

Username vCenter Server username.

Password vCenter Server password.

Certificate If you wish to specify a certificate, browse to and select the certificate file.

Edit vCenter Server Registration

Edits the credentials of an existing connection between RecoverPoint and a VMware vCenter
Server.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click vCenter Servers.
3. In the right pane; select a vCenter Server, and click Edit. The Edit vCenter Server
Registration dialog box is displayed.
4. In the Edit vCenter Server Registration dialog box, you can edit the following information:

Setting Description

vCenter IP address of the vCenter Server. This is also the display name of the vCenter
Server IP Server in the top pane.

Port TCP port number of the vCenter Server.

Username vCenter Server username.

Password vCenter Server password.

Certificate If you wish to specify a certificate, browse to and select the certificate file.

Remove vCenter Server

Removes a connection between RecoverPoint and a VMware vCenter Server.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click vCenter Servers.
3. In the right pane; select a vCenter Server, click Remove, and click Yes in the confirmation
dialog box.

Rescan vCenter Server

Obtains the latest information from the VMware vCenter Servers registered with RecoverPoint,
and updates Unisphere for RecoverPoint.
Procedure
1. Select RPA Clusters, and select the tab of the relevant RPA cluster.
2. In the left pane, click vCenter Servers.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 171

RPA Clusters

3. In the right pane, click the Rescan icon.

172 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 6
Admin

This section describes how to license and register RecoverPoint, how to manage users, roles, and
user authentication, how to configure system notifications, detect bottlenecks in replication,
analyze the load on each RPA, and collect system information for support purposes. This section
also describes how to export statistics and use the statistics tool through the RecoverPoint CLI.

l RecoverPoint Administration................................................................................................174
l Manage Licenses..................................................................................................................174
l Register RecoverPoint......................................................................................................... 178
l Users and Security...............................................................................................................183
l System Analysis Tools..........................................................................................................196
l System Notifications........................................................................................................... 209

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 173

Admin

RecoverPoint Administration
Administration of RecoverPoint users and the RecoverPoint system is performed through the
Admin menu.

Table 35 Admin options

Option When to Use

Manage To add or remove your RecoverPoint license files from the system or view
Licenses your RecoverPoint license details.

Register Fill out or update your RecoverPoint post-deployment form and automatically
RecoverPoin send it to the Install Base Group, registering your RecoverPoint product.
t

Users and To manage users, roles, and user authentication. To log off and log back in as
Security a different user, to change the currently logged in user, the password of the
currently logged in user, or after how much idle time to log off the user.

System To detect bottlenecks in replication, analyze the load on each RPA, and collect
Analysis system information for support purposes.
Tools

System To configure system reports and alerts, manage event filters and call home
Notifications events.

Manage Licenses
Select Manage Licenses to add or remove RecoverPoint licenses from the system.

174 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Install a license
Before you begin
l Access and activate your entitlements.
l Obtain a RecoverPoint license file.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Manage Licenses to display the Manage Licenses screen.

2. Then for each license file:

a. Click Add.

b. Click Browse...
c. Select the license file.
d. Click OK.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 175

Admin

Remove licenses
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Manage Licenses.
2. Select the license that you want to remove, and click Remove.
Note: A warning is issued if removing the license may cause the system to exceed the
allowed replication capacity (for example, when an array license is removed but an
existing consistency group contains volumes that reside on the removed array).

Monitor your license limits

About this task
Use the following procedure to ensure that you are replicating well within the limits of your
RecoverPoint license.
Procedure
1. Select Dashboard > System Limits > System.
2. Note the value of the following licensing-related system limits:
l Number of bytes replicated locally per licensed RPA cluster
l Number of bytes replicated remotely per licensed RPA cluster
l Number of bytes replicated locally per licensed array
l Number of bytes replicated remotely per licensed array
l Number of days until RecoverPoint license expires

Export a detailed license report

About this task
You can export a detailed license report. The report is exported as a comma-delimited file (*.csv)
that can be opened in MS Excel or any other reader of CSV files.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Manage Licenses.
2. Click the Export button at the top right corner of the screen.
3. In the Export dialog box:

a. Select the desired export options and click Next.

176 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

b. Click Download to download the file to your computer, select a location on your
computer to store the file, and click Save.
4. Open the exported file:
a. Open MS Excel.
b. Open the *.csv file from the location you selected in the previous step. The Excel Text
Import Wizard is displayed to help you set the import options.
c. In the Excel dialog box, select Delimited, and click Next.
d. In the Delimiters field, select Comma, and click Next.
e. Click Finish.

Display your RecoverPoint license information

About this task
After you have added one or more licenses to RecoverPoint, you can display your RecoverPoint
license information through the Admin > Manage Licenses screen.

The following attributes are displayed, per license:

Table 36 Displayed license information

Parameter Values Description

Type RecoverPoint/CL Uses the RecoverPoint/CL

licensing model.

RecoverPoint/EX Uses the RecoverPoint/EX

licensing model.

RecoverPoint/SE Uses the RecoverPoint/SE

licensing model.

RecoverPoint/BK Uses the RecoverPoint/BK

licensing model.

RPA Cluster <RPA Cluster> The name of the licensed RPA

cluster.

Array Serial <Array Serial> The serial number of the

licensed storage array.
l RecoverPoint/CL: None
l RecoverPoint/SE and
RecoverPoint/EX:
An array serial number.

Replication Local The license supports

replication to a local copy.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 177

Admin

Table 36 Displayed license information (continued)

Parameter Values Description

Remote The license supports

replication to a remote copy.

Capacity <Capacity> The replication capacity

supported by the license (in
terabytes).

Expiration <Date> The date at which the license

expires.

Permanent The license does not have an

expiration date.

Status Active The license is active.

Expired The expiration date of the

license has passed.

Inactive The license is not active. This

can happen when:
l If a licensed array is not
mapped and zoned to the
RPA.
l If a RecoverPoint/EX
license and a
RecoverPoint/CL license
are both added at the
same RPA cluster, and
the RecoverPoint/EX
license becomes inactive.

Note: Check the displayed information against the license file variables for correctness and
Monitor your license limits on page 176 to ensure that you are replicating well within the limits
of your RecoverPoint license.

Register RecoverPoint
Select the Register RecoverPoint menu to fill out or update the RecoverPoint post-deployment
form and automatically send it to the Install Base Group, registering the RecoverPoint product.

178 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Register your RecoverPoint system

Before you begin
l Register your RecoverPoint system after:
n installing a RecoverPoint system
n connecting RPA clusters in a RecoverPoint system
n upgrading a RecoverPoint system
l The RecoverPoint registration process will fail if you do not first configure your SMTP address.
l The registration process will be incomplete if valid values are not provided for every field in the
post-deployment form.
l When a new RPA cluster is added to the system, it is automatically added to the post-
deployment form with empty parameter values. Ensure you have entered the values for all new
RPA clusters before sending the post-deployment form to the IB group.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Register RecoverPoint to display the RecoverPoint Post-Deployment
Form.

2. Click Update Form to display the Update Post-Deployment Form Details dialog box.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 179

Admin

3. In the Update Post-Deployment Form Details dialog box:

a. Select the relevant RPA cluster from the RPA Cluster drop-down.
b. Update the form information according to the instructions in the following table.

Field Description For Example

Activity Type Enter the type of activity you are Upgrade

performing (upgrade, installation)

Location The city, state and country where the New York, New York, USA
customer is located.

Upgrade/ Enter the role of the person Customer

Installation performing this upgrade or installation
Performing activity
Resource

Sales Order The customer or Customer Engineer 62276566

Number should provide this information

VCE Indicate whether this RecoverPoint Selected=Yes

implementation is operating within a Unselected=No
VCE™ (Vblock) environment.
or Unknown
VCE = VMware+Cisco+EMC

Connect Home The method used to send Software: ESRS (preferred), E-mail,
configuration reports and alerts to Not Allowed
Customer Support. Enabling this Hardware: Not Applicable
feature is recommended as it allows
Customer Service to pro-actively
address issues within your
RecoverPoint environment, should
they arise.
Configure System Reports and Alerts
on page 219 to establish connectivity
for your RecoverPoint environment.

Connect In The method used to allow remote Software: ESRS (preferred), WebEx,
connectivity to your RecoverPoint or Not Allowed
environment. Enabling this feature is Hardware: ESRS (preferred, WebEx,
recommended as it allows secure or Not Allowed
access to your RecoverPoint
environment to gather logs and

180 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Field Description For Example

resolve issues as expeditiously as

possible.
If you already have an ESRS Gateway
servicing other products, simply use
the ESRS Config Tool (refer to the
Secure Remote Support Gateway
Operation Guide for further
instructions on Config Tool usage) to
add your RecoverPoint devices (or
have your gateway administrator do it
for you) to the list of ESRS monitored
environments. Once the device is
added, click the request update
button to send the new device
information and contact your local
Customer Support Engineer to
approve the update.
If you do not have an ESRS Gateway
at your site, contact your Account
Manager to find out more about the
benefits of ESRS.

c. Click Apply to save each change to the form, without closing the dialog box.
d. Click OK to save all changes and close the dialog box.
NOTICE If your company does not have SyR connectivity, and therefore, you cannot
Configure system reports and alerts on page 221, you can skip the rest of the steps
in this procedure, Export the post-deployment form to a CSV file on page 182 and
Registering RecoverPoint by email or phone on page 183 now.

4. Click Send Form to automatically send the post-deployment form to the Install Base group.
The Send Form dialog box is displayed.

5. In the Send Form dialog box, enter the email address of the person at your company that is
in charge of RecoverPoint maintenance and operation.
Note: Call home event 8000 is sent with the updated registration information and an
email is sent to the specified email address from Customer Support to verify that your
registration details were updated successfully in the Install Base.

6. Wait a couple of minutes.

7. Select Dashboard > System Events and look for events 8000 “Calling home”Calling home”.
If event 8000 is logged; the registration details were successfully sent to the Install Base.
Results
The following information is automatically sent along with the information that you entered into
the post-deployment form, per RPA cluster:

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 181

Admin

l Software serial ID
l Hardware serial IDs for RPAs 1-8
l RecoverPoint software version
l Cluster name
l License type
l Connect home method
l The System ID (identical for all RPA clusters in a RecoverPoint system)

Export the post-deployment form to a CSV file

About this task
You can save your RecoverPoint registration information or Registering RecoverPoint by email or
phone on page 183 by exporting the RecoverPoint post-deployment form and all of its contents as
a comma-delimited file (*.csv) that can be opened in MS Excel or any other reader of CSV files.
The Activity Date field in the exported CSV file contains the date and time that the file was
exported.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Register RecoverPoint.
2. Click the Export button at the top right corner of the screen.

3. In the Export dialog box:

a. Select the desired export options and click Next.

b. Click Download to download the file to your computer, select a location on your
computer to store the file, and click Save.
4. Open the exported file:
a. Open MS Excel.
b. Open the *.csv file from the location you selected in the previous step. The Excel Text
Import Wizard is displayed to help you set the import options.
c. In the Excel dialog box, select Delimited, and click Next.
d. In the Delimiters field, select Comma, and click Next.
e. Click Finish.

182 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Registering RecoverPoint by email or phone

Registers RecoverPoint if the company does not have external connectivity, and therefore you
cannot register the RecoverPoint system online.
Before you begin
l Register the RecoverPoint system after:
n Installing a RecoverPoint system
n Connecting RPA clusters in a RecoverPoint system
n Upgrading a RecoverPoint system
l The registration process is incomplete if valid values are not provided for every field in the
post-deployment form.
Procedure
1. Access https://support.emc.com
2. Search for the term Post-Deployment Form
3. Download and fill out the RecoverPoint and RecoverPoint for VMs Post-Deployment Form
4. Send the information to the Install Base group:
l Customers and partners: Email the post-deployment form to the Install Base group at
rp.registration@emc.com.
l Employees:
n (Preferred) Use the IB Portal at http://emc.force.com/BusinessServices.
n Call in the information to the Install Base group at 1-866-436-2411 – Monday to
Friday (normal Eastern Time Zone working hours).

Users and Security

Select the Users and Security menu to manage users, roles and user authentication, to log off
and log in as a different user, to change the password of the currently logged in user, the security
level, or after how much idle time to log off the user.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 183

Admin

Manage Users
Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage Users to view, add, remove and modify
RecoverPoint users.

How users work

You add users, edit users and remove users by selecting Admin > Users and Security > Manage
Users.
The RecoverPoint appliance is shipped with the following local users already defined:

Table 37 Pre-defined users

User Role Initial Password Permissions

security-admin security security-admin Security: changing

users and roles,
security levels, LDAP
configuration

admin admin admin All, except security

boxmgmt boxmgmt boxmgmt Boxmgmt/Upgrade

Note: User authorization grants or denies users access to resources managed by

RecoverPoint. User authorization is identical, regardless of whether the user was
authenticated by RecoverPoint or by a Microsoft Windows Active Directory LDAP server. User
authorization can be limited to specific consistency groups.

Add new users

Before you begin
l Only users with security permissions can add users, and can remove and edit permissions for
users that have previously been added.
l You cannot remove pre-defined users.
l You cannot change the permissions of pre-defined users.
l To change the passwords of pre-defined users, Switch User on page 195 and Change
Password on page 194.
l It is recommended that you change the passwords of predefined users.
l If you wish to implement a purely LDAP-based authentication system, you need not give out
the passwords of any pre-defined users.
l To be able to access RecoverPoint, every user in an LDAP Active Directory must be added to
RecoverPoint user’s list and assigned a role, or be a member of a group that has access.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage Users. The RecoverPoint user list is
displayed.

184 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

2. Click Add. The Add User dialog box is displayed.

3. Select Local User or LDAP User or Group.

l To configure a local user:
a. Provide a username and a password, according to your security level.
b. Select the role in the user settings section.
c. To limit access to specific consistency groups, click Only for selected groups and
select the consistency groups to which you are granting this user access.
l To configure an LDAP user or group:
a. Click Select... to select either a user name or a group from the lists of users and
groups.
b. Select the role from the drop-down in the user settings section.
c. To limit access to specific consistency groups, click Only for selected groups and
select the consistency groups to which you are granting this user access.
l Binding to the LDAP server will fail unless at least one of the following is true:
a. The connection to the server uses LDAP over SSL (only if the Active Directory
supports SSL).
b. Anonymous binding is used.
c. Signing requirements are set to "none" in Active Directory.

Settings Description
Local User
User Name Name of new user to add for appliance-based authentication. A
user name must start with a lower-case alphabetic character. All
subsequent characters must be lower-case alphabetic, numeric,
or hyphen (-). No other characters are legal in user names.
Password Password for new user. All printing ASCII characters are legal in
passwords.
Confirm Password Password for new user. All printing ASCII characters are legal in
passwords.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 185

Admin

Settings Description
LDAP User or To add users that already exist in the Active Directory on the
Group LDAP server, and grant them access to the RecoverPoint
appliance.
User Name Name of a user to add to RecoverPoint user list.
Groups Name of a group or groups (in Active Directory) to add to the
authorized users of RecoverPoint.
User Settings
Role The role of the specified local user, LDAP user, or LDAP group.
Only for selected When checked, limits the access of this local user, LDAP user,
groups or LDAP group to the specified consistency groups.
Groups Select the consistency groups that the specified user or group
may access.

Edit existing users

Before you begin
l Only users with security permissions can edit users.
l You cannot edit pre-defined users.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage Users.
2. To edit a local user, an LDAP user or LDAP group:
l To modify the user’s password:
a. Read how security levels work in RecoverPoint.
b. Change Password on page 194
l To modify the user’s username:
a. Remove the user according to Remove users on page 187.
b. Add new users on page 184 with a new username.
l To modify the user’s role:
a. Select a user.
b. Click Edit.
The Edit Local User dialog box is displayed. The name of this dialog box depends on
the user type (Local, LDAP User, LDAP Group or LDAP User and Group), but all of
these dialog boxes contain the same options except for the Edit Local User dialog,
which additionally allows you to change the user and password of the local user.

186 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

c. Select one of the pre-defined roles from the drop-down in the User Settings section.
d. If required, modify the access to specific consistency groups by selecting Only for
selected groups.
e. Click OK.

Remove users
Before you begin
l Only users with security permissions can remove users.
l You cannot remove pre-defined users.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage Users.
2. Select a user.
3. Click Remove.

Manage Roles
Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage Roles to view, add, remove and modify
RecoverPoint roles.

How roles work

You add roles, edit roles, and remove roles by selecting Admin > Users and Security > Manage
Roles.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 187

Admin

Each RecoverPoint user is defined by a username, a password, and a role. A role is a named set of
access permissions. By assigning a role to users, the users receive all the access permissions that
are defined by the role.
Note: User authorization grants or denies users access to resources managed by
RecoverPoint. User authorization is identical, regardless of whether the user was
authenticated by RecoverPoint or by a Microsoft Windows Active Directory LDAP server. User
authorization can be limited to specific consistency groups.
The following pre-defined roles exist in RecoverPoint:

Table 38 Pre-defined roles

Role Permissions

security l Security
l Read only

admin l System configuration

l Storage management
l Splitter configuration
l Upgrade
l Data transfer
l Failover
l Boxmgmt
l Group configuration
l Target image
l Read only

boxmgmt Boxmgmt

monitor Read only

Roles define the following permissions:

Table 39 Permissions

Permission Description

Splitter Add or remove splitters, and attach or detach splitters to volumes.

Configuration

Group Create and remove consistency groups, and modify all group settings except
Configuration the settings that are included in the data transfer, target image, and
failover permissions, may bookmark images, and resolve settings conflict.

Storage Register arrays and vCenter Servers, and update storage registration details
Management for arrays and vCenter Servers.

Data Transfer Enable and disable access to images, and undo writes to the image access log.

Target Image Enable and disable access to images, resume distribution, and undo writes to
the image access log.

Failover Modify replication direction (in temporary failover and recover production),
begin failover, verify failover.

188 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Table 39 Permissions (continued)

Permission Description

System Configure and manage email alerts, SNMP, System notifications, alert rules,
Configuration licenses, syslog, and other system configuration settings.

Security All commands dealing with roles, users, LDAP configuration, and security level.

Upgrade Installing RPA software, RPA maintenance, including upgrading to a minor

RecoverPoint release, upgrading to a major RecoverPoint release, replacing an
RPA, adding new RPAs, converting an environment to a RecoverPoint/SE or
RecoverPoint configuration, or modifying system settings.

Web Download RecoverPoint installation packages from the Support Online

download website.

Add a new role

Before you begin
l Only users with security permissions can add, edit, or remove roles added by the user.
l You cannot edit or remove pre-defined roles.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage Roles.
2. Click Add. The Add Role dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter a new role name and set the required access permissions using the following settings.

Table 40 Permission settings

Setting Description

Role Name of the new RecoverPoint role to add.

Permissions Select the access permissions to be granted to all persons who are assigned
to this role.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 189

Admin

4. Click OK.

Edit an existing role

Before you begin
l Only pre-defined users with security permissions can edit roles.
l You cannot edit pre-defined roles.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage Roles.
2. Select a role.
3. Click Edit. The Edit Role dialog box is displayed.

4. Change the role name and/or select new permissions.

Remove a role
Before you begin
l Only pre-defined users with security permissions can remove roles.
l You cannot remove pre-defined roles.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage Roles.
2. Select a role.
3. Click Remove, and click yes in the confirmation dialog box that appears.

Manage User Authentication

Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage user Authentication to configure access to an
LDAP Active Directory for user authentication.

190 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

How user authentication works

User authentication configures RecoverPoint to use the organization’s Microsoft Windows Active
Directory LDAP server for authentication.
RecoverPoint provides two independent mechanisms for authenticating users: appliance-based
authentication and authentication via the organization’s Microsoft Windows Active Directory LDAP
(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server. The two authentication mechanisms can be used
simultaneously, LDAP may be used exclusively, or appliance-based authentication can be used
exclusively.

Authenticate users using LDAP

Before you begin
l Only users with security permissions can configure user authentication through an
organization’s Microsoft Windows Active Directory LDAP server.
l Although optional, it is strongly recommended to have secondary LDAP servers at both the
production and at the copy sites. If no LDAP server is available, users may not be able access
RPAs or use RecoverPoint.
l RecoverPoint only accepts LDAP certificates in PEM format. To format the certificate created
on the LDAP server in PEM format, use the following procedure:
1. On the LDAP server, export a copy of the server certificate from the Active Directory
server. Use the Certification Authority application's Copy File to … option to export the
certificate in Base-64 Encoded X.509 (.cer) format.
2. Copy the server certificate to a system with OpenSSL Certificate Authority software
installed. You can use any Linux or Windows system.
3. Log into the system where you copied the certificate, and run the following command to
create the PEM certificate:
n On Linux: > /opt/symas/bin/openssl x509 -in AD_certificate_name -
out OpenLDAP_certificate name
n On Windows: > openssl x509 -in drive:/path/AD_file.cer -inform d -
out drive:/path/OpenLDAP_file.pem
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage User Authentication. The Manage User
Authentication screen is displayed.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 191

Admin

2. Configure the LDAP settings.

Table 41 LDAP settings

Settings Description

Enable Active Directory Support Check to activate RecoverPoint

authentication and authorization using a
Microsoft Windows Active Directory LDAP
server.

LDAP Configuration

Primary LDAP server IP address of the primary LDAP server

Secondary LDAP server (optional) IP address of the secondary LDAP

server.
Although optional, it is strongly recommended
to have secondary LDAP servers at both the
production and at the copy sites. If no LDAP
server is available, users may not be able
access RPAs or use RecoverPoint.

Base Distinguished Name Node in the LDAP tree from which to start a
search for users:
dc=Klaba,dc=COM

Search Base Distinguished Name Root of the LDAP user search tree. The suffix
of the Search Base Distinguished Name must
be the Base Distinguished Name. The format
will be similar to the following:
cn=Users,dc=Klaba,dc=COM

Binding Type:
To specify the type of binding (authentication against the Active Directory).

192 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Table 41 LDAP settings (continued)

Settings Description

Bind Distinguished Name Distinguished name to use for initial binding

when querying the LDAP server. The format
of the Bind Distinguished Name will be similar
to the following:
cn=Administrator,cn=Users,dc=Klaba,dc=CO
M
The bind distinguished name can be any user
on the LDAP server who has read permission
for the directory in the defined search base.

Password Password of the bind distinguished name to

use for initial binding when querying LDAP
server

Directory Access Protocol

LDAP To send LDAP query over non-secure

connection.

LDAP over SSL To send LDAP query over a secure

connection.

Upload certificate from file Select if you want to enter a path to an Active
Directory certificate to use for secure
communication with LDAP server.
To export the certificate and format it in PEM
format:
On the LDAP server, export a copy of the
server certificate from the Active Directory
server. Use the Certification Authority
application's Copy File to … option to export
the certificate in Base-64 Encoded X.509
(.cer) format.
Copy the server certificate to a system with
OpenSSL Certificate Authority software
installed. You can use any Linux or Windows
system.
Log into the system to which you copied the
certificate, and run the following command:
On Linux:
> /opt/symas/bin/openssl x509 -in
AD_certificate_name -out
OpenLDAP_certificate name
On Windows:
> openssl x509 -in drive:/path/AD_file.cer -
inform d -out drive:/path/
OpenLDAP_file.pem

Advanced settings
The advanced settings are optional and can be left at their default values.

Search time limit Default 30 sec.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 193

Admin

3. Click Apply.
4. Test LDAP settings on page 194 to verify that you have configured LDAP correctly.

Test LDAP settings

Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and > Security > Manage User > Authentication.
2. Enter the LDAP Configuration settings.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Test configuration.
Note: An error is displayed if the system is unable to connect to the primary or
secondary LDAP servers.

Modify LDAP settings

Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Manage User > Authentication.
2. Click Clear LDAP Settings, and click yes in the confirmation dialog box.
3. Modify the LDAP Configuration settings.
4. Click Apply.
5. Test LDAP settings on page 194 to verify that you have configured LDAP correctly.

Change Password
About this task
Select Admin > Users and Security > Change Password to change the password of the currently
logged-in user.

Procedure
1. Enter your current password.

194 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

2. Enter the new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields according to
the password rules of your user's security level.
3. Click OK.

Switch User
Use the following procedure to log off, and log back in as a different RecoverPoint user.
About this task
Select Admin > Users and Security > Switch User to log off, and log back in as a different
RecoverPoint user.

Procedure
1. In the login screen, type the username and password of the user to log in to RecoverPoint.
2. Click Login.

Change Security Level

Use Admin > Users and Security > Change Security Level to set the password strength and
security rules for the currently logged-in user.

Change a user’s security level

Sets the security level of user passwords that are required to access the RPAs in your system.
Before you begin
l Only pre-defined users with security permissions can change the security level of a user.
l Regardless of the security level, any user who tries unsuccessfully three times to log in will be
locked out. To unlock the user, use the CLI command unlock_user. Only users with security
permission can unlock a user.
l The default security level is set to Basic. It is recommended that RecoverPoint administrators
set the level to High to meet relevant security standards, such as those of the USA Department
of Defense Security Technical Implementation Guides (DoD STIG).
l When the security level is set to High, user passwords:
n must contain a minimum of eight characters; at least two characters must be lower-case, at
least two upper-case, and at least two characters non-alphabetical (either digits or special
characters).
n can only be reset once every 24 hours.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 195

Admin

n cannot be reused until at least ten other passwords have been used.
n expire in 90 days.
l When the security level is set to Basic, user passwords must have a minimum of five
characters.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > Users and Security > Change Security Level.
2. Select either High or Basic.
3. Click OK.

Change Idle Logout Time

Use Admin > Users and Security > Change Idle Logout Time to specify after how much time
without user input to automatically log off the user.

System Analysis Tools

Use the System Analysis Tools menu to detect bottlenecks in replication, analyze the load on
each RPA, and collect system information for support purposes.

Note: You can also access additional system analysis tools through the RecoverPoint CLI. Use
the RecoverPoint CLI to export statistics , export consolidated statistics , and load the
statistics analysis tool.

Detect Bottlenecks
About this task
Use Admin > System Analysis Tools > Detect Bottlenecks to display statistics about system
performance by group, RPA, or RPA cluster, and use the statistics to identify and mitigate
bottlenecks in transfer.

196 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Procedure
1. Define the Bottleneck Detection Settings as described below. Note that in bottleneck
detection, the entered times are according to the local time and the analysis output is
according to GMT.

Detection Mode
Default=System overview and bottleneck analysis
Type of analysis to perform.
Possible values are System overview and bottleneck analysis, Initialization periods, High
load periods, Initialization, high load, and peak analysis, Advanced analysis, and Peak
analysis.

Start
Default=Earliest available time
Start time for analysis. Possible values are:
l Earliest available time
l A user-specified date and time, where the date and time, if not specified, is the
current local time today.
Note: Enter times according to local time. Output is according to GMT.

End
Default=The current date and time
End time for analysis, where the date and time, if not specified, is the current local time
today.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 197

Admin

Note: Enter times according to local time. Output is according to GMT.

Advanced Overview
Default=no
Whether the analysis covers a broader set of system performance indicators (yes) or
not (no).

Detailed Overview
Default=no
Whether the analysis is confined to the RPA cluster only (no) or also includes analysis
of the groups and RPAs (yes).

Peak Duration
Default=5 minutes
Includes an analysis of the periods in which the write peaks were of the specified time
duration.

Groups to Include
Note: Not relevant when System overview and bottleneck analysis is selected.
Default=all
The consistency groups on which to perform the analysis. To analyze only global
statistics, without statistics on individual groups, clear all of the group checkboxes.

2. Click Start to start the analysis. A progress bar is displayed.

[Wait for the process to complete]

3. During analysis, you can use any of the following options.

Action Description

Start New To stop the current analysis and display the screen containing the bottleneck
Analysis analysis settings.
Note: Only available when analysis is in progress.

Stop Analysis To stop bottleneck analysis.

Note: Only available when analysis is in progress.

Display To open a window containing the bottleneck analysis results.

Results Note: Only available when analysis is complete.

4. Click Display Results. The bottleneck detection results are displayed.

198 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

5. Copy the results and paste them into a text file.

6. Save the text file for later reference.

Balance Load
Use this procedure to analyze the load on each RPA and display a load balancing strategy.
Before you begin
l Load balancing is only available on the RPA running the cluster control, or through the floating
Cluster Management IP. Load balancing does not work if the RPA running the cluster control is
down. If this RPA goes down, and then back up again, 5 minutes must pass before load
balancing can be performed again.
l For best results, groups should be configured and replicating for 7 days before performing load
balancing, so that a long enough traffic history is available for the load balancing analysis.
l The load balancing analysis is performed on all RPAs at all sites.
l Groups can be excluded from the load balancing recommendation. However, even when
excluded from the recommendation, all groups are included in the analysis.
l The load balancing analysis is performed on all RPAs in the environment. If there are three
RPAs in total, and one of them goes down for a week, and it is the primary RPA of a group
included in the analysis, the load balancing recommendation calculations are still based on the
total number of RPAs, as if they were all working. The load balancing mechanism accumulates
group statistics for its calculations, as if groups were always running on their preferred RPAs,
even if flipovers happened during the week.
l Load balancing can identify cases in which distributed group segments do not actually require
four separate RPAs to run on, and recommend RPA assignments based on requirements.
Distributed group segments can be run on different RPAs, or the same RPA, and each group
segment is treated as a separate group in the load balancing analysis and recommendation. If
you are not familiar with distributed consistency groups, it is recommended that you learn how
they work before using the load balancing tool (see the Glossary in the RecoverPoint Product
Guide for more information about distributed consistency groups).
l To ensure consistency, consistency groups are initialized when moving from RPA to RPA.
During switchover, all groups running on the preferred RPA are initialized once when they

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 199

Admin

move to the non-preferred RPA, and then another time when they switch back to their
preferred RPAs. Therefore, any re-assignment of RPAs during replication should be carefully
planned out, as not to affect the performance of the production host applications.
l Since modifying preferred RPA assignments causes flipovers that cause initializations, if the
load balancing analysis finds that no significant changes in workload or number of consistency
groups have occurred, the mechanism does not recommend preferred RPA re-assignment.
l The load balancing mechanism smooths-out I/O statistics, so that any sudden peaks or lapses
in traffic do not cause it to recommend unnecessary changes.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Analysis Tools > Balance Load.
2. Select the consistency groups to exclude from the analysis.

Note: The groups that you select are preceded by an asterisk in the load balancing
recommendation, and their traffic statistics are included in the analysis on which the
recommendation is based.

3. Click Start to start the analysis. A progress bar is displayed.

[Wait for the process to complete]

4. During analysis, you can use any of the following options:

Action Description

Start New Analysis To stop the current analysis and display the
screen containing the load balancing settings.
Note: This option is only enabled when
analysis is in progress.

Stop Analysis To stop the load balancing analysis.

Note: This option is only enabled when
analysis is in progress.

200 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Action Description

Display Results To open a window containing the load

balancing analysis results.
Note: This option is only enabled when
analysis is complete.

5. When the analysis is complete:

l Click Display Results. The load balancing recommendation is displayed.

l A normal scope event is logged indicating that the load balancing process has ended. The
event contains a copy of the load balancing recommendation output.
6. Understand the load balancing results:
l If the load balancing recommendation is based on less than 7 days-worth of data, a note
is displayed indicating so.
l One or more of the following load balancing recommendations are displayed:
n No action is necessary. The environment is stable, and groups are evenly distributed
across all RPAs.
n Action is necessary. The environment is not stable because groups are not evenly
distributed across all RPAs. To correct this problem, manually modify the Preferred
RPA of each group.
n Action may be necessary. The environment is stable, although groups are not evenly
distributed across all RPAs, and this uneven distribution may affect future
performance. To distribute groups evenly across all RPAs, manually modify the
Preferred RPA of each group.
l The current preferred and recommended RPA assignments are displayed per consistency
group, along with each RPAs average throughput and incoming write-rate, in a
Recommended Load Distribution table.
Note: For distributed groups, each consistency group segment is treated as a
separate group, and the performance statistics are displayed per group segment.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 201

Admin

l Two tables, Traffic per RPA before Application of Recommendation and Traffic per
RPA after Application of Recommendation, are displayed to aid you in the process of
understanding the performance implications on all RPAs, if you do choose to apply the
recommendation. Each RPAs average throughput and IOPS are displayed, and the RPA
with the least amount of traffic is highlighted, in each of the tables.

l If any non-distributed (normal) consistency groups have experienced a minute of

throughput that exceeded the maximum throughput rate of a single RPA (as described in
RecoverPoint Release Notes) at least 50 times during the week, the load balancing
recommendation indicates that these groups should be set as distributed. If any
distributed consistency groups have experienced less than 40 minutes of throughput at a
rate of over 60 MB/sec during the week, the load balancing recommendation indicates
that these groups should be set as non-distributed.
l If the total group throughput is exceeded, a message is displayed indicating that you
should add additional RPAs to the RPA cluster, and run load balancing analysis again
after 7 days. See the RecoverPoint Release Notes for the total throughput per
distributed consistency group and total throughput per RPA limitations.
7. Retrieve the load balancing results:
a. Open a browser window and type the following path into the browser’s address bar:
<Cluster_Management_IP>/info/load_balancing/

202 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

b. Log in using boxmgmt credentials.

c. Download the relevant text files and store them for later reference. The load balancing
output is saved to text files with the name:

balance_load_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm.txt

Note: Ten load balancing output files are stored in this location at a time. When 10
files have already been stored, the older files are removed to make way for newer
files. The date and time of the output file is indicated in the file name.

d. Save the text files to a local directory for later reference.

8. Change the preferred RPAs of consistency groups based on the load balancing
recommendation:
a. Select Protection > Manage Protection.
b. In the left pane, select the group whose preferred RPA you want to change.
c. In the right pane, select the Group Policy tab.
d. Change the value of Preferred RPA according to the load balancing recommendation. If
the group is a distributed group and the load balancing recommendation indicates so,
change the value of Secondary RPAs too.
e. Click Apply.
Each time a consistency group’s preferred or secondary RPAs are modified, the group
undergoes an initialization to ensure consistency. For distributed consistency groups, if
one group segment is initialized, all group segments are initialized.

9. Verify that load balancing improved performance on page 203

Verify that load balancing improved performance

About this task
After running load balancing, use the following procedure to check the implications on
performance.
Procedure
1. Wait 7 days, for a new traffic history to be available.
2. Balance Load on page 199.
3. Compare the old load balancing results and performance statistics to the new load balancing
results and performance statistics.

Collect System Information

Use Admin > System Analysis Tools > Collect System Information to retrieve system log files
and environment information for support purposes.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 203

Admin

How system information collection works

To analyze and resolve support cases, you can Collect system information on page 204 for the past
thirty days or you can Collect system information around a specific event on page 34. System
information is collected using the Collect System Information wizard.

Collect system information

Before you begin
l To collect system information for VNX and VPLEX splitters, you must first Attach volumes to
the splitter on page 161.
l The system information that is collected from RPAs also includes Dell OMSA hardware
configuration information, provided the RPAs are running on Dell PowerEdge platforms.
l To retrieve the output file containing the system information, you must log in as one of the
pre-defined users with boxmgmt permissions.
l It is not possible to collect Unity/VNXe system information remotely through the RPA. Collect
Unity/VNXe and RecoverPoint Unity/VNXe splitter system information manually using the
Unity/VNXe Unisphere. Unity/VNXe credentials are required for system information collection.
Procedure
1. Attach volumes to the splitter on page 161 for all splitters in the system.
2. Select Admin > System Analysis Tools > Collect System Information.
3. If this is the first time collecting system information, click Start. Otherwise, click Start New
Collection Process.
The Collect System Information wizard is displayed, to guide you through the collection
process.

NOTICE You can also collect system information around a specific event by selecting
Dashboard > System Events. Then select an event in the event log and click Collect
System Information. The Collect System Information wizard is displayed and the
collection start and end fields are automatically set to 10 minutes before and after the
selected event.

4. Define the settings:

204 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Setting Description

From Default=yesterday, the current hour

Specify the date and time (in GMT or the
local time) of the first system information that
you want to include in the output.
Although the system information of the past
30 days is available for collection, only three
days of system information can be collected
at a time.
GMT is not adjusted for daylight savings time.

To Default=today, the current hour.

Specify the date and time (in GMT or the
local time) of the latest system information
that you want to include in the output.
Although the system information of the past
30 days is available for collection, only three
days of system information can be collected
at a time.
GMT is not adjusted for daylight savings time.

Include Information from RPA Clusters Optional

Default=selected
When selected, enables the collection of
system information from RPA clusters.

RPA clusters Optional

Default=all RPA clusters
The RPA clusters from which to collect
system information. If none of the checkboxes
are selected, only the system information of
the RPA cluster from which the collection
process is triggered is collected.
Only relevant when Include Information from
RPA Clusters is selected.

Include core files Optional

Default=disabled
Whether to include core files in the output.
Core files may be large. Subsequently,
including these files in the collection process
may substantially increase collection time.
Only relevant when Include Information from
RPA Clusters is selected.

Full system log collection Optional

Default= selected
When selected, enables the collection of all
system logs.

Advanced Optional
Default= disabled

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 205

Admin

Setting Description

Use only when explicitly instructed to do so by

Customer Support.
When selected, enables the collection of
system logs. Use this option to reduce log
collection time.
Select one or more of these categories:
l CLI
l Control
l Replication
l Storage
l Monitor
l Management

Include Information from Splitters Optional

Default=selected
When selected, enables the collection of
system information from the selected
splitters.
Note: Attach volumes to the splitter on
page 161 before system information can
be collected.

Note: Unity/VNXe splitter system

information must be collected manually
from the array.

Place the output file(s) on my local RPA Optional

Default=enabled
When selected, copies the collection process
output files to the RPA from which the
collection process was triggered.
The output files are placed in: http://[RPA IP
address]/info or https://[RPA IP address]/
info. Use boxmgmt credentials to log in and
view the information.

Copy the output file(s) to an FTP server Optional

Default=disabled
When selected, copies the collection process
output file to the specified FTP server.

When Copy the output file(s) to an FTP server is selected:

FTP Server Address The IP or DNS address of the FTP server to

which to upload the collection process output
file.
For example: 10.250.20.40 or ftp.EMC.com

Port The port through which to access the

specified FTP server.

206 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Setting Description

User Name The username to use when logging in to the

specified FTP server.

Password The password to use when logging in to the

specified FTP server.

Remote Path Optional

The path to the copy of the output file that is
stored on the specified FTP server.
For example: / (to access the rootdir)

Override default filename (Not Optional

recommended) Default=disabled
Whether to override the default file name of
the output file that is placed on the FTP
server.
It is recommended to keep the default file
name.
When selected, RecoverPoint renames the
output file that is uploaded to the FTP server
according to the new file name specified in
the Filename field.

New File Name Optional

The new file name for the output file that is
placed on the FTP server.
Only relevant when Override default filename
is selected. It is recommended to clear the
Override default filename checkbox, and keep
the default file name as is.

5. Click Next Test Connectivity. The Test Connectivity screen is displayed.

6. In The Test Connectivity screen, review the displayed information to verify that the
configuration settings are correct, and the system can access all RPAs and splitters:
l Verify that the Collection Settings are configured as intended. If required, click Back to
Define Settings to edit the settings.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 207

Admin

l Verify that a green check mark exists in the Status column of all listed splitters and
RPAs, and that the text Action succeeded exists in the Details column of all listed
splitters and RPAs. If all splitters and RPAs do not have green check marks in their
Status columns, you can collect the information directly from individual hosts on which
the feature is enabled.
7. Click the Finish button to begin the collection process. A progress bar is displayed, and the
collection process begins.

Note: Be patient. The collection process can take awhile, depending on the time span
and the amount of data being collected.

8. During the collection process, you have the following options:

Table 42 Collect system information options

Option Description

Start New Collection Process To stop the current collection process and
display the screen containing the collection
settings.

Stop Collecting System Information To stop the current collection process.

Display Results To open a window containing the collected

system information.

9. After the collection process is complete, click Display Results.

208 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

10. In the Collection Results dialog box:

a. Verify that the specified system information has been successfully collected. Verify that
a green check mark exists in the Status column of all listed splitters and RPAs, and that
the text Action succeeded exists in the Details column of all splitters and RPAs. If all
splitters and RPAs do not have green check marks in their Status columns, you can
collect the information directly from individual hosts on which the feature is enabled.
b. Retrieve the system information. Click the Output file (HTTP) link, or Output file
(HTTPS) link, and type the username and password of pre-defined users with boxmgmt
permissions, and click Close.
On completion of the collection process, the output file is placed in: http://[RPA IP
address]/info or https://[RPA IP address]/info. Use boxmgmt credentials to log in and
view the information.

11. If you enabled the Copy output file to an FTP server option, you can now retrieve the
remote copy of the output file from the FTP server:
a. Open a web browser window.
b. Type the FTP Server Address or DNS name of the FTP server into the address bar.
c. At the login prompt, type the User Name and Password.
d. Browse to the Remote Path .

System Notifications
Use the System Notifications menu to manage event filters, configure system reports and alerts
and manage call home events.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 209

Admin

Manage Event Filters

Use Admin > System Notifications > Manage Event Filters to define and modify the settings for
the sending of outbound system events through email, SNMP, and/or Syslog.

Display all event filters

About this task
To display all of the event filters currently defined in the system, select Admin > System
Notifications > Manage Event Filters.

210 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Create an event filter

Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Manage Event > Filters.
2. Click Add. The Event Filter wizard is displayed.
3. In the Define Filter screen:

a. Define the event filter settings according to the instructions in the following table.

Table 43 Event Filter settings

Setting Description

Filter Name Type a unique name of the event filter to be created.

Topic Select which events to report, according to the component of the RecoverPoint
system on which the events occur:
l All Topics
l Site
l RPA
l Consistency Group
l Splitter
l Array

Groups Only relevant when ‘Topic’ is set to All Topics or Consistency Group.
Select the names of the groups that are to be subject to this filter. There is no
default value for this parameter.

Level l Info: Event is informative in nature, usually referring to changes in the

configuration, or normal system state. When Level=Info, events of all levels
are returned. There is no filtering of events as a result of the Level setting.
l Warning: Event indicates a warning, usually referring to a transient state or an
abnormal condition that does not degrade system performance. When
Level=Warning, all events with level of Warning or Error are returned. Info-
level events are filtered. The Warning level includes Warning Off events.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 211

Admin

Table 43 Event Filter settings (continued)

Setting Description

l Error: Event indicates an important event that is likely to disrupt normal

system behavior and/or performance. When Level=Error, only events at the
Error level are returned. Warning-level and Info-level events are filtered. The
Error level includes Error Off and Brief Error events.

Scope l Normal: To report selected basic events and root-cause events. A root-cause
event returns a single description for a system event that can spawn an entire
set of detailed and advanced events. When Scope=Normal, all of those
detailed and advanced events are filtered out, leaving only the normal events.
This is the default setting, and in most cases, it is sufficient for effective
monitoring of system behavior.
l Detailed: This category includes all events (that is, detailed and normal), with
respect to all components, that are generated for use by users.
l Advanced: In specific cases (for instance, for troubleshooting a problem)
Customer Support may ask you to retrieve information from the advanced log
events. These events contain information that is intended primarily for the
technical support engineers.

Event IDs to The IDs of the Events that are not subject to this filter.
Exclude Note: Use a comma to separate multiple event IDs.

b. Click Next Define Method of Transfer.

4. In the Define Method of Transfer screen:

a. Select one or more methods of transfer.

b. If you selected Email:
l Select the frequency with which the events are sent.
l Type the email addresses of all recipients in a comma-separated list.

c. Click Finish to save the event filter and exit the wizard.

212 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

5. Configure the transfer method on page 213 for each method of transfer that you defined.

Configure the transfer method

Events can be transferred to the specified servers and/or email addresses by email,
syslog or SNMP.

Configure Email event notification

About this task
Use the following table to enable the transfer of events by email.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Manage Event > Filters.
2. In the bottom pane, select the Email tab.

3. Enter the values for the fields in the Email tab according to the instructions in the following
table.

Table 44 Email settings

Setting Description

Enable Email Select to enable the events defined in any event filters whose method of
Notifications transfer is set to Email to be transferred to the specified server from the
specified sender.
Note: Selecting this checkbox also enables the sending of email alerts to
the specified server address if you enabled both reports and alerts in the
Configure System Reports and Alerts on page 219 screen.

SMTP server Enter the IP address or DNS name of the server to which to send the emails.
address Note: When you click Apply, any change to this field automatically
updates the SMTP server address field in the Configure System Reports
and Alerts on page 219 screen.

Sender Enter the email address that should appear in the sender field of all emails
address concerning sent to the specified server regarding event notifications.

4. Click Apply.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 213

Admin

Results
All of the event filters whose Method of Transfer includes Email will be transferred to the
recipients defined in the filter (at the frequency defined in the filter) using the specified server
address and sender.

Configure Syslog event notification

About this task
Use the following procedure to enable the transfer of events by syslog.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Manage Event Filters.
2. In the bottom pane, select the Syslog tab.

3. Enter the values for the fields in the Syslog tab according to the following table.

Table 45 Syslog settings

Setting Description

Enable Syslog Select to enable the events defined in any event filters whose method of
Notifications transfer is set to Syslog to be transferred to the specified servers with the
specified label.

Facility Select one of the available labels to be attached to all messages.

Specify (Optional) Specify the syslog server at each RPA cluster to which you wish to
target host deliver notifications. The address may be either in IP or DNS format. A DNS
for address will work only if a DNS server is configured in the RecoverPoint
system.

4. Click Apply.
Results
All of the event filters whose Method of Transfer includes Syslog will be transferred by Syslog
using the specified target host and facilities.

214 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Configure SNMP event notification

Use the following procedure to enable the transfer of events by SNMP.
About this task
RecoverPoint supports the standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), including
support for SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3). RecoverPoint supports various SNMP queries and can be
configured to generate SNMP traps (notification events), which are sent to designated network
management systems.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Manage Event Filters.
2. In the bottom pane, select the SNMP tab.

3. Enter the values in the fields of the SNMP tab according to the following table.

Table 46 SNMP settings

Setting Description

Enable Select to enable the RecoverPoint SNMP agent to send all of the events
SNMP Agent defined in any of the event filters whose method of transfer is set to SNMP to
the specified servers with the specified label.
The RecoverPoint SNMP agent must be enabled in order to send SNMP traps
(notification events) and to respond to host-initiated SNMP queries.

Allow secure When selected, only encrypted SNMP queries over secure transport will be
transports enabled; use of community strings and SNMP over an unsecured port will be
only disabled.

Send event When selected, sends SNMP traps (notification events) to the RecoverPoint
traps SNMP agent according to your SNMP trap configuration on page 216. Does
not affect host queries.

Specify trap (Optional) The network management server to which you wish to deliver
destination notifications. The address may be either in IP or DNS format. A DNS address
for will work only if a DNS server is configured in the RecoverPoint system.

SNMP v1 RO If you are using SNMP version 1, enter an SNMPv1 read-only community
community string to enable the use of SNMPv1 community strings. If not enabled, only
SNMPv3 user names with passwords or certificates are enabled.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 215

Admin

Table 46 SNMP settings (continued)

Setting Description

Note: The read-only community string is transmitted in cleartext.

4. To add an SNMPv3 user:

a. Click Add in the SNMPv3 Users area. The Add SNMPv3 User dialog box is displayed.

b. Enter the required information.

c. To add a certificate, click Browse and select the certificate. The certificate file can
contain more than one certificate; select one. All certificates in the file are equally valid.
For optimal security, specify a user certificate and do not specify a password.
5. To remove an SNMPv3 user, select the user in the SNMPv3 Users table and click Remove.
6. Click Apply to save your changes.
7. Perform SNMP trap configuration on page 216.

SNMP trap configuration

About this task
RecoverPoint supports the default MIB-II. The RecoverPoint MIB can be downloaded from
powerlink.emc.com at the following location:
Home > Support > Software Downloads and Licensing > Downloads P–R > RecoverPoint
The application MIB OID is:
1.3.6.1.4.1.21658
The trap identifiers for RecoverPoint traps are as follows:
l Info
l Warning
l Error
The RecoverPoint SNMP trap variables and their possible values are listed in the following table.

Table 47 RecoverPoint SNMP trap variables

Variable OID Description

dateAndTime 3.1.1.1 Date and time that trap was

sent

216 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Table 47 RecoverPoint SNMP trap variables (continued)

Variable OID Description

eventID 3.1.1.2 Unique event identifier; the

values are listed in the
“Events” chapter of this
Administrator’s Guide.

siteName 3.1.1.3 Name of site where event

occurred

eventLevel 3.1.1.4 Valid values are:

l info
l warning
l warning off
l error
l error off

eventTopic 3.1.1.5 Valid values are:

l site
l K-Box
l group
l splitter
l management

hostName 3.1.1.6 Name of host

kboxName 3.1.1.7 Name of K Box

volumeName 3.1.1.8 Name of volume

groupName 3.1.1.9 Name of group

eventSummary 3.1.1.10 Short description of event

eventDescription 3.1.1.11 More detailed description of

event

Note: OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) support is available only for systems in
which the RPAs are running on Dell PowerEdge platforms.
OMSA support provides RecoverPoint customers with the ability to:
l Display Dell hardware event notifications, together with RecoverPoint event notifications, in
real-time, through the same management console.
l Collect System Information on page 203 that includes Dell hardware configuration information.
RecoverPoint generates events that result in Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
traps. When an event with predefined characteristics (defined in RecoverPoint and OMSA MIBs)
occurs on your system, the SNMP subagent sends information about the event, along with trap
variables, to a specified management console.
Use the following procedure to view OMSA and RecoverPoint events in real-time.
Procedure
1. Configure SNMP event notification on page 215 to send event traps to your event
management console. Ensure that the Enable SNMP Agent and Send event traps

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 217

Admin

checkboxes are checked and that the IP address of the machine that has been dedicated as
the event management console is defined as a Trap destination.
2. Install a MIB browser on the machine dedicated as the event management console.
Note: MIB browsers are used to manage SNMP-enabled devices and applications in a
network. MIB browsers enable users to load MIBs, issue SNMP requests, and receive
SNMP traps.
3. Open the MIB Browser on your management console, and
a. Enter the cluster management IP of the RPA cluster into the address bar. The cluster
management IP is a virtual IP address assigned to the RPA that is currently active in the
cluster. In the event that this RPA fails, the cluster management IP address dynamically
switches to the RPA that assumes operation.
b. Enable the MIB browser’s Trap Receiver. In the Trap Receiver, both the RecoverPoint
and OMSA events are displayed in real-time. RecoverPoint events are preceded with
their severity level (Info, Warning, or Error), the Dell OMSA event OIDs have the prefix
1.3.6.1.4.1.674.
After you finish
See the Dell OpenManage™ Server Administrator Version 1.9 SNMP Reference Guide, which can
be found at the Dell website:
http://support.dell.com/support/edocs/software/svradmin/1.9.2/en/SNMP/

Modify an existing event filter

Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Manage Event Filters.

2. Select an event filter in the table.

3. Click Edit. The Event Filter wizard is displayed, with the current settings for the selected
event filter.

218 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

4. Modify the event filter settings according to the instructions in Create an event filter on
page 211.
5. Click Next Define Method of Transfer.
6. If necessary, in the Define Method of Transfer screen, modify the methods of transfer. For
each new method of transfer that you define, Configure the transfer method on page 213.
7. Click Finish to save the new event filter settings and exit the wizard.

Remove an existing event filter

Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Manage Event > Filters.

2. Select an event filter in the table.

3. Click Remove, and then, click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

Configure System Reports and Alerts

Use Admin > System Notifications > Configure System Reports and Alerts to modify the
system report and alert settings, define or edit a transfer method, and test the settings to ensure
that they work. You can also use this screen to configure notification of new RecoverPoint
software releases.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 219

Admin

Depending on the severity of the event, system alerts automatically open a service request with
Customer Support and attach the latest system report to the service request. System alerts are
sent in real-time (at the time that the event occurs), allowing preemptive support for
RecoverPoint issues.
System reports contain the configuration and state of the RecoverPoint system, and they are sent
to the system report (SyR) database every Sunday. Only one system report is sent at a time
(containing the information of all RPA clusters) unless there are connectivity issues between RPA
clusters, or an RPA cluster in the RecoverPoint system is unable to send a system report. In this
case, the problematic RPA cluster sends its own system report. All system reports contain the
name of the RPA cluster that they are sent from.
The following parameters are sent to the System Report (SyR) database and included in any
opened service requests:

Table 48 System parameters sent to SyR

Parameter Description

System ID The unique identifier of all activated RPA clusters in a RecoverPoint system.
The System ID:
l Is generated for the first RPA cluster that is added to the system during
RecoverPoint deployment. When adding additional RPA clusters to the
system, the additional RPA clusters receive the System ID of the first
RPA cluster.
l Does not change with upgrades. When upgrading to RecoverPoint 4.0
from previous RecoverPoint versions, the System ID value is taken from
the value of Account ID in the previous RecoverPoint version.
l Can be displayed by running the get_account_settings CLI
command, and can only be modified by Customer Support.
Also known as: Account ID

SSID The Software Serial ID. The unique identifier of an RPA cluster in the
RecoverPoint system. The SSID is the identification that is used by the Install
Base to support equipment that is installed at customer sites, through the
system reporting and ESRS mechanisms.
Note: The format and function of the SSID has changed from previous
RecoverPoint versions.

The SSID is in the format <SN>EID<RPA cluster ID>, where <SN> and <RPA
cluster ID> are described in the licensing section of the RecoverPoint Product
Guide. Its length can be no more than 22 characters, and therefore, the RPA
cluster ID is truncated as required. The SSID:
l Is generated for each RPA cluster when the first license that is related to
the RPA cluster is added to the system. When additional licenses are
added to the system, the SSID of the RPA cluster does not change.
l If no license was added for an RPA cluster, the SSID of that RPA cluster is
empty.

220 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

Table 48 System parameters sent to SyR (continued)

Parameter Description

l Can be displayed by running the get_system_settings CLI command, and

can only be modified by Customer Support.
l Does not change with upgrades. When upgrading to RecoverPoint 4.0
from previous RecoverPoint versions, the SSID value is taken from the
value of the SSIDs in the previous RecoverPoint version.
l Does not change even if the SSID SN from which it was generated no
longer exists in any of the installed licenses.

Site ID The ID used in various global processes as a unique identifier of the physical
location of an RPA cluster.

The Site ID:

l Is obtained from the value of the <Site_Info> parameter in the license file
variables. Its value is set by the first installed license for an RPA cluster.
Note: If no license was installed for an RPA cluster, the Site ID of that
RPA cluster is empty.
l Can be displayed by running the get_system_settings CLI command,
and can only be modified by Customer Support.
l Does not change even if the <Site_Info> from which it was generated no
longer exists in any of the installed licenses.

Configure system reports and alerts

Before you begin
l Best practice is to keep both system reports and alerts, and compression and encryption
enabled.
l System reports and alerts will only be sent provided a method of transfer (SMTP, ESRS, or
FTPS) is configured. You can configure the method of transfer using the Getting Started
Wizard or by selecting Admin > System Notifications > Configure System Reports and
Alerts.
l To transfer system reports and alerts using SMTP or ESRS, ensure that port 25 is open and
available for SMTP traffic.
l To transfer system reports and alerts using FTPS, ensure that ports 990 and 989 are open and
available for FTPS traffic.
l To send system reports and alerts, a permanent RecoverPoint license must exist in the system;
system reports and alerts will not work with a temporary license.
About this task
By default:
l Both system reports and system alerts are enabled.
l System reports and alerts are sent through SMTP, but they can be configured for transfer
through a customer's ESRS server, or RecoverPoint’s built-in FTPS server.
l System reports and alerts are compressed and encrypted with RSA encryption using a 256-bit
key before they are sent.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 221

Admin

Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Configure System Reports and Alerts.

2. Ensure that the Enable System Reports and Alerts checkbox is selected, and the radio
button is set to System reports and system alerts .
3. Ensure that the Compression and Encryption checkboxes are selected.
4. Define the transfer method.
l To transfer system notifications through an SMTP server:
a. In the Transfer Method section, ensure the SMTP radio button is selected.
b. In the SMTP server address field, specify the IP address or DNS name of your
dedicated SMTP server, in IPv4 or IPv6 format.
c. In the Sender email field, specify the email address from which the system
notifications will be sent.
d. Click Apply.
l To transfer system notifications through RecoverPoint’s built-in FTPS server:
a. In the Transfer Method section, select the FTPS radio button.
b. Click Apply.
l To transfer system notifications through an ESRS gateway:
a. In the Transfer Method section, select the ESRS radio button.
b. In the ESRS gateway IP address field, specify the IP address of your ESRS gateway
in IPv4 format.
c. Click Apply.

Configure notification of new RecoverPoint software releases

About this task
This feature is enabled by default.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Configure System Reports and Alerts.

222 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

2. Select or clear the Enable New Release Notification checkbox.

Ensure that system reports are configured correctly

About this task
Use the following procedure to ensure that system reports can be sent using the configured
transfer method.
Procedure
1. Configure system reports
2. Click Test Connectivity
3. In the Test Connectivity dialog box, type the email address to which Customer Support can
send a verification email.

Note: The connectivity test, if successful, opens a service request containing call home
event number 30999 and sends an email to the specified verification email address from
Customer Support to verify that the system reports mechanism (SyR) has been
successfully configured.

4. Wait 10 minutes.
5. Select Dashboard > System Events and look for event 1020 “Failed to send system
report.”
l If this event does not appear in the event logs, the system notifications mechanism has
been correctly configured.
l If you do receive event 1020, check whether there is an issue with the selected method
of transfer. If a problem exists, fix it, configure system reports and click Test
Connectivity again. If problem persists contact Customer Support.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 223

Admin

Display the current system report

About this task
To view the current system report information, run the get_system_report CLI command.

Send the current system report to an email address

About this task
To send the current system report information to a specified e-mail address, run the
get_system_report CLI command.

Display the current system report settings

About this task
To display the current system notification settings, run the get_system_report_settings CLI
command.

Manage Call Home Events

Use Admin > System Notifications > Manage Call Home Events to manage the events that
automatically open a service request with Customer Support.

The RecoverPoint call home feature enables RPAs to continuously monitor their own health, and
the health of the RecoverPoint system, using a pre-defined set of event-filtering rules. The call
home event mechanism uses secure transmissions to automatically notify Customer Support of
potential issues. If a serious problem arises, the call home mechanism automatically detects it and
opens a service request with Customer Support. When the service request is received, Customer
Support engages personnel to address the issues with relevant customer parties, or uses a
configured ESRS gateway to resolve the issue.
The call home event mechanism can be customized to accommodate specific environmental or
customer requirements. Customer Support personnel can create additional call home events, as
required, to meet specific customer needs. They can also permanently disable or temporarily
suppress call home events. For example, if an RPA cluster keeps reporting a problem that
Customer Support personnel are actively working on, the event reporting the issue can be
suppressed for a specified period of time.

How call home events work

The call home events mechanism works according to the logic in the call home event script.
1. RecoverPoint event number 8000 "Calling home" is displayed in the event log. In parallel, a
call home event is sent to SyR.
2. SyR opens an SR (Service Request) with Customer Support, and relays the following
information:
l The ID of the call home event is sent as the symptom code.

224 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

l The event Severity.

l A description of the event script logic.
l The email address that is defined in the contact_info parameter of the
config_user_account CLI command.
Note: If contact information is not specified, and a call home event is triggered, a
Service Request is still opened, but it does not contain this information, which
lengthens the time to resolve.
3. Customer Support engages the customer (or uses an ESRS Gateway) to resolve the issue.
Note: Whenever the logic of a call home event script cannot be fulfilled, RecoverPoint event
8001 is generated in the event logs.

Before you begin

Review these operating notes before managing call home events:
l RecoverPoint ships with a set of pre-defined call home events that are enabled by default.
l The call home events mechanism is not available when the RPA running the Cluster control is
down.
l The call home events mechanism is disabled during upgrade and while RecoverPoint is in
maintenance mode. The mechanism discards events that are issued while the system is in
maintenance mode.
l The call home events, and the last call home time for each event, survives RPA failure. In a
disaster, all user-defined call home events and call home events that may have been logged up
until the time of the disaster are retrievable. This information will not, however, survive
repository volume format.
l When upgrading to a new RecoverPoint version that introduces no change in the system-
defined call home events, the existing system-defined rules are preserved. When upgrading to
a new RecoverPoint version that does introduce a change in the system-defined call home
events, the new system-defined events override the old ones.
l The call home event mechanism is based on the most current system settings. Therefore, if
one of the rules in a call home event references a system property (for example, replication
type), the value of the property must be the current value in the system settings. The call
home mechanism does not save previous settings. If a rule refers to a system entity (for
example, group or splitter), and the entity has been deleted from the system, no call home
event is issued.
l The call home events mechanism automatically includes the contact information that is defined
in the contact_info parameter of the config_user_account CLI command. The contact
information appears in the Service Request that is opened with Customer Support. Ensure that
the contact_info parameter contains the email address of the person at the company who is
designated to mitigate RecoverPoint support situations. If contact information is not provided
and a call home event is triggered, a Service Request is still opened. Without the contact
information, the case takes longer to resolve.

Display all call home events

About this task
To display all of the call home events in the system, select Admin > System Notifications >
Manage Call Home Events and select an event in the table to display the call home event script,
description and status in the bottom pane.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 225

Admin

Suppress one call home event until a specific date and time
About this task
Use the following procedure to suppress one call home event for a specific period of time.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Manage Call Home Events
2. Select the event.
3. In the Status area of the bottom pane, select the Suppress Until radio button, and set the
date and time fields.
4. Click Apply.
NOTICE Note the change in the event status in the Status column of the event table. To
enable suppressed events, select the event in the table, change the date and time fields
to the current date and time, and click Apply.

Suppress all call home events until a specific date and time
About this task
Use the following procedure to suppress all call home events for a specific period of time.
Procedure
1. Select Admin > System Notifications > Manage Call Home Events
2. Select the event.
3. Click the Suppress All button under the event list. The Suppress All dialog box is displayed.

226 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Admin

4. In the Suppress All dialog box, set the date and time fields, and click OK.
NOTICE Note the change in the status of all of the events in the Status column of the
event table. To enable all of the suppressed events, click Suppress All, set the date and
time fields to the current date and time, and click OK.

Modify call home events

About this task
To modify call home events, contact Customer Support.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 227

Admin

228 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 7
Support

This section describes all of the RecoverPoint support options and how to quickly access your
Recoverpoint documentation, product support, or online community of users from within
Unisphere for RecoverPoint.

l RecoverPoint Support.........................................................................................................230

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 229

Support

RecoverPoint Support
Unisphere for RecoverPoint product support is accessed through the Support menu.

RecoverPoint Documentation
Procedure
1. Click Support > RecoverPoint Documentation.

The RecoverPoint documentation on Online Support is displayed.

2. Search for the RecoverPoint documentation that you require by RecoverPoint version,
content type, support task or operating system.

Online Support
Procedure
1. Click Group > EMC Online Support.

The EMC Online Support page is displayed, enabling you to:

l Register your product to access software downloads or obtain and manage license keys.
l Track, view, manage and create service requests for yourself and your company.

230 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Support

l Engage with Technical Support for answers to your questions.

l View and manage your company information - Sites, products, contacts and contracts.
l Manage site preferences to guide your service center experience.
l Download the new Mobile App to manage and track your Service Requests anytime,
anywhere.
l Contact the company
l Learn about Maintenance, Warranty Information and Parts Return Site.
l Learn how to fully leverage the capabilities of the new RecoverPoint experience.
l Gain one-stop access to technical and support-related information by product.
l Download the latest products and patches.
l Connect with other customers and technical experts in this worldwide community of
your peers.
l Submit your ideas for improving serviceability of products. SER is transparent data
repository where all requests can be submitted, managed and tracked.
2. Download products, manage licenses, open service requests, chat with technical support, or
contact the company.

The RecoverPoint Community

Procedure
1. Click Support > The RecoverPoint Community

When clicked, the RecoverPoint community page is displayed, enabling you to join the
community, start a discussion or view feeds.
2. Interact with other RecoverPoint users and share best practices and tips, or communicate
directly with the experts responsible for the RecoverPoint family.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 231

Support

232 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 8
Troubleshooting

This section describes occurrences in RecoverPoint, how to identify them, and how to mitigate
them from a user’s perspective.

l Licensing RecoverPoint....................................................................................................... 234

l Notification of new RecoverPoint software releases........................................................... 243
l Set the time display of Unisphere for RecoverPoint............................................................ 245
l Change the display language of Unisphere for RecoverPoint.............................................. 246
l First-time initialization is taking too long............................................................................. 246
l Protecting your data during initialization............................................................................. 248
l Host applications are hanging..............................................................................................248
l One-phase distribution workarounds................................................................................... 249
l Copy is being regulated....................................................................................................... 249
l Copy is experiencing a high load..........................................................................................250
l RPA keeps rebooting...........................................................................................................253
l Host applications crash during initialization......................................................................... 254
l Add more LUNs than allowed per VNX storage group......................................................... 256
l Swap the LUN numbers of journal volumes......................................................................... 258
l Find your array serial numbers.............................................................................................258
l Find your RPA cluster IDs....................................................................................................260
l Find your XtremIO cluster IDs............................................................................................. 260
l Understanding the RecoverPoint license............................................................................. 261
l Calculate your required journal size..................................................................................... 265
l MetroPoint group conversion.............................................................................................. 272
l Recovering from a cluster disaster...................................................................................... 273

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 233

Troubleshooting

Licensing RecoverPoint
This section describes how to license new RecoverPoint purchases, and upgrade your
RecoverPoint license.

Before you begin

l All RecoverPoint licenses are per array, an XtremIO cluster or an RPA cluster. Licensing is
enforced using the Locking ID.
l You cannot add a volume that resides on an unlicensed array to a replication set. Only volumes
that reside on licensed arrays are displayed in the volume list. This limitation does not exist for
journal volumes or repository volumes.
l If a license Locking ID contains an array serial number that is not recognized by RecoverPoint,
you will be able to install the license in RecoverPoint but it will not be tied to an RPA cluster
and the license wont be activated until the array is mapped and zoned to an RPA cluster.
l For consistency groups containing both a local copy and a remote copy: If you select to fail
over to the remote copy and the remote RPA cluster does not have enough licensed replication
capacity for two times the capacity of the remote copy, the failover will fail and you will be
prompted to remove the local copy for the failover to succeed.
l When trying to add or modify a group, copy or replication set, the licenses of all relevant arrays
and RPA clusters are checked and the action will fail if it causes any of the arrays or RPA
clusters in the system to exceed their maximum licensed replication capacity.
l In RecoverPoint/CL:
n If a license Locking ID contains an RPA Cluster ID that is not recognized by RecoverPoint,
you will not be able to install the license.
n RecoverPoint/CL licenses cannot be added if a RecoverPoint/SE license already exists.
n RecoverPoint/CL licenses cannot coexist on the same RPA cluster with RecoverPoint/EX
licenses. If both are added to the system, the RecoverPoint/EX license is disabled until the
RecoverPoint/CL license is removed.
l When RecoverPoint/SE is installed, only RecoverPoint/SE licenses can be added.
l RecoverPoint/EX licenses cannot:
n Be added if a RecoverPoint/SE license already exists.
n Coexist on the same RPA cluster with RecoverPoint/CL licenses. If both are added to the
system, the RecoverPoint/EX license is disabled until the RecoverPoint/CL license is
removed.

License RecoverPoint
RecoverPoint license activation is performed through Online Support at http://support.emc.com.
1. Immediately on submission of the sales order, a LAC email is sent to the address provided
during order entry, containing a new License Authorization Code (LAC) for all of the purchased
entitlements. A sales order can contain multiple LACs. In this case, a separate LAC email is sent
for each LAC contained in the sales order.
2. Click the Click here link in the LAC email to automatically access the RecoverPoint licensing
area of the Online Support site and display all of the entitlements that are associated with the
LAC.

234 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

3. In the RecoverPoint licensing area of the Online Support site, activate and generate a License
File for each entitlement. You generate a separate license for each RecoverPoint license model
that is associated with each unique array or RPA cluster.
4. Install the license files on the RecoverPoint system through Unisphere for RecoverPoint.

What you need

What you need before you start licensing RecoverPoint.
l The LAC emails (or sales order numbers) to perform Step 1: Quickly access entitlements on
page 236.
l Access to Online Support to perform Step 2 - Activate the entitlements on page 237.
l Unisphere for RecoverPoint to perform Step 3 - Install the license files in RecoverPoint and
enable support on page 240.
Note: If you do not have Unisphere for RecoverPoint installed, see the RecoverPoint
Installation and Deployment Guide for installation instructions, and install RecoverPoint
before starting this procedure.

Search for entitlements associated with a sales order

Procedure
1. Access and log in to Online support at http://support.emc.com
l Existing Online Support users; enter your Support username and password.
l New Online Support users; click Register Now and complete the registration process.
2. Select Service Center > Get and Manage Licenses > R > RecoverPoint Family.
3. Click the Activate link in the RecoverPoint version 4.0 and later section to access the
licensing portal.

4. In the LAC Request screen, click Manage Entitlements to display the Search
Entitlements screen:

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 235

Troubleshooting

5. In the Search Entitlements screen:

a. Enter a sales order number in the Sales Order # field.

b. Select Available in the Status field.
c. Click Search Entitlements to display all unactivated entitlements associated with the
entered sales order.
6. Go on to Step 2 - Activate the entitlements on page 237.

Step 1: Quickly access entitlements

About this task
Create a RecoverPoint purchase order if you are a new RecoverPoint customer, or if you want to:
l (In XtremIO) Upgrade a basic license to a full-featured license.
l Add replication capacity in RecoverPoint/CL.
l Add registered capacity in RecoverPoint/EX.
l Upgrade from RecoverPoint/SE to RecoverPoint/EX.
l Upgrade from RecoverPoint/EX to RecoverPoint/CL.
l Add storage arrays in RecoverPoint/EX.
l Add RPAs to the RecoverPoint system.
l Add an RPA cluster to the RecoverPoint system.
l Add raw capacity (for RecoverPoint/EX customers with VMAX 10K arrays with registered
capacity).
l Add back-end array replication (for RecoverPoint/EX customers with VPLEX arrays).
l Dynamically change capacity allocations on RPA clusters (for ELA customers).
In all of these cases, you need to make a purchase with sales, and obtain a sales order. As soon as
the sales order is approved, a LAC email is automatically sent to the email addresses provided
during order entry containing the LAC (License Authorization Code) issued to you, validating the
purchase and the entitlements.

236 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

A unique LAC is usually generated and emailed to you for each purchase, but this is not always the
case for evaluation licenses or purchases of certain products. Also, in some cases (such as the
addition of multiple arrays in RecoverPoint/EX), multiple LACs are generated and multiple LAC
email messages are emailed to you.
To start the licensing process:
l If you have the LAC emails, for each LAC, use the Click here link in the LAC email to
automatically access the Powerlink licensing area of Online Support, and display all
entitlements that are associated with the LAC. Then, activate the entitlements.
Note: If you do not have the LAC email, search for an email containing License
Authorization in the subject line. If you still cannot find the LAC email messages, contact
Worldwide Licensing Support at: https://powerlinklicensing.emc.com/poeticWeb/session/
license_request_emc.jsp
l If you have the sales order numbers, search for entitlements associated with a sales order.

Step 2 - Activate the entitlements

Before you begin
l Licensing is enforced using the Locking ID.
About this task
In the licensing section of the Online Support website:
l Existing Online Support users, type the Support username and password.
l New Online Support users, click Register Now and complete the registration process.
After you have logged-into Online Support, the Search Entitlements to Activate screen is
displayed. The Search Entitlements to Activate screen is the first screen of a five screen wizard,
that guides you, step-by-step, through the process of turning the LACs into license files
(redeeming the entitlements).
Procedure
1. In the Search Entitlements to Activate screen:

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 237

Troubleshooting

The link in the LAC email pre-populates the LAC field and searches for all entitlements that
are associated with the specified LAC. All relevant entitlements are displayed.

a. Select ONE entitlement to activate. Each entitlement must be selected and activated
separately. There can be multiple RecoverPoint models that are listed under each
entitlement.
b. Click Start Activation Process. The Search Machines dialog box is displayed.

c. In the Search Machines dialog box, click Add a Machine. The Add Machine dialog box
is displayed.
d. In the Add Machine dialog box, type a new machine name, and click Save.
A machine name is like a folder, it is used to group items together logically. A unique
machine name must be specified for each entitlement. Machine names can be whatever
unique name you choose but it is best practice to relate the machine name to the Locking
ID. For example, in RecoverPoint/SE and RecoverPoint/EX, the Locking ID is an array
serial number. Therefore, the machine name should be RP-APM00120701240 if
APM00120701240 is the array serial number that is used for the Locking ID. In
RecoverPoint/CL, the Locking ID is the RPA Cluster ID, so the machine name should be
the RPA Cluster ID.

2. In the Register screen, verify the machine name, and click Next.
3. In the Activate screen, enter the Locking ID, and click Next.

238 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

The Locking ID is the field that is displayed under the Machine Information column; its
value is whichever entity the license is enforced to.
Depending on the entitlement, the Locking ID can be either an RPA Cluster ID (in
RecoverPoint/CL), or an array serial number (in RecoverPoint/SE and RecoverPoint/EX).
To display instructions for finding your RPA Cluster IDs and array serial numbers, either click
the Locking ID help link or see Find your RPA cluster IDs on page 260, Find your XtremIO
cluster IDs on page 260 and Find your array serial numbers on page 258.

4. In the Confirm screen, type the email addresses of the recipients of the license file in the
Email to field of the Additional Email Options section, and click Finish.
By default, the customer contact that is provided during order entry and the user
performing the entitlement activation are automatically emailed an activation certificate
containing the license file as an attachment. You can type multiple email addresses in the
email to field. Separate multiple email addresses with commas. You can also include optional
comments which are displayed in the certificate email in the email comments field, or add
optional notes which can only be viewed online in Powerlink Licensing in the Notes for this
transaction section.

5. In the Complete screen, click Save to File to download the license file and save the file
locally. The resulting license file has a *.lic extension and is in plain text format (can be
opened in any text editor).

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 239

Troubleshooting

6. Redo this procedure from Step 1: Quickly access entitlements on page 236 for each
entitlement in each LAC email or sales order.
7. After you have turned all of the entitlements into license files, physically transfer the license
files to the computer from which you will be running Unisphere for RecoverPoint, so you can
install them in the RecoverPoint system.

Step 3 - Install the license files in RecoverPoint and enable support

Before you begin
l Multiple warnings are issued before an expiring license is about to expire. After license
expiration, replication continues but no further operations will be allowed on the RecoverPoint
system.
l The license limitations and their current values (for example, capacity, expiration) for each
licensed RPA cluster and storage array is displayed in the Dashboard > System Limits pane.
l Adding a new permanent or expiring license with the same Locking ID as an existing expiring
license replaces the existing expiring license.
About this task
After you have the license files, launch Unisphere for RecoverPoint as described in the
RecoverPoint Installation and Deployment Guide.
When Unisphere for RecoverPoint loads for the first time The Getting Started wizard on page 16 is
displayed. The Getting Started Wizard guides you, step-by-step, through the process of installing
the license files in RecoverPoint and enabling RecoverPoint support. If The Getting Started wizard
on page 16 is not displayed, install the license files using Manage Licenses on page 174 and
Configure System Reports and Alerts on page 219.

Upgrade from RecoverPoint 4.0 or later

About this task
When upgrading from RecoverPoint 4.0 or later, all existing permanent licenses are automatically
carried over and no further licensing is required.

Upgrade from RecoverPoint versions prior to 4.0

Use the following procedure to upgrade your RecoverPoint software license from RecoverPoint
3.5.x to this version of RecoverPoint.
Before you begin
Note:
When upgrading from RecoverPoint versions prior to 4.0, previous licenses are automatically
converted to the new license format. The new licenses are temporary and valid for 90 days

240 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

from the date of upgrade. After that, you must have installed one or more permanent license
files to replicate with RecoverPoint appliances.
Procedure
1. Open a Service Request with Customer Support:
You can open the Service Request yourself or have a representative open the Service
Request for you.
To have a representative open the Service Request for you:

l Call 24/7 License Key Live Support for North America, EMEA and APJK by dialing
1-800-782-4362, selecting option 4, and selecting option 4 again.
l Go to http://support.emc.com and click the Live Chat button.
To open the Service Request yourself:
a. Go to http://support.emc.com
l When upgrading to RecoverPoint 4.0, previous licenses will automatically be
converted to the new license format. The new licenses are temporary and valid for 90
days from the date of upgrade. After that, you must have installed one or more
permanent license files to replicate with RecoverPoint appliances.
l Existing Online Support users, when prompted, enter your Support username and
password.
l New Online Support users, click Register Now and complete the registration
process.

b. In Online Support, click Service Center in the main toolbar, and then click Create a
Service Request.
c. Fill out the fields in the service request according to the instructions in the following
table:

Field Value

Service Select Technical Problem/Question from the drop-down.

Request Type

Company and Product Information

Search by Site This is the geographical location of the data center for which you are requesting
ID the license. If you know the site ID, enter it in this field.
If you don't know the site ID:
Expand the Advanced Site Search.
Enter your company name and details.
Click Search.
Select the relevant site ID in the Search Results table.
Note: If you don't see your company’s site ID in the list, contact Customer
Support.

Product Select the Choose from all EMC Products radio button.
Details Start typing the product name into the field to bring up all of the relevant
products.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 241

Troubleshooting

Field Value

Select the product for which you are requesting an upgrade from the search
results.

Version Select the version number of the product that you want to upgrade from the
Number drop-down.

Contact Information

Initial Contact Select Email.

is Best Made Note: If you select Online, all communication regarding your RecoverPoint
By license key will be through the SR tracking system on Online Support.

Primary Your license will be emailed to the email address specified here.
Contact Name Select the name of the primary contact person at your company for
RecoverPoint management.
Note: If the email address/es listed under the primary contact name are
incorrect or missing, edit them to update the contact information.

Phone Enter the phone number as an alternative contact method.

Note: If the phone numbers listed under the primary contact name are
incorrect or missing, edit them to update the contact information.

Problem Details

Problem Enter a problem severity of 4

Severity

Problem Type the following text into the problem summary field:
Summary License Upgrade Request for SO#: <The Sales Order Number of Your Last
RecoverPoint Purchase>

Problem Enter the following:

Description
l Your current RecoverPoint System ID
l All of the array serial numbers of the arrays (VNX, VMAX, VPLEX, etc.) that
require RecoverPoint protection.
l Your required replication types (local replication, remote replication)
l Your required replication capacity
l Your required configuration details (splitter type, splitter sharing, Stretch
CDP, etc.)

d. When you’re done filling out the SR details, click the Submit button. An SR Tracking
number is displayed. Write this number down and save it for future reference.
Note: In most cases, 48 hours after submitting your service request, your
RecoverPoint licenses will be emailed to the specified email address. If you have not
received your RecoverPoint licenses within a month from the time you submitted
your service request, contact Customer Support.

2. Install your RecoverPoint license(s).

When Unisphere for RecoverPoint loads for the first time The Getting Started wizard on
page 16 is displayed. The Getting Started Wizard will guide you, step-by-step, through the
process of installing your license file(s) in RecoverPoint and enabling RecoverPoint support.

242 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

If The Getting Started wizard on page 16 is not displayed, install your license files using
Manage Licenses on page 174 and Configure System Reports and Alerts on page 219.

Get licensing support

Licensing support is available for product ordering, upgrades, license activation and license
installation, according to the following table.

Table 49 Licensing support

Process Americas EMEA APJ

Ordering 1-866-362-7777> +1-508-435-1000, ext. 54777 > Option 2

Option 2

Presalessupportcenter@emc.com

Upgrades 1-508-249-5401 US number: +1-508-249-5401

License Activation or http://support.emc.com

Installation
Service Center > Create Service Request

licensing@emc.com

1-800-782-4362 > 353 (0) 21 487-9862 353 (0) 21 487-9883

Option 4 > Option 4 > Option 1

Notification of new RecoverPoint software releases

RecoverPoint software upgrades are described in relation to major RecoverPoint releases. In
RecoverPoint, major releases are labeled with an X.x (for example, RecoverPoint 4.1).
RecoverPoint upgrades are considered:
l Major—If you must move to another major release to upgrade them. For example,
RecoverPoint 3.5, 4.0 and 4.1 are all different major releases of RecoverPoint, and upgrading
from one major release to another requires a major upgrade.
l Minor—If they are in the same major release. For example, upgrading to any of the service
packs or patches of RecoverPoint 4.1 are all minor upgrades.

The Upgrade Recommendation dialog box

Each time you log into Unisphere for RecoverPoint, if RecoverPoint detects that there is a new
recommended minor version or the target version is newer than the version of RecoverPoint
currently installed at the RPA cluster to which you have connected, the Upgrade Recommendation
dialog box is automatically displayed, containing the:
l RecoverPoint version currently installed at the RPA cluster you are connected to.
l RecoverPoint target version—The target version is the most stable and current RecoverPoint
software code version across all major RecoverPoint releases. Best practice is to ensure all
RPA clusters in your RecoverPoint system are always running the RecoverPoint target version.
l RecoverPoint recommended minor version—The recommended minor version is the most
current minor software version available for the major release of RecoverPoint that you are
running. If your environment is not qualified, or you do not wish to upgrade to the target
version, consider upgrading your RPA clusters to the RecoverPoint recommended minor
version. There is one recommended minor version per major release of RecoverPoint.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 243

Troubleshooting

You can enable or disable the display of the Upgrade Recommendation dialog box using the
Admin > System Notifications > System Reports and Alerts screen, by clearing or marking the
Enable New Release Notification checkbox. It is enabled by default.
If you connected to RecoverPoint using the management (floating) IP address, note the relevant
cluster name in the Upgrade Recommendation dialog box, as the dialog box is displayed per RPA
cluster.

What should I do when I see the Upgrade Recommendation dialog box?

When the Upgrade Recommendation dialog box is displayed, you should start thinking about
upgrading your RecoverPoint system to the target version or recommended minor version
indicated in the pop-up.

Deciding whether you want to upgrade

About this task
To help you decide whether you are qualified for, or want to upgrade, use the:
l RecoverPoint Release Notes—The RecoverPoint release notes contain descriptions of all of the
new features and know bugs of each release. Use them to decide whether the main features of
the target or recommended release warrant an upgrade for the company. For:
n RecoverPoint/SE—download the release notes from https://support.emc.com/products/
1249_RecoverPoint-SE/Documentation/
n RecoverPoint/CL—download the release notes from https://support.emc.com/products/
1226_RecoverPoint-CL/Documentation/
n RecoverPoint/EX—download the release notes from https://support.emc.com/products/
27704_RecoverPoint-EX/Documentation/
l Service Center—The Service Center at https://support.emc.com/servicecenter/ is the one
stop shop where you manage all of the support-related activities and information. If you are
using RecoverPoint/CL or RecoverPoint/EX, use the Service Center to open a Service
Request and start planning the RecoverPoint upgrade. All RecoverPoint users can use the
Service Center to:
n Track, view, manage, and create service requests.
n Download the latest products and patches.
n Engage with Technical Support for answers to questions.
n Contact Technical support.
n Access information for sites, products, contacts, contracts, and environments.
n Download the Support mobile application.
n Learn about Maintenance, Warranty Information and Parts Return Site.
n Connect with customers and technical experts in a worldwide community.
n Register the product to access software downloads, manage, or obtain licenses.
l Support Matrix—The RecoverPoint Simple Support Matrices can be found on the E-Lab
Navigator website. E-Lab has tested and qualified millions of different data center
configurations and solutions. To find out if the environment is qualified for upgrade to the
suggested target and recommended versions, download the relevant RecoverPoint Simple
Support Matrix:
n For upgrade to RecoverPoint 4.1.x—Download the Simple Support Matrix from https://
elabnavigator.emc.com/vault/pdf/EMC_RecoverPoint_4.1.x_ESSM.pdf

244 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

n For upgrade to RecoverPoint 4.0.x—Download the Simple Support Matrix from https://
elabnavigator.emc.com/vault/pdf/EMC_RecoverPoint_4.0.x_ESSM.pdf

Upgrading your RecoverPoint environment

About this task
If you are upgrading your RecoverPoint system and are running:
l RecoverPoint with Unity, VNXe, or VNX storage and RecoverPoint/SE licenses—Your
RecoverPoint system is customer upgradeable.
1. Download the RecoverPoint Customer Upgrade Kit from the Recommended Resources
area in the upper right corner of: https://support.emc.com/products/1249_RecoverPoint-
SE
2. Unzip the kit.
3. From the kit, open the RecoverPointCustomer Upgrade Guide, and follow the
instructions to upgrade your system.
l Any other RecoverPoint system—Your RecoverPoint system is not customer upgradeable.
Customer Support will plan and execute the upgrade for you. Contact your representative or
open a service request at https://support.emc.com/servicecenter/

Set the time display of Unisphere for RecoverPoint

About this task
Use the following procedure from any screen in Unisphere for RecoverPoint to set the time
display.
Procedure
1. Click Time displayed on the Unisphere for RecoverPoint status bar.

2. In the Set Time Display dialog box, select the radio button of your preferred time display
option.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 245

Troubleshooting

NOTICE Local time is the local time at the RPA that Unisphere for RecoverPoint is
connected to.

Results
The time display option you choose will be used by RecoverPoint when performing operations
which require a time stamp such as collecting system information and logging events.

Change the display language of Unisphere for RecoverPoint

Procedure
1. In Unisphere for RecoverPoint, select the Settings icon in the upper-right corner.

2. In the Preference Settings dialog box, select another display language.

First-time initialization is taking too long

You can save both time and bandwidth by initializing copy volumes from a backup, when they are
first added to the system.

How does it work

When a consistency group is initialized for the first time, the RecoverPoint system cannot identify
which blocks are identical between the production and copy volumes, and must therefore mark all
blocks for that volume. This is true both following the creation of a new consistency group and
following the addition of a volume (or volumes) to an existing group. While initializing, the
RecoverPoint system efficiently determines which blocks are actually different between the
production and copies, and sends only the data for those blocks to the copy storage, as the
initialization snapshot.
The volumes at the local and remote RPA clusters can be initialized while the host applications are
either running or not. Initialization of one consistency group does not interfere with the operation
of other consistency groups. Initialization can be carried out automatically over IP or Fibre
Channel.
Alternatively, you can back up the current production data, manually transfer it to the remote
cluster, and then copy the production image to the copy volumes, where it becomes the pre-
replication image.
The state of data transfer prior to any type of initialization is always paused.

246 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

NOTICE First-time initialization can cause changes in the partition table of the copy volume or
volumes. In a Windows environment, you must clear the OS cache before changing the
partition table of a copy volume. To clear the OS cache, disable the LUN or LUNs on which the
volume resides, and re-enable it. You can do so from the “Disk drives” interface of the
Windows Device Manager.
You can initialize new consistency groups by creating a backup of your production volumes,
physically transferring them to the remote site, and copying the backup images onto the remote
storage volumes.
During this process, applications at the production site can be running or not. Although transfer is
paused during this process, unless the production host is completely shut down during the creation
and physical transfer of the production image to the remote site, the host applications keep writing
to storage. In this time, the production and copy volumes become inconsistent, and any writes to
production volumes during this process are subsequently synchronized, upon completion of the
process, and start of transfer.
Only synchronizing the changes made to the production volumes during this time results in a
relatively small amount of additional traffic, and takes substantially less time than to synchronize
over IP or Fibre Channel.

Initialize from backup

About this task
Use the following procedure to initialize from a backup image, when the production and copy
volumes are not consistent.
Procedure
1. At the production RPA cluster Attach volumes to the splitter on page 161 and ensure that all
splitters that have access to replication volumes in the group are attached to those volumes.
2. Create a new consistency group, and define replication and journal volumes using Protect
Volumes on page 39 or Policy Templates on page 55.
3. Pause transfer for a group on page 112 for the group, to stop the replication of data from
production to the copy.
4. In the RecoverPoint CLI, run the clear_markers command to inform the system that the
copy volume at the remote RPA cluster is known to be identical to its corresponding
production volume, and a full volume sweep synchronization is not required.
NOTICE For the selected consistency groups, clearing markers clears all markers of the
selected copy from the production journal volume; that is, it treats the selected copy as
identical to the production source. Caution: To clear markers, the production source and
the selected copy volume must be absolutely identical. If they are not, the
inconsistencies will remain. The clear markers command should be used only with
extreme caution. It is useful when a production source and a copy have been
synchronized manually by initializing from backup and adequate bandwidth is not
available to synchronize using the storage network. Otherwise, the best practice is not
to use this command.

5. Create a block-based backup of the production volumes.

6. Physically transfer the backup to the remote cluster.
7. At the remote RPA cluster, in Unisphere for RecoverPoint:
a. Test a Copy on page 128 to enable image access to the image at the remote RPA cluster
in Logged Accessmode, and enable direct access. Do not select the pre-replication
image.
Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 247
Troubleshooting

If your consistency group contains more than one non-production copy, for all other
copies, the journal is erased and all journal history is lost.

b. Click Finish to close the wizard without disabling image access.

8. Restore the backup onto the remote copy volumes. The backup image becomes the pre-
replication image.
9. In Unisphere for RecoverPoint:
a. Select Recovery > Manage Recovery.
b. Select Finish Testing from the Select Next Action combo box of the accessed copy at
the remote RPA cluster, to disable image access and start transfer to the copy.
Upon start of transfer, the system synchronizes the data of the copy volume with the
corresponding production data.

10. At the remote RPA cluster, if the group contains more than one non-production copy, Start
transfer to a copy on page 114 to all of the other copies.

Protecting your data during initialization

About this task
When replicating in any mode other than snap-based replication mode, by default, you cannot
recover production from a copy image or fail over to a copy image during initialization. For a
recovery activity to succeed, there must be a complete image in the copy journal to recover the
data from; therefore, recovery is not available during initialization, while the snapshot being
distributed is larger than the capacity of the copy journal.
To enable recovery during initialization , set the value of the allow_long_resync parameter of
the config_copy_policy CLI command to no (default is yes). When allow_long_resync is
set to no, the system pauses transfer whenever the snapshot being transferred is larger than the
capacity of the journal, at which point you can Add or edit journal volumes on page 119 to increase
the journal size. Note that any additional journal volumes should be permanent, as removing a
journal volume causes all of the snapshots in the journal to be deleted and requires a volume
sweep.

Host applications are hanging

Some RecoverPoint users set a policy that enables RecoverPoint to control the acknowledgment
of writes back to the host in the case of bottlenecks or insufficient resources that would otherwise
prevent RecoverPoint from replicating the data.
If your host applications experience delays, loss of client connectivity, or slow response times,
check whether the value of the regulate_application parameter in the
config_link_policy CLI command is set to yes (default is no).

When does application regulation happen?

Application regulation happens when a user enables the regulate_application parameter in
the config_link_policy CLI command.

How does application regulation work?

The system slows host applications when approaching the RPO policy limit. When the system
cannot replicate the current incoming write-rate while guaranteeing the RPO setting, the system
slows host applications to guarantee that the RPO is always enforced. Additionally, if there is a

248 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

bottleneck in the system, the system will regulate the host applications instead of entering a High
load state.
Link policies on page 67 includes more information about the RPO setting.

How do I know application regulation is happening?

About this task
If your host applications experience delays, loss of client connectivity, or slow response times,
check whether the value of the regulate_application parameter in the
config_link_policy CLI command is set to yes. If it is, your host applications are being
regulated to ensure your RPO.

What can I do to stop my group from being regulated?

About this task
To come out of this state, set the value of the regulate_application parameter in the
config_link_policy CLI command to no.
Note: Before disabling application regulation, make sure you are familiar with replication modes
and understand the implications of doing so.

One-phase distribution workarounds

To avoid long initializations, perform one of the following procedures in the RecoverPoint
Administrator's Guide:
About this task
l Use the initialization from backup procedure First-time initialization is taking too long on page
246.
l Set the value of the allow_long_resync parameter of the config_copy_policy CLI
command to no(default is yes).
l Add volumes to the copy journal. Note that the additional journal volumes must be permanent
or a full sweep will occur when the volumes are removed.

Copy is being regulated

RecoverPoint includes a smart mechanism that protects the system from adverse affects and
over-consumption of system resources, when a system component is operating improperly in the
system. This mechanism is referred to as Control action regulation.
This section answers the questions:

When does control action regulation happen?

Control action regulation happens when a system component is operating improperly in the
system, and jittering (quickly changing) between two states for a set period of time.

How do I know control action regulation is happening?

You know the control action regulation mechanism has been enabled, when:
l Event number 4133 (Copy regulation has started)is displayed in the event log.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 249

Troubleshooting

l In the consistency group Status tab of the GUI, the Role of a copy becomes Regulated and is
displayed in red.

How does control action regulation work?

When control action regulation happens, to allow the environment to stabilize, the control action
regulation mechanism places the copy in a Regulated state, in which the system will protect itself
by closing the link to the copy, limiting any adverse affects and over-consumption of system
resources. The copy stays in the state it was in before regulation began for 30 minutes or until
corrective action is taken.

How do I release a copy from control action regulation?

About this task
When control action regulation happens, you can:
l Release all groups at all copies from this state by running the unregulate_all_copies
command from the CLI.
l Check previous event logs. Look for repetitive errors that may indicate a specific problem in
the system.
l Check SAN/IP events outside of RecoverPoint, as instabilities may not originate from
RecoverPoint.
l If regulation persists, Collect System Information on page 203 and contact Customer Support
for further instruction.

How do I verify that regulation is over?

About this task
The following indicators can help you verify that your copy is no longer being regulated:
l Event 4132 (Copy regulation has ended due to a user action or internal timeout.) is displayed in
the event log.
l The Role of a copy is no longer displayed in red in the consistency group Status tab.

Copy is experiencing a high load

High load is a system state that indicates resource depletion during replication.
There are two kinds of high loads in RecoverPoint:
l Permanent High-loads - In these cases, RecoverPoint stops and waits for a user action in order
to come out of high load.
l Temporary High-loads - In these cases, RecoverPoint tries to recover from the high load and
will keep trying until the condition that triggered the high load changes.

How do I know a copy is experiencing a high load?

You know that a copy has entered a high load state, when:
l Warning events are logged specifying that the copy is experiencing high load.
l In Unisphere for RecoverPoint:

250 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

n In the consistency group or copy Status tab, the transfer state of a copy becomes High
load.
n In the Consistency Group Transfer State widget in the Dashboard, a state of Init
(orange) is displayed for the group.

What is a permanent high load?

A permanent high load is a system state that happens during replication, when the size of the
journal, or the queue of snapshots waiting for distribution of the journal at the copy, is insufficient.

When do permanent high loads occur?

A permanent high load generally happens in one of two cases:
l During copy testing in RecoverPoint products with a splitter, if a user accesses a copy in
logged or virtual access modes for a long time and the queue of snapshots waiting for
distribution of the journal reaches its maximum capacity, in this case the system will Pause
Transfer and wait for user input.
l When the system is in initialization mode, and the journal volume has reached its maximum
capacity, while the value of the allow_long_resync parameter of the
config_copy_policy CLI command is set to no.

How do permanent high loads work?

When any of the events in When do permanent high loads occur? on page 251 occurs, the system
stops transfer and waits for user input.

How can I tell a copy is under permanent high load?

The following indicators are displayed when your copy is experiencing a permanent high load:
l Warning events are logged specifying that the copy is experiencing high load.
l The transfer state is displayed as High load. You can display the transfer state:
n In the RecoverPoint CLI, by running the get_group_states command.
n In Unisphere for RecoverPoint:
– In the consistency group Status tab, by selecting Protection > Manage Protection,
selecting a group, and clicking the group’s Status tab.
– In the Consistency Groups Transfer Status widget of the Dashboard of the Overall
Health tab, groups undergoing permanent high load are labeled Init (orange).

What can I do to come out of permanent high load?

About this task
To release a copy from a permanent high load:
l During copy testing in RecoverPoint products with a splitter, if the user accessed a copy in
logged or virtual access mode for a long time and the queue of snapshots waiting for
distribution of the journal reached its maximum capacity, you should disable image access or
enable direct access according to image access modes.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 251

Troubleshooting

l If the system was in initialization mode, and the journal volume became full, while the value of
the allow_long_resync parameter of the config_copy_policy CLI command is set to
no.

How do I verify that a permanent high load is over?

About this task
The following indicators can help you verify that your copy is no longer experiencing a permanent
high load:
l Warning events are logged specifying that the copy is no longer experiencing high load.
l The transfer state is no longer displayed as High load. You can display the transfer state:
n In the RecoverPoint CLI, by running the get_group_states command.
n In Unisphere for RecoverPoint:
– In the consistency group Status tab, by selecting Protection > Manage Protection,
selecting a group, and clicking the group’s Status tab.
– In the Consistency Groups Transfer Status widget of the Dashboard > Overall Health
tab.

What is a temporary high load?

A temporary high load is a system state that happens during replication, when the RPA resources
at the production site are insufficient.

When do temporary high loads occur?

Temporary high loads occur:
l In extreme cases, during uncommonly great durations of uncommonly extreme write loads
l When the copy or journal volumes are not fast enough to handle distribution
l If the WAN is too slow
l If the compression level is too high

How do temporary high loads work?

When any of the events in When do temporary high loads occur? on page 252 occurs, traffic is
paused and started immediately. If resources are still low, the system waits five minutes and then
tries to pause and start transfer again until the required resources are available.
NOTICE Upon every start of transfer, a short initialization occurs.

How can I tell a copy is under temporary high load?

The following indicators are displayed when your copy is experiencing a temporary high load:
l Warning events are logged specifying that the copy is experiencing high load.
l The transfer state is displayed as high load, followed by a progress status. You can display the
transfer state:
n In the RecoverPoint CLI, by running the get_group_states command.
n In Unisphere for RecoverPoint:

252 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

– In the consistency group Status tab, by selecting Protection > Manage Protection,
selecting a group, and clicking the group’s Status tab.
– In the Consistency Groups Transfer Status widget of the Dashboard of the Overall
Health tab, groups undergoing temporary high load are labeled Init (orange).

What should I know about temporary high loads?

Temporary high loads are a common occurrence and expected to happen from time to time.
If the high load lasts for an extreme period of time or occurs too frequently (and eventually
impacts the business RPO) contact Customer Support for a mitigation plan.

How do I verify that a temporary high load is over?

About this task
The following indicators can help you verify that your copy is no longer experiencing a temporary
high load:
l Warning events are logged specifying that the copy is no longer experiencing high load.
l The transfer state is no longer displayed as High load. You can display the transfer state:
n In the RecoverPoint CLI, by running the get_group_states command.
n In Unisphere for RecoverPoint:
– In the consistency group Status tab, by selecting Protection > Manage Protection,
selecting a group, and clicking the group’s Status tab.
– In the Consistency Groups Transfer Status widget of the Dashboard > Overall Health
tab.

RPA keeps rebooting

Reboot regulation is a state of regulation that allows the system to detach an RPA from its RPA
cluster in the event of frequent unexplained reboots or internal failures.

When does reboot regulation happen?

Reboot regulation happens when an RPA is frequently and unexpectedly rebooting, or undergoing
a repeated internal failure.

How does reboot regulation work?

When an RPA behaves according to When does reboot regulation happen? on page 253, the
system detaches the RPA from the RPA cluster.

How do I know reboot regulation is happening?

Reboot regulation is happening when the user receives the following message when logging into
the RPA as a boxmgmt user:

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 253

Troubleshooting

What should I do to stop reboot regulation?

About this task
To stop reboot regulation, contact Customer Support for further instructions.

Host applications crash during initialization

During initialization RecoverPoint reads the data at the production storage in order to synchronize
the data of the copy volumes with the production volumes. If the production storage cannot
handle the read-rate it will hang, causing RecoverPoint and the production host to timeout, and
the user's applications to crash, lose access to the storage, or experience I/O or path failures.
RecoverPoint’s I/O throttling mechanism enables users to limit the storage read-rate of each array
or vCenter Server seen by an RPA cluster or all arrays and vCenter Servers seen by an RPA
cluster, allowing the storage to handle the I/O rate during initialization.
When the I/O throttling mechanism is enabled (Default is disabled) RecoverPoint limits the I/O
rate that it sends to the storage according to the throttling level defined by the user.

Storage read-rate during initialization

About this task
Use the following procedure to check your storage read-rate during initialization.
Procedure
1. Connect to the RecoverPoint CLI at the relevant site and run the detect_bottlenecks
command.
2. Note the relevant read-rates:
l If you are connected to an RPA cluster at the production site, note the value of the
Speed of reading from local user volume during initialization
parameter.
l If you are connected to a remote RPA cluster, note the value of the Speed of
reading from remote user volume during initialization parameter.

How does I/O throttling work?

In RecoverPoint, I/O throttling works in the following way:
1. The user sets the I/O throttling level to limit the storage read-rate during initialization.
2. During initialization, I/Os are delayed, so they do not exceed the value of the throttling level.
NOTICE The higher the throttling level, the longer initialization will take.

When should I enable I/O throttling?

Enable I/O throttling if your host applications experience I/O or path failures, crash, or lose access
to the storage during initialization.

How do I enable I/O throttling?

Before you begin
The following limitations apply to the I/O throttling feature:

254 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

l I/O throttling can only be configured using the RecoverPoint CLI or REST API. You cannot
configure I/O throttling using the Unisphere for RecoverPoint GUI.
l I/O throttling can only be configured for arrays and vCenter Servers that have been mapped
to, and are therefore seen by, the RPA cluster.
l When selecting to configure I/O throttling for all arrays or vCenter Servers seen by an RPA
cluster, the performance of all consistency groups residing on the same array or vCenter
Server is affected. For example, setting the throttling level to high limits the I/O rate of all
RPAs in an RPA cluster to a maximum read-rate of 50 MBps, per array or vCenter Server.
l The higher the throttling level, the longer initialization will take. Ensure that a low throttling
level is insufficient before setting the throttling level to high.
l You must be logged into RecoverPoint as an admin user to configure I/O throttling.
l To ensure efficiency, RecoverPoint sends I/Os to storage in parallel. The I/O throttling
mechanism regulates parallel I/Os in the following way:
n When set to low, the I/O throttling mechanism allows for a maximum of 10 MB of parallel
I/Os per second.
n When set to high, the I/O throttling mechanism allows for a maximum of 1 MB of parallel
I/Os per second.
n When set to custom, the I/O throttling mechanism allows for a maximum of
<CustomValue>/20 of parallel I/Os. For example, if the custom value is 40 MBps, the I/O
throttling mechanism allows for 40/20=2 MB of parallel I/Os per second.
l In previous RecoverPoint versions, I/O throttling was only available per RPA cluster.
Therefore:
n When upgrading to RecoverPoint 4.1 from a previous RecoverPoint version, the I/O
throttling settings in the previous RecoverPoint version are applied per array and vCenter
Server that are seen by the RPA cluster at the time of the upgrade. Any arrays or vCenter
Servers that are mapped to the RPA cluster after upgrade require additional I/O throttling
configuration.
n If the RecoverPoint system contains at least one RPA cluster running a RecoverPoint
version before RecoverPoint 4.1:
– You can not set the I/O throttling level per array or vCenter Server.
– The I/O throttling settings of all RPA clusters are the RecoverPoint 4.0 and earlier
version.
Note: See the RecoverPoint 4.0 version of the RecoverPoint Administrator’s Guide
and the RecoverPoint CLI Guide for the I/O throttling settings if at least one of the
RPA clusters in the RecoverPoint system is running a RecoverPoint version before
4.1.
About this task
Use the following procedure to enable I/O throttling for a specific array or vCenter Server.
Procedure
1. Run the config_io_throttling command in the RecoverPoint CLI.
2. Select the RPA cluster to which the array or vCenter Server is mapped.
3. Select the array or vCenter Server from the list.
4. Set the throttling level: Set the throttling level to low to limit the I/O rate of the specified
array or vCenter Server to a maximum read-rate of 200 MBps.
l Set the throttling level to high to limit the I/O rate of the specified array or vCenter
Server to a maximum read-rate of 50 MBps.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 255

Troubleshooting

l Set the throttling level to custom, and specify the custom value in MBps to limit the I/O
rate of the specified array or vCenter Server to any other read-rate.
l Set the throttling level to none to disable I/O throttling on the specified array or vCenter
Server.
5. To enable I/O throttling for all arrays or vCenter Servers that are mapped to an RPA cluster:
a. Run the config_io_throttling command in the RecoverPoint CLI.
b. Select the RPA cluster to which the arrays and/or vCenter Servers are mapped.
c. Scroll down to the bottom of the list of seen arrays and vCenter Servers, and select the
last option in the list.
d. Set the throttling level:
l Set the throttling level to low to limit the I/O rate of all RPAs in an RPA cluster to a
maximum read-rate of 200 MBps, per array.
l Set the throttling level to high to limit the I/O rate of all RPAs in an RPA cluster to a
maximum read-rate of 50 MBps, per array.
l Set the throttling level to custom, and specify the custom value in MBps to limit the I/O
rate of all RPAs in an RPA cluster to any other read-rate, per array.
l Set the throttling level to none to disable I/O throttling of all RPAs in the specified RPA
cluster.
Results
The read-rate of the RPA on which the consistency group is running is limited to 50 MBps, 200
MBps, or the specified custom setting divided by the number of RPAs in the cluster.

How do I check how throttling affects my system performance?

About this task
To check the effect that I/O throttling has on your system performance, check your Storage read-
rate during initialization on page 254 before and after enabling I/O throttling.

How can I tell whether or not I/O throttling is enabled?

About this task
When I/O throttling is enabled, initializations take longer to complete. The higher the throttling
level, the longer initialization will take to complete.
To verify whether I/O throttling is enabled, run the get_system_settings CLI command and
note the state of the I/O Throttling section per RPA cluster.

Add more LUNs than allowed per VNX storage group

Note: This section is not relevant to Unity or VNXe.

RecoverPoint requires the following types of volumes at both production and remote copies:
l Replication
l Journal
In VNX storage systems, the number of LUNs per storage group is limited. This limit is typically
256, 512, or 1024, depending on the specific VNX model, as presented in the RecoverPoint Release
Notes.

256 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

How do I know I need more VNX LUNs?

You know that you need more VNX LUNs when:
l The following message is displayed in the RecoverPoint or Unisphere UI:
The maximum number of supported LUNs per storage group has been
reached. Either delete existing consistency groups or contact
Customer Support for further assistance.
l You calculate in advance the number of LUNs that you expect to need to support the
replication, journal, and repository volumes for your RecoverPoint configuration, and that
number exceeds the number of LUNs currently available.

What can I do if I need more VNX LUNs?

About this task
To overcome this limit, you can create additional storage groups, up to 16 per VNX storage system.
An equal number of virtual WWNs is created for each RPA Fibre Channel port, and one virtual
WWN from each RPA Fibre Channel port is assigned to each additional storage group. Use the
following procedure to create additional VNX storage groups.
Procedure
1. Calculate the total number of storage groups to create, by dividing the estimated total
number of LUNs you need by the limit for your VNX model.
2. Log into RecoverPoint as user boxmgmt.
3. Use the Number of virtual ports per port option to create the virtual WWNs at each site,
as follows:
a. Open theSetup > Modify settings > Site-1 details menu.
b. Use the Number of virtual ports per port option to set the desired number of virtual
WWNs.
c. Apply the modified settings.
4. Zone the newly created WWNs:
a. For Brocade switches that support NPIV, enable NPIV and set ports as F_Ports;
otherwise, set ports as L_Ports. For all other switches, every switch port to which a
RecoverPoint Fiber Channel port that uses virtual ports is attached must be configured
as a Fabric Loop port.
b. Create RPA-to-Storage zones with the new WWNs in the same way that existing WWNs
are already zoned.
5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 for each RPA cluster in your RecoverPoint system.
Results
The RPAs automatically create new storage groups, and register the new WWNs to those storage
groups.

How can I verify that the storage groups were added successfully?
About this task
Upon successful completion of registration (which may take between several minutes and an
hour), the event, “Registration of all the site RPAs’ initiators with the CLARiiON array is
complete.”, is generated for each site.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 257

Troubleshooting

Swap the LUN numbers of journal volumes

About this task
Swapping LUN numbers for LUNs that have already been exposed to an RPA cluster should be
avoided when possible. When it cannot be avoided, it should be done according to the following
procedure.
Use the following procedure to swap LUN numbers on LUNs that have already been exposed to an
RPA cluster.
Procedure
1. Disable the consistency group.
Disabling the consistency group causes a full sweep of the consistency group when it is
enabled. This procedure will also cause journal loss.

2. Remove journals from the consistency group.

3. Swap the LUNs (on the storage array).
4. Add LUNs as journals.
5. Enable the consistency group.
NOTICE The journal is deleted and a full sweep of the consistency group occurs.

Find your array serial numbers

This section will help you find the serial numbers of your storage arrays, when activating
RecoverPoint licenses.

Find the serial numbers of VNX arrays

About this task
For VNX Series arrays, use the Naviseccli getagent command to find the array serial number.
For example:

naviseccli -Scope 0 -user <username> -password <password> -address

<spaddress> getagent
Agent Rev: 7.32.0 (5.2)
Name: K10
Desc:
Node: A-APM00120701240
Physical Node: K10
Signature: 2998645
Peer Signature: 2998612
Revision: 05.32.000.4.007
SCSI Id: 0
Model: VNX7500
Model Type: Rackmount
Prom Rev: 8.10.00
SP Memory: 24576
Serial No: APM00120701240
SP Identifier: A
Cabinet: SPE5

258 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

NOTICE spaddress is the address of SPA or SPB, not the control station.

Find the serial numbers of Symmetrix arrays

About this task
For Symmetrix arrays, you can display the array serial number on the Symmetrix array or through
RecoverPoint.
On the Symmetrix array, run the SYMCLI command to find the array serial number.
For example:
# symcfg list
SYMMETRIX

Mcode Cache Num Phys Num Symm

SymmID Attachment Model Version Size (MB) Devices Devices

000194900874 Local VMAX-1SE 5876 28672 32 695

In RecoverPoint, run the get_splitter_states CLI command to display the array serial
number.
For example:

SiteC> get_splitter_states cluster=SiteC

Cluster:
SiteC:
Splitters:
SYMM- 000194900874
Status: OK

Find the serial numbers of VPLEX arrays

About this task
For VPLEX arrays, you can display the array serial number on the VPLEX array or through
RecoverPoint.
For example:

VPlexcli:/> ls -t /engines/*::top-level-assembly

/engines/engine-2-1:
Name Value
------------------ --------------
top-level-assembly FNM00104500511

/engines/engine-1-1:
Name Value
------------------ --------------
top-level-assembly FNM00104500511

In RecoverPoint, run the get_splitter_states CLI command to display the array serial
number.

ClusterA> get_splitter_states cluster=ClusterA

Cluster:

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 259

Troubleshooting

ClusterA:
Splitters:
FNM00104500511
Status: OK

Find your RPA cluster IDs

Procedure
1. Run the CLI command get_internal_cluster_uids.
2. Enter the cluster name, or alternately, press Enter to see a list of all of the RPA cluster IDs
in the system.
3. Note the output:

Internal cluster uids:

Cluster1: 123123123123123123
Cluster2: 345345345345345345
Cluster3: 456456456456456456

Find your XtremIO cluster IDs

The licenses for XtremIO are enforced to the XtremIO cluster ID via the license Locking ID.
The XtremIO cluster ID (called a PSNT, or Product PSNT Serial Number in XtremIO) contains 5
alphanumeric characters followed by 9 numeric characters.
For example: XIO00123456789

Find your XtremIO cluster IDs (PSNTs) in XtremIO

About this task
Your XtremIO PSNTs can be displayed:
l In the Inventory of the XtremIO GUI, for example:

260 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

l By running the show-clusters-info command in the XtremIO CLI, for example:

xmcli (admin)> show-clusters-info

Table 50 Cluster information

Cluster- Index State Conn-State Activation- Start-Time SW-Version Encryption-

Name Time PSNT Mode

xbrick414 1 active connected Wed Jun 10 4.0.0-54 disabled

Wed Jun 10 17:30:15 XIO00150
17:30:15 2015 201280
2015

Find your XtremIO cluster IDs (PSNTs) in RecoverPoint

About this task
RecoverPoint discovers XtremIO PSNTs automatically and they are displayed when you Register
storage on page 147. When multiple PSNTs exist the user should register each PSNT, one at a
time.

Understanding the RecoverPoint license

The license file format illustrated below is described in the following table.
Figure 7 License file format

Figure 8 on page 262 contains some common examples of RecoverPoint licenses. One license file
can include multiple licenses. Each license starts with the word INCREMENT.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 261

Troubleshooting

Figure 8 Example licenses

The following table described the variables in the license file, and their possible values.

Table 51 License file variables

Variable Description Examples

{Replication} The RecoverPoint license RP.xx.REM.xx

model. RP.xx.LOC.xx
Valid values are:
l LOC for local replication
l REM for remote
replication

{Type} The RecoverPoint license RP.CL.xxx.xx

model. RP.SE.xxx.xx
Valid values are:
RP.EX.xxx.xx
l CL for RecoverPoint/CL
l EX for RecoverPoint/EX
l SE for RecoverPoint/SE

{Prod} The array model. Valid values RP.xx.xx.VNX5700

are:
l 00 - for RecoverPoint/CL
licenses

262 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Table 51 License file variables (continued)

Variable Description Examples

l ELA - for licenses based

on Enterprise License
Agreements
l VMAX
l VMAX10K, VMAX20K,
VMAX40K
l VPLEX
l Unity models (for
example, Unity 300)
l VNXe3200
l VNX arrays (for example,
VNX7600)
l CX, CX4-120, CX4-240,
CX4-480, CX4-960,
AX4-5

{Version} The license schema version. 1.0

{Expiration} The license expiration date. l 15-dec-2014

Licenses can be:
l permanent
l Permanent (for an
unlimited time)
l Expiring:
- Evaluation: Up to 90
days
- Temporary: Up to 365
days
- Emergency: Up to a few
days
Note: Warnings will
appear 90 days
before license
expiration.

Valid values are:

l permanent
l A date in the format day-
month-year

{LockingID} The unique identifier of the l Unity/VNXe/VNX array

entity that the license is tied serial numbers are in the
to. format:
A Locking ID can be: APM00120801240
l The serial number of a l VPLEX array serial
Unity/VNXe/VNX Series numbers are in the
array.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 263

Troubleshooting

Table 51 License file variables (continued)

Variable Description Examples

l The serial number of a format:

VPLEX array. FNM00105500511
l The SYMM ID of a l VMAX array serial
Symmetrix array. numbers are in the
format: 000194910874
l An RPA Cluster ID.
l RPA Cluster IDs are in the
l A System ID
format:
7754643987555540854

{Capacity} The amount of data licensed l 12 (for 12 TB)

for replication at a given site.
l 0 (for unlimited capacity)
l In RecoverPoint/CL: as
purchased, per RPA
cluster.
l In RecoverPoint/SE: the
entire Unity/VNXe/VNX
array capacity (unlimited)
l In RecoverPoint/EX: For
Unity/VNXe/VNX, the
entire array capacity. All
other arrays; as
purchased per array.
A value of zero means
that the replication
capacity is unlimited.

{Unit} The unit of data being TB

replicated.

{Customer} The customer’s name and Company Name, MyStreet,

physical address, as entered Hopkington, MA
in the RecoverPoint sales
order.

{Issued} The license creation date, in 15-Dec-2014

the format day-month-year.

{Site_info} The Site ID is a global setting ACTIVATED TO SiteID:

that identifies the 112207055
geographical location of the
customer site.
In RecoverPoint, the site ID is
called a Location ID.
The site ID is received by the
RecoverPoint system from
ELMS and is sent to the
system report mechanism
(SyR) and used (in
RecoverPoint/CL licensing)

264 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Table 51 License file variables (continued)

Variable Description Examples

to associate an RPA cluster to

a geographical location.

{SN} The Activation ID, a uniquely 2055509

generated value specific to
the activation. Every time a
license is activated, the SN
changes. This value is sent to
the system report mechanism
(SyR) for support purposes.

{Sign} An encrypted hash segment 0004 0EAA 52A0 F74E 6EG4

containing the license BE6A 6CF0 1400 \
information which is used by 10E3 A333 704C 11E1 9DAF
RecoverPoint to validate the DA5B 1C0B
license and ensure its
uniqueness.

Calculate your required journal size

The calculation of journals depends on whether or not snapshot consolidation is enabled.
The recommended minimum journal size when not utilizing snapshot consolidation is:
MinJournalSize = 1.05 * [(D data per second)*(required rollback time in
seconds)/(1 – image access log size)] + (reserved for marking)
For example, if:
D data per second = 5 Mb/s
required rollback time = 24 hr = 86 400 s
image access log = 0.20
reserved for marking = 1.5 GB
Then the minimum journal size would be:

1.05 * 5 Mb/s * 86 400 s / (1 - 0.20) + 1.5 GB = 579 000 Mb

579 000 Mb = 579 000/8 MB = 72 375 MB = 72.4 GB

You can use iostat (UNIX) or perfmon (Windows) to determine the value for D data per second.
The default image access log size is 20%, and it can only be changed using the RecoverPoint CLI.
See the RecoverPoint Release Notes for the minimum and maximum journal size limitations.

Minimum journal size with snapshot consolidation

Note: Not relevant for XtremIO.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 265

Troubleshooting

Journal sizing with snapshot consolidation must consider the incremental change of data over the
period of consolidation. Therefore, when snapshot consolidation is enabled, the formula for
estimating the minimum required journal size is:

MinJournalSize =
SpaceForMarkingAndReplication
+ AvgHourlyChangeRate
* (UnconsolidatedDuration
+ DailyConsolidations
+ WeeklyConsolidations
+ MonthlyConsolidations)
/ spaceAfterConsolidationProcess
/ spaceAfterImageAccessProcesses
* spaceAfterCompression

Note: See the RecoverPoint Release Notes for the minimum and maximum journal size
limitations, when snapshot consolidation is enabled.
For example, if an application has the following requirements:
l An average data change rate of 0.5MBps
l An image access log size that is 20% of the total journal size
l A distributed consistency group
l A 12-hour unconsolidated duration (protection window)
l 10 daily snapshots
l Two weekly snapshots
l Three monthly snapshots
l Journal compression is disabled
The minimum size for the journal at this copy would be calculated as (if performance data was
unavailable for the localities of reference):

MinJournalSize = 6
+ { [0.5*(60*60/1024)]
* 12
+ [24 + (10-1)*24*(1-0.20)]
+ [7*24*(1-0.20)+ (2-1)*7*24*(1-0.20)*(1-0.20)]
+ [7*24*4*(1-0.20)*(1-0.20)+(3-1)*28*24*(1-0.20)*
(1-0.20)*(1-0.20)]
/ (1-0.25)
/ [1-(0.20 + 0.10)]
* (1-0)}

Where:

Table 52 Journal size with snapshot consolidation equation legend

Field Description

MinJournalSize The minimum journal size that is required to

sustain the specified journal configuration, in
GB.

SpaceForMarkingAndReplication The journal space required (mainly) for the

storage of the delta marking information, and
other replication processes, in GB.
Can be one of two constant values:

266 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Table 52 Journal size with snapshot consolidation equation legend (continued)

Field Description

l If the group is a normal (non-distributed)

consistency group, set this value to 1.5.
l If the group is a distributed consistency
group, set this value to 6.
Note: The space that is required for
marking and replication processes is four
times larger for distributed consistency
groups, regardless of the number of RPAs
configured. This is due to the four
consistency group segments that are
created when you use distributed
consistency groups.

AvgHourlyChangeRate The average change rate of the replicated

data based on iostat.a, in GB per hour.
For example:
If the average data change rate of the
replicated data is 0.5MBps, the
AvgHourlyChangeRate is:
0.5MBps * (60Sec * 60Min /
1024forGB) = 1.75 GBps
Note: If this value is unknown, create the
consistency group and allow it to replicate
during a period in time that adequately
represents the average change rate.
Then, Detect Bottlenecks on page 196 for
this period of time and note the Incoming
writes rate for link.

UnconsolidatedDuration The period of time during which snapshot

data is not to be consolidated, in hours. The
period’s start time is always today, and the
period’s end time is n hours ago.Also referred
to as the protection window, or the
continuous protection period.
For example:
If the past two days-worth of unconsolidated
data must always be available, the value of
UnconsolidatedDuration is:
2 * 24Hrs = 48
Note: Value must be at least 12 hours.
This value is set and can be modified
through the Do not consolidate
snapshots for at least setting in the
Journal policies on page 70.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 267

Troubleshooting

Table 52 Journal size with snapshot consolidation equation legend (continued)

Field Description

DailyConsolidations The required number of daily snapshots less

the journal space that is saved during daily
consolidations (the %DailyLoR), in hours.
This value is computed as:
24 + (NumberOfDailyConsolidations
- 1) * 24 * (1-%DailyLoR)
For example:
If three daily snapshots are required, the value
of DailyConsolidations is:

24 + (3-1) * 24Hrs * (1-%DailyLoR)

Note: This value is set, and can be

modified, through the one snapshot per
day for x days setting in the Journal
policies on page 70. There must be 24
hours-worth of unconsolidated data
available to create the first daily snapshot,
and therefore, the first 24 hours are not
multiplied by the %DailyLoR.

%DailyLoR The percent of journal space that is saved

during each daily consolidation due to the
data that is repeated to the same location,
and therefore, write-folded on consolidation.
Note: The locality of reference depends
on each consistency group’s (or
application’s) specific I/O pattern, how
many blocks get re-written, and other
factors. If you do not know this value, you
can use a value of 0.2 ( 20%) for a
general estimation. For a more precise
value based on the system performance,
and send it to Customer Support.

To calculate the journal space that is left after

daily consolidations, use a value of:
1 - %DailyLoR, For example: 1 - 0.20 (if
performance data is not available).
Note: The %DailyLoR is not applied to the
first daily snapshot, as there must be 24
hours-worth of unconsolidated data
available to create the first daily snapshot.
See the DailyConsolidations
parameter for a detailed description.

WeeklyConsolidations The required number of weekly snapshots,

less the journal space saved during daily and

268 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Table 52 Journal size with snapshot consolidation equation legend (continued)

Field Description

weekly consolidations (the %DailyLoR and

the %WeeklyLoR), in hours.
This value is computed as:
7 * 24 * (1-%DailyLoR) +
(NumberOfWeeklyConsolidations -
1) * 7 * 24 *
(1 - %DailyLoR ) * (1 -
%WeeklyLoR )
For example:
If four weekly snapshots are required, the
value of WeeklyConsolidations is:
7 * 24 * (1-0.20) + (4 - 1) * 7 *
24 * (1 - 0.20 ) * (1 - 0.20 )
Note: This value is set, and can be
modified, through the one snapshot per
week for y weeks setting in the Journal
policies on page 70. There must be 7 daily
snapshots available to create the first
weekly snapshot, and therefore, the first
7 days (7 * 24Hrs) are only multiplied by
the %DailyLoR (as opposed to the
%DailyLoR and %WeeklyLoR).

%WeeklyLoR The percent of journal space that is saved

during each weekly consolidation due to the
data that is repeated to the same location,
and therefore, write-folded on consolidation.
Note: The locality of reference depends
on each consistency group’s (or
application’s) specific I/O pattern, how
many blocks get re-written, and other
factors. If you do not know this value, you
can use a value of 0.2 (20%) for a general
estimation. For a more precise value
based on the system performance, Collect
System Information on page 203 and send
it to Customer Support.

To calculate the journal space that is left after

weekly consolidations, use a value of:
1 - %WeeklyLoR, For example: 1 - 0.20
(if performance data is not available).
Note: The %WeeklyLoR is not applied to
the first weekly snapshot, as there must
be 7 daily snapshots available to create
the first weekly snapshot. See the
WeeklyConsolidations parameter for a
detailed description.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 269

Troubleshooting

Table 52 Journal size with snapshot consolidation equation legend (continued)

Field Description

MonthlyConsolidations The required number of monthly snapshots,

less the journal space saved during daily,
weekly, and monthly consolidations ( the
%DailyLoR, the %WeeklyLoR, and the
%MonthlyLoR), in hours.
This value is computed as:
7 * 24 * 4 * (1 - %DailyLoR) * (1
- %WeeklyLoR) +
(NumberOfMonthlyConsolidations -
1 ) * 28 * 24 * (1 - %DailyLoR) *
(1 - %WeeklyLoR) * (1 -
%MonthlyLoR)
For example:
If two monthly snapshots are required, the
value of MonthlyConsolidations is:
7 * 24 * 4 * (1 - 0.20) * (1 -
0.20) + (2 - 1 ) * 28 * 24 * (1 -
0.20) * (1 - 0.20) * (1 - 0.20)
Note: This value is set, and can be
modified, through the Table 16 on page
70. In the snapshot consolidation process,
a month is represented as 28 days. There
must be 28 daily snapshots or 4 weekly
snapshots available to create the first
weekly snapshot, and therefore, the first
28 days (7 * 24Hrs * 4Days) are only
multiplied by the %DailyLoR and the
%WeeklyLoR (as opposed to the
%DailyLoR, the %WeeklyLoR, and the
%MonthlyLoR.

%MonthlyLoR The percent of journal space that is saved

during each monthly consolidation due to the
data that is repeated to the same location,
and therefore, write-folded on consolidation.
Note: The locality of reference depends
on each consistency group’s (or
application’s) specific I/O pattern, how
many blocks get re-written, and other
factors. If you do not know this value, you
can use a value of 0.2 (20%) for a general
estimation. For a more precise value
based on the system performance, Collect
System Information on page 203 and send
it to Customer Support.

To calculate the journal space that is left after

monthly consolidations, use a value of:

270 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Table 52 Journal size with snapshot consolidation equation legend (continued)

Field Description

1 - %MonthlyLoR, For example: 1 - 0.20

(if performance data is not available).
Note:
The %MonthlyLoR is not applied to the
first monthly snapshot, as the data of the
first daily snapshot is not repeated to the
same location. See the
MonthlyConsolidations parameter for a
detailed description.

%LAProcess The percentage of the journal space that is

reserved for logged access processes.
Default value=20%
Note: This value is set, and can be
changed through the
image_access_log_size parameter of
the config_copy_policy CLI
command.

%VAProcess The percentage of the journal space that is

reserved for virtual access processes.
Constant value=10%
This value is constant, and cannot be
changed.

spaceAfterImageAccessProcesses The percentage of the journal space that is

left after the space reserved for the logged
(%LAProcess) and virtual (%VAProcess)
image access processes is subtracted.
Note: This value is calculated as: 1 -
%LAProcess + %VAProcess, for
example: 1 - 0.20 + 0.10

spaceAfterConsolidationProcess The percentage of the journal space that is

left after the space that is reserved for the
snapshot consolidation process is subtracted,
where the snapshot consolidation process
uses 25% of the total journal space.
This value is constant, and is calculated as: 1
- 0.25

spaceAfterCompression The percentage of the journal space that is

left after the space that is saved by journal
compression is subtracted:
l If the data contained in the journal is not
compressible, use a value of: 1 - 0.
l If the data contained in the journal is
somewhat compressible, use a value of: 1
- 0.20.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 271

Troubleshooting

Table 52 Journal size with snapshot consolidation equation legend (continued)

Field Description

l If the data contained in the journal is

highly compressible, use a value of: 1 -
0.40.
This value is set and can be modified through
the journal compression setting in the Journal
policies on page 70.
Value depends highly on the compressibility of
the data being stored in the journal, which
varies per consistency group. The specified
values are general estimations, and if journal
compression is used, they should be replaced
with actual values. To obtain actual values,
enable the journal compression setting for a
representative period of time (Warning: both
enabling and disabling this setting causes
journal loss), and then Collect System
Information on page 203. Send the collected
system information to Customer Support to
obtain journal compression values based on
the performance data of the group being
replicated.
Note: Enabling journal compression is not
recommended, as this process requires
RPA CPU resources, and enabling it has
adverse effects on the distribution
process, and by association, the RPA
throughput. See the RecoverPoint Release
Notes for performance statistics of
consistency groups, with and without
journal compression.

a. You can use iostat (UNIX) or perfmon (Windows) to determine the value for Δ data per
second.

MetroPoint group conversion

Use the following procedure to convert a regular consistency group into a MetroPoint group, or a
MetroPoint group into a regular consistency group.
Before you begin
l To become a MetroPoint group, the production volume must be a VPLEX distributed (DR1)
volume, and it may not have more than one remote copy.
l To protect a VPLEX Metro distributed volume at both VPLEX clusters simultaneously, use
MetroPoint topology.
Procedure
1. Select Protection > Manage Protection
2. Select a group

272 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Troubleshooting

3. Click Add Copy and follow the instructions in Add a copy to a group on page 101.
4. Add a standby production copy
Results
The group becomes a MetroPoint group.
Note: Follow the instructions in Remove a copy from a group on page 107 and remove the
standby production copy to turn a MetroPoint group into a regular group.

Recovering from a cluster disaster

After a full cluster disaster or a switch disaster, it may take 10 minutes or more for all the
components of the vRPA system to restart, reconnect, and restore full operation.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 273

Troubleshooting

274 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

CHAPTER 9
Events

This section describes all of the events issued by the RecoverPoint system.

l Normal Events..................................................................................................................... 276

l Detailed events....................................................................................................................287
l Advanced events................................................................................................................. 324

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 275

Events

Normal Events
The following table contains the Normal scope events that are issued by the RecoverPoint
system.

Table 53 Normal scope events

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

1002 Mgmt Info User logged out None -

1010 Mgmt Warning License grace Grace period expires in 1 day. -

period expires in You must activate each
one day license and enter your
licenses into RecoverPoint.

1012 Mgmt Warning License grace License grace period expires -

period about to in less than <expiration
expire interval> days. You must
obtain a new RecoverPoint
license.

1013 Mgmt Error License expired None Obtain a new RecoverPoint

license.

1021 RPA Error HBA firmware error None -

2000 RPA Info Cluster None -

Cluster management
running on RPA

3002 RPA Warning Cluster None -

management
switched over to
RPA

3007 RPA Warning RPA is up None -

off

3014 RPA Warning RPA unable to None -

access volume

3022 RPA Warning LAN link to RPA None -

off restored

3023 RPA Warning LAN link to RPA None -

down

3155 Group Info Snap interfaces None -

created on storage

3156 Group Info Snap interfaces None -

deleted from
storage

3170 Mgmt Info New site keys and None -

certificates are
generated and
being synchronized
between clusters.

276 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

3171 Mgmt Info New site keys and None -

certificates are
synchronized
between clusters.

4000 Group Info Group capabilities None -

OK

4001 Group Warning Minor problem in None -

group capabilities

4003 Group Error Group capabilities None -

problem

4007 Group Info Pausing data None -

transfer for group

4008 Group Warning Pausing data 1. To determine the cause of -

transfer to copy this event, check adjacent
events for this group, both
before and after this event.
2. Verify that transfer
resumes in a timely manner.
To do so, check the transfer
state in the RecoverPoint GUI
or CLI, or check subsequent
events for this group.
3. If transfer does not resume,
collect logs for the period
when the event occurred, and
contact Customer Support

4009 Group Error Pausing data None -

transfer for group

4010 Group Info Starting data None -

transfer to copy

4015 Group Info Transferring latest Transferring latest snapshot -

snapshot before pausing transfer (no
data loss)

4016 Group Warning Transferring latest Transferring latest snapshot -

snapshot before pausing transfer (no
data loss)

4017 Group Error Transferring latest Transferring latest snapshot -

snapshot before pausing transfer (no
data loss)

4018 Group Warning Transfer of latest Transfer of latest snapshot -

snapshot complete from source complete (no
data loss)

4019 Group Warning Group under high Group in high load -- transfer -
load to be paused temporarily

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 277

Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

4020 Group Warning Group high load None -

off over

4021 Group Error Initialization paused Initialization has been paused To complete initialization, add
because the journal is full. journal volumes to the journal
or enable long initialization.

4022 Group Error off Initialization None -

resumed

4023 Group Error Transfer paused Transfer has been paused To restart transfer, first
because the journal is full. disable access to the
accessed image.

4024 Group Error off Transfer restarted None -

4025 Group Warning Group under high Group is undergoing a high -

load load so initialization will be
restarted.

4026 Group Warning Group high load is None -

off over

4027 Group Error Group under high Roll to the physical image will -
load be paused and transfer will be
paused.

4028 Group Error off Group high load is None -

over

4040 Group Error Journal error Full sweep to be performed. -

4041 Group Info Group side None -

activated

4042 Group Info Group side None -

deactivated

4043 Group Warning Group side None -

deactivated

4044 Group Error Group side None -

deactivated

4051 Group Info Resuming Disabling access to image and -

distribution resuming distribution.

4054 Group Error Enabling access to None -

image

4057 Group Error Specified image The specified image has been -
removed from removed from the journal.
journal

4062 Group Info Access enabled to None -

latest image

4063 Group Warning Access enabled to None -

latest image

278 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

4064 Group Error Access enabled to None -

latest image

4080 Group Warning Current lag None -

exceeds maximum
lag

4081 Group Warning Current lag within None -

off policy limit

4084 Group Info Markers cleared None -

4085 Group Warning Unable to clear None -

markers

4086 Group Info Synchronization None -

started

4087 Group Info Synchronization None -

completed

4091 Group Error Image access log is Access to copy volumes for -
full this group at this RPA cluster
has been disabled. If you do
not wish to retain the writes
that were added to the copy
image while image access was
enabled, disable image access;
the relevant writes are
automatically undone.
Alternatively, use the undo
writes command to undo the
same writes; image access
remains enabled.
- If, however, you wish to
retain the writes that were
added to the copy image while
image access has been
enabled, you must increase
the size of the copy journal by
adding one or more volumes
to the journal. Alternatively,
you can set the image access
mode to direct; however, in
that case, the copy journal is
erased, and a full sweep
resynchronization will be
required to restore
consistency between the
production and copy images.
- To help prevent this problem
from recurring, increase the
size of your image access log,
using one or both of the

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 279

Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

following:
- - Add volumes to the journal.
- - Modify the policy setting
for the portion of the journal
allocated to the image access
log. This is permitted only
when image access is
disabled.

4095 Group Info Writes to image The image access log is being -
access log cannot written to storage, so the
be undone writes to the image access log
cannot be undone.

4097 Group Warning Starting three- Max journal lag exceeded or Check the maximum journal
phase distribution insufficient journal lag setting value, and verify
that the current value is
indeed required. If the
maximum journal lag value has
not been defined or the
current journal lag is lower
than the maximum journal lag
value, this is probably a journal
space or performance issue.
In this case, enlarge your
journal or increase the speed
of the journal by placing it in a
faster array, on faster media,
or any other procedure that
can increase the journal write-
rate.

4098 Group Warning Maximum journal Distribution normal -- rollback -

off lag within limit information retained.

4099 Group Warning Starting long None -

initialization

4110 Group Info Enabling virtual None -

access to image

4111 Group Info Virtual access to None -

image enabled

4112 Group Info Rolling to physical None -

image

4113 Group Info Roll to physical None -

image stopped

4114 Group Info Roll to physical Logged access to physical -

image complete image enabled.

4115 Group Error Cannot enable Unable to enable access to -

access to virtual virtual image due to a partition
image table error.

280 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

4116 Group Error Virtual writes Virtual access is disabled. -

buffer full

4118 Group Error Cannot enable None -

virtual access

4119 RPA Error Initiator issued out None Contact Customer Support
of bounds I/O

4120 Group Warning Journal usage Because you are accessing a -

exceeding copy image in logged access
threshold mode for an unusually long
time, the copy journal usage is
exceeding the normal
threshold, and this may affect
the image access log capacity.

4122 Group Error off Trying to regain Trying to regain write -

write permissions permissions to non-production
copy.

4124 Group Error off Read and write to None -

volume restored

4129 Group Warning Logged access Logged access has been -

enabled for enabled on a group copy for
unusually long time an unusually long time.

4130 Group Warning Logged access no Logged access on group copy -

off longer enabled for is now disabled or it has been
unusually long time enabled to a different image.

4135 Group Info Copy entered All copy activities have been -
maintenance mode suspended.

4136 Group Info Copy exited All copy activities have -

maintenance mode resumed.

4137 Group Info Snapshot None -

consolidation has
been successful

4138 Group Warning Snapshot None -

consolidation failed

4140 Group Info Change pipe mode None -

because of sync/
async dynamic
settings

4141 Group Info Snapshot The user has changed the

consolidation policy snapshot consolidation policy
change setting(s).

4142 Group Info Snapshot None

consolidation
request registered

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 281

Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

4156 Group Warning Maximum lag Maximum lag between source

exceeded and target cluster exceeded.

4159 Group Info Volume was resized Replication set will be resized
automatically.

4160 Group Info Volumes were None

resized

4161 Group Info Short initialization Short initialization started

started because of resize

4162 Group Info Replication set You may now resize the
resize enabled replication set capacity in
RecoverPoint.

4174 RPA Info volume migration Migration of volume

Cluster started configuration data has started

4210 RPA Warning VM no longer being None

Cluster replicated

4211 RPA Warning VM partially None

Cluster replicated

4212 RPA Info VM is fully None

Cluster replicated

4213 RPA Error vCenter Server is None

Cluster not accessible

4300 RPA Warning Writing rate to the If bottleneck detection shows

Cluster production journal a delay factor >> 1 for this
is slow journal replication of the
group may be disrupted.

4301 RPA Warning RPA is unable to None Try to reduce the load on the
handle incoming RPA by lowering the
data rate due to compression level.
high compression Alternatively
level

4302 Group Warning Journal is unable to None If the event recurs, try to
handle incoming configure journal volumes for
data rate better performance.

4303 Group Warning Journal and None If the event recurs, try to
replication volumes configure journal volumes for
at copy are unable better performance.
to handle incoming
data rate

4304 Group Warning Remote storage is In distribution, there are reads If the event recurs, try to
unable to handle and writes to the journal and configure remote storage for
incoming data rate; replication volumes on the better performance.
regulating remote storage. If I/O access
distribution

282 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

to this storage is too slow,

high load states may occur.

4305 Group Warning Remote cluster is This may cause high load If the event recurs, try to
unable to handle states at the local cluster. configure remote storage for
incoming data rate better performance.

4306 RPA Warning Data transfer rate This may increase RPO, and If this event recurs, examine
Cluster between clusters is cause a high-load state. the WAN/FC link for possible
slow high latency or packet loss.
Consult your network
administrator if needed.

4307 RPA Warning Reading rate from A slow reading rate during If the event recurs, try to
Cluster local replication resynchronization (which configure local replication
volumes during involves reading a very large volumes for better
resynchronization volume of data from the local performance.
is slow replication volumes) may
increase RPO.

4308 RPA Warning Reading rate from A slow reading rate during If the event recurs, try to
Cluster replication volumes resynchronization (which configure replication volumes
at copy during involves reading a very large at the copy for better
resynchronization volume of data from performance.
is slow replication volumes at the
copy) may increase RPO.

4309 RPA Warning RPA utilization High utilization of RPA If bottleneck detection shows
reached 80% resources may be due to high that compression is using
volume of incoming data, high 80% or more of CPU
volume of incoming IOPS, or resources, reduce the
high compression level. compression setting. If
incoming data is near the limit,
consider adding an RPA or
moving groups to other
RPAs .

4310 Group Warning Link utilization High utilization of the link may If bottleneck detection shows
reached 80% be due to a high volume of that compression for this link
incoming data, high volume of is using 80% or more of CPU
incoming IOPS, or high resources, reduce the
compression level. compression setting. If
incoming data is near the limit,
consider splitting the existing
group onto two or more
RPAs .

4312 Group Error Switching to virtual After resizing, virtual image

access access with roll is not allowed
to a point-in-time before the
volume resize. Virtual image
access was performed
instead.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 283

Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

4400 RPA Warning Writing rate to the None

Cluster off production journal
is no longer slow

4401 RPA Warning RPA handles the None

off incoming data rate
successfully

4402 Group Warning Journal handles None

off incoming data rate
successfully

4403 Group Warning Journal and None

off replication volumes
at copy handle
incoming data rate
successfully

4404 Group Warning Remote storage is None

off able to handle
incoming data rate
and no longer
regulates
distribution

4405 Group Warning Remote cluster None

off handles incoming
data rate
successfully

4406 RPA Warning Data transfer rate None

Cluster off between clusters is
no longer slow

4407 RPA Warning Reading rate from None

Cluster off local replication
volumes during
resynchronization
is normal

4408 RPA Warning Reading rate from None

Cluster off replication volumes
at copy during
resynchronization
is normal

4409 RPA Warning RPA utilization is None

off back to normal

4410 Group Warning Link utilization is None

off back to normal

4412 Group Error off Able to roll to None

physical image
again

5013 Splitter Error Splitter is down None

284 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

5014 Splitter Info Writes to None

replication volumes
disabled, reads are
allowed

5015 Splitter Error off Splitter is up None

5016 Splitter Warning Splitter has None

restarted

5017 Splitter Error off Splitter version is None

supported

5018 Splitter Error Splitter version is None

not supported

5019 Splitter Warning Writes to None

replication volumes
disabled, reads are
allowed

5020 Splitter Error Writes to None

replication volumes
disabled, reads are
allowed

5029 Splitter Error LUN mismatch Volume sweep will follow. From the relevant hosts,
detected rescan the SAN.

5030 Splitter Error Possible splitter None

write failure

5031 Splitter Warning Splitter not Volume sweep(s) required.

splitting to
replication volumes

5032 Splitter Info Splitter splitting to None

replication volumes

5035 Splitter Info Writes to None

replication volumes
disabled

5036 Splitter Warning Writes to None

replication volumes
disabled

5037 Splitter Error Writes to None

replication volumes
disabled

5038 Splitter Info Splitter delaying None

writes

5039 Splitter Warning Splitter delaying None

writes

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 285

Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

5040 Splitter Error Splitter delaying None

writes

5041 Splitter Info Splitter not None

splitting to
replication volumes

5042 Splitter Warning Splitter not None

splitting to
replication volumes

5043 Splitter Error Splitter not None

splitting to
replication volumes

5045 Group Warning Splitter and RPA Simultaneous problems

problem detected reported in splitter and RPA.
Full-sweep resynchronization
will be required upon
restarting data transfer.

5046 Splitter Warning Splitter write re- RPA did not acknowledge an Following this event, it is
issued to RPA I/O in a timely manner. As a recommended to:
result, the splitter has re- - Monitor subsequent events,
issued the write. to determine if the problem
recurs.
- If the problem persists, or
increases in frequency,
contact Customer Support .

5052 Splitter Error Splitter does not Group was successfully Replace your current splitter
support configured to replicate with one that supports
synchronous synchronously but since then synchronous replication. If
replication the splitter has been replaced. problem persists contact
The new splitter does not Customer Support.
support synchronous
replication and
consequentially replication
mode has been changed to
asynchronous.

5053 Group Error off Splitter now Group is configured to

supports replicate synchronously and
synchronous the splitter now supports
replication synchronous replication.

5059 Splitter Info Array roll started An array roll has been No user action is required.
triggered. RecoverPoint
transfer will be paused until
roll is completed.

5060 Splitter Info VPLEX inter- VPLEX inter-cluster link No user action is required.
cluster link recovery started,
recovery started RecoverPoint transfer will be

286 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 53 Normal scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

paused until recovery is

completed.

5061 Splitter Info VNX roll started Failover started at another RP No user action is required.
system attached to VPLEX,
no snapshots can be created
by RecoverPoint.

7111 RPA Error Volumes switched System has detected that

Cluster on storage volumes were switched in the
storage configuration without
following proper procedures.

7112 Splitter Error Volumes switched System has detected that

on storage volumes were switched in the
storage configuration without
following proper procedures.

9999 RPA Info Test event None

18036 RPA Error Negotiation of Negotiation of transfer If problem persists, check

transfer protocol protocol failed due to network your TCP network.
failed again issues in TCP layer between
clusters. Problem was
temporarily corrected, but has
since returned.

Detailed events
The following table contains the Detailed scope events that are issued by the RecoverPoint
system.

Table 54 Detailed scope events

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

1000 Mgmt Info User logged in None

1001 Mgmt Warning User login failed None

1003 Mgmt Warning Failed to generate None

SNMP trap

1004 Mgmt Warning Failed to send email Failed to send email alert to the Check whether there is an issue
alert specified address. with your selected method of
transfer. If a problem exists, fix it
and then, perform a connectivity
test by running the
test_syr_connectivity CLI
command. If problem persists
contact Customer Support.

1005 Mgmt Warning Failed to update local None

file

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 287

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

1006 Mgmt Info Settings changed None

1007 Mgmt Info Settings change failed None

1008 Mgmt Info User action succeeded None

1009 Mgmt Info User action failed None

1011 Mgmt Error License grace period You must obtain a new
expired RecoverPoint license and then
activate each license and enter
your licenses into RecoverPoint.

1014 Mgmt Info User bookmarked an None

image

1017 Mgmt Warning RPA to host None

multipathing problem

1018 Mgmt Warning RPA multipathing None

off problem fixed

1019 Mgmt Warning User action performed None

successfully

1020 Mgmt Warning Failed to send system None Check whether there is an issue
report with your selected method of
transfer. If a problem exists, fix it
and then, perform a connectivity
test by running the
test_syr_connectivity CLI
command. If problem persists
contact Customer Support.

1031 Mgmt Warning System limit exceeded None

low watermark

1032 Mgmt Info System limit passed None

below low watermark

1033 Mgmt Warning System limit exceeded None

high watermark

1034 Mgmt Info System limit passed None

below high watermark

1035 Mgmt Error System limit exceeded None

1036 Mgmt Info System limit passed None

below limit

3000 RPA Warning RPA successfully None

off communicating with
cluster

3001 RPA Warning RPA problem RPA is currently experiencing a

communicating with problem communicating with its
cluster cluster.

288 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

3005 RPA Error Settings conflict A settings conflict has been

Cluster between clusters discovered between two RPA
clusters.

3006 RPA Error off Settings conflict The settings conflict between
Cluster between clusters RPA clusters has been resolved by
resolved a user action.

3008 RPA Warning RPA appears to be None

down

3030 RPA Warning RPA switched path to None

storage

3036 RPA Error RPA clock out of sync None Contact Customer Support.

3037 RPA Error off RPA clock is back in None

sync

3038 RPA Info Director automatically None

Cluster added

3040 RPA Info RPA cluster added None

Cluster

3041 RPA Info RPA cluster removed None

Cluster

3157 Group Error Snap based replication Array resources usage exceeded Clear array resources
stopped maximum threshold

3158 Group Error off Snap based replication Array resources usage is back to
resumed normal

3159 RPA Error System was unable to None Remove the snap interface(s)
Cluster remove snap manually
interface(s) from the
array

3160 Group Error System was unable to None Remove the array consistency
remove a consistency group manually
group from the array

3161 Group Error System was unable to None Remove array consistency snap
remove consistency manually
snap from array

3162 Group Error System was unable to None Remove the array consistency
promote consistency group manually
snap on array

3163 Group Error Array operation took too None Array may be loaded. Increase
long snap based replication interval.

4056 Group Error No image in journal None

matches query

4078 Group Info Replication set resized None

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 289

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

4082 Group Warning Next synchronization The copy marked all of its
will be a full sweep replication volumes as dirty.

4083 Group Warning Next synchronization The copy marked some of its
will be a volume sweep replication volumes as dirty. Next
synchronization will be a volume
sweep on these volumes.

4090 Group Warning Image access log 80% Image access is enabled to a non- If you do not wish to retain the
full production copy. writes that were added to the
- The capacity of the copy copy image while image access
journal’s image access log has was enabled, disable image
nearly been reached; only limited access; the relevant writes are
further information can be written automatically undone.
to it. If the log becomes Alternatively, use the undo writes
completely full, the system will command to undo the same
block access by host applications writes; image access remains
to the replication volumes that enabled.
belong to that group (and the - If, however, you wish to retain
application will receive I/O errors). the writes that were added to the
- When the system is in this state, copy image while image access
it is recommended that immediate has been enabled, you can do one
action be taken to prevent the log of the following:
from becoming 100% full. - - Increase the size of the copy
journal by adding one or more
volumes to the journal.
- - Fail over to the copy.
- Note: The copy journal is erased.
- - Set the image access mode to
direct.
- Note: The copy journal is erased,
and a full sweep resynchronization
will be required to restore
consistency between the
production and copy images.
- To help prevent this problem
from recurring, increase the size
of your image access log, using
one or both of the following:
- - Add volumes to the journal.
- - Modify the policy setting for
the portion of the journal allocated
to the image access log. This is
permitted only when image access
is disabled.

4106 Group Warning Starting full sweep Cannot write additional replication
data for this group to volume
because its capacity has been
reached. Starting full sweep.

290 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

4117 Group Warning Virtual writes buffer is When virtual writes buffer
90% full becomes full virtual access is
disabled.

4121 Group Error Error writing to volume Ensure that RecoverPoint has If you extended a storage pool or
write permission to all volumes. attached a device to a storage
System will retry automatically. If pool, run the CLI command
the problem recurs repeatedly, rescan_san’ If problem persists,
possible causes may be: volume contact Customer Support.
contains bad sector; volume is thin
device not attached to any
storage pool; volume is attached
to storage pool that is full.

4123 Group Error Read and write to Read from and write to volume
volume failed failed. System retried and failed
again. System will retry
automatically. If the problem
recurs repeatedly, contact
Customer Support.

4125 Group Error Journal capacity Journal capacity is currently

insufficient insufficient for the required
protection window.

4126 Group Error off Journal capacity Journal capacity is currently

sufficient sufficient for the required
protection window.

4127 Group Warning Predicted journal Journal capacity is predicted to be

capacity insufficient insufficient for the required
protection window.

4128 Group Warning Predicted journal None

off capacity sufficient

4131 Group Warning Transfer paused or None

synchronizing for
unusually long time

4132 Group Warning Transfer resumed Transfer has resumed (following

off long pause or synchronization)

4133 Group Error Starting copy regulation The system has detected an
unstable state in this copy and
therefore the copy is being
regulated for a period of <x>
minutes in order to allow for the
environment to stabilize. See
Details for cause of regulation.
Event logs can also be a good
source for the detection of system
issues. Look for repetitive errors,
that may indicate a specific
problem in the system. Also,

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 291

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

please check SAN/IP events

outside of RecoverPoint, as
instabilities may not originate from
RecoverPoint. If regulation
persists, collect all system
information, and contact
Customer Support

4134 Group Error off Copy regulation has Copy regulation has ended due to
ended a user action or internal timeout.

4139 Splitter Warning Storage unreachable The configured login credentials Ensure that there is connectivity
are incorrect or the storage is between the RPA cluster and the
unreachable. storage, and that the entered
credentials are correct, and try
again.

4158 Group Warning Journal capacity Journal capacity is currently

extended extended for the required
protection window

4163 Group Error Snap-based replication The storage cannot perform the See the More Information area for
has been disabled operations necessary for snap- a description of the exact
based replication. Snap-based problem. After fixing the problem,
replication has been paused for a run the
period of % clear_all_storage_errors
%t_SC_ArrayOperationsFreezeInt CLI command to restart snap-
erval%% minutes in order to allow based replication. If problem
you to fix any issues with the persists, collect system
storage. information, and contact
Customer Support.

4164 Group Error off Snap-based replication Snap-based replication error has
has been restored ended due to user action or
internal system timeout.

4175 RPA Info System has entered The RecoverPoint system is No action required.
maintenance mode adding an RPA to the cluster.

4176 RPA Info System has entered The RecoverPoint system is No action required.
Cluster maintenance mode performing a major version
upgrade.

4177 RPA Info System has entered The RecoverPoint system is No action required.
Cluster maintenance mode performing a minor version
upgrade.

4178 RPA Info System has entered The RecoverPoint system is No action required.
maintenance mode performing an RPA replacement.

4179 RPA Info System has exited The RecoverPoint system is no No action required.
maintenance mode longer adding an RPA to the
cluster.

292 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

4180 RPA Info System has exited The RecoverPoint system is no No action required.
Cluster maintenance mode longer performing a major version
upgrade.

4181 RPA Info System has exited The RecoverPoint system is no No action required.
Cluster maintenance mode longer performing a minor version
upgrade.

4182 RPA Info System has exited The RecoverPoint system is no No action required.
maintenance mode longer performing an RPA
replacement.

4183 RPA Info System has entered The RecoverPoint system is No action required.
maintenance mode performing an RPA conversion
from class to RPSE.

4184 RPA Info System has entered The RecoverPoint system is no No action required.
maintenance mode longer performing an RPA
conversion from class to RPSE.

4185 RPA Info System has entered System has entered user-initiated No action required.
Cluster maintenance mode maintenance mode

4186 RPA Info System has exited System has exited user-initiated No action required.
Cluster maintenance mode maintenance mode

4230 RPA Info All initiators registered All RPAs initiators were
Cluster with storage successfully registered with the
storage system.

4231 RPA Info RPA initiators RPA initiators were successfully

registered with storage registered with the storage
system.

4232 RPA Info Storage group created Storage group was successfully
Cluster on storage created on the storage system

4233 RPA Info All storage groups All storage groups were
Cluster created on storage successfully created on the
storage system

4311 Group Info Load balancing None

recommendation

4501 Mgmt Warning License invalid in You have installed a To benefit from RecoverPoint/SE
RecoverPoint RecoverPoint/SE license although simplifications and the Unisphere
the system was installed with the RecoverPoint/SE plug-in, you
Deployment Manager must perform one of the following
RecoverPoint Installer Wizard. actions:
- - If using a release earlier than
3.4 SP1: 1) upgrade the system to
release 3.4 SP1 or later using the
Deployment Manager Upgrade
RPAs Wizard, 2) convert the
environment to RecoverPoint/SE
using the Deployment Manager
Converter Wizard.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 293

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

- - If using release 3.4 SP1 or later,

convert the environment to
RecoverPoint/SE using the
Deployment Manager Converter
Wizard.

4502 Mgmt Warning License invalid in You have installed a RecoverPoint To benefit from full RecoverPoint
RecoverPoint/SE license although the system was functionality, such as bandwidth
installed with the Deployment reduction and support for
Manager RecoverPoint/SE additional capacity, you must
Installer Wizard. perform the following actions:
- - If using a release earlier than
3.4 SP1: 1) upgrade the system to
release 3.4 SP1 or later using the
Deployment Manager Upgrade
RPAs Wizard, 2) convert the
environment to RecoverPoint
using the Deployment Manager
Converter Wizard.
- - If using release 3.4 SP1 or later:
1) convert the environment to
RecoverPoint using the
Deployment Manager Converter
Wizard, 2) upgrade the existing
RecoverPoint/SE license to a
RecoverPoint license.

5008 Splitter Warning Host shut down None

5010 Splitter Warning Splitter stopped Depending on the policy, writing

by host may be disabled for some
groups, and a full sweep may be
required for other groups.

5011 Splitter Info Splitter stopped Full sweep will be required.

5012 Splitter Warning Splitter stopped Writes to replication volumes

disabled

5050 Splitter Warning Failed to collect system None Verify that all arrays and vCenter
info Severs have been registered with
the correct credentials.

5051 Splitter Warning Unregistered array or No login credentials have been

vCenter Server found defined for this array or vCenter
Server. Define login credentials to
extend the period in which system
info is saved, from three days to
thirty days. It is recommended
that you do so as soon as possible.

5054 Group Warning Consistency group is None

configured with a LUN
greater than 2 TB and a
VNX/CLARiiON splitter

294 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

version that does not

support the LUN.

5055 Group Warning Consistency group was None

off configured with a LUN
greater than 2 TB and a
VNX/CLARiiON splitter
version that did not
support the LUN. Now
the splitter version
supports the LUN.

5056 Splitter Warning SCSI errors detected in None No action required.

SANTap based
replication short
synchronization might
occur.

5057 Group Warning Volume configuration Consistency group contains a Reconfigure the replication set so
not supported by VNX/ replication set with volumes that that all of its volumes are of the
CLARiiON splitter are not equal in size, and this is same size. Note: Modifying the
version not supported by the VNX/ volumes in a replication set causes
CLARiiON splitter version a volume sweep on all of the
currently installed on the system. volumes in the replication set.

5058 Group Warning Volume configuration Replication set volume

off supported by VNX/ configuration is now supported by
CLARiiON splitter the VNX/CLARiiON splitter
version version installed on the system.

6000 Group Error Image cannot be An unrecognised error has Try accessing a different image. If
accessed occurred. The specified image of you cannot access any other
your distributed group cannot be images, contact Customer
accessed. Service.

6001 Group Error off Stopped trying to The system has stopped trying to No user action is required.
access inaccessible access an inaccessible image of a
image distributed group.

8000 Mgmt Error Calling home None A service request is being opened
for you with Customer Service.

8001 Mgmt Error Call home event failure None Contact Customer Support.

8002 RPA Info VM created None

Cluster

8003 RPA Info VM network None

Cluster reconfigured

8004 RPA Info Private network created None

Cluster on ESX

8005 RPA Info Private network on ESX None

Cluster erased

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 295

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

8101 RPA Info Array provider None

Cluster registered

8102 RPA Info Array provider None

Cluster unregistered

8103 RPA Info Storage was registered None

Cluster

8104 RPA Info Storage was None

Cluster unregistered

8105 RPA Warning Lost connectivity to None Ensure that there is connectivity
Cluster storage with the storage and that the
entered credentials are correct,
and try again. If problem persists,
contact Customer Support.

8106 RPA Info Restored connectivity None

Cluster to storage

8107 RPA Info Resource pool was None

Cluster registered

8108 RPA Info Resource pool was None

Cluster unregistered

8200 Group Info Consistency group was None

created on an array

8201 Group Info Snap-based replication None

is done

8202 Group Info Bookmark has been None

applied

8203 Group Error Failed to create snap on None

storage

8204 Group Error Failed to replicate snap None

on time

8205 Group Error Failed to attach None

snapshot to snap
interface

9998 RPA Info Cannot identify event None

10203 RPA Error off RPA cluster was down None

10206 RPA Brief Internal process None

error restarted

10207 RPA Brief Internal process None

error restarted

10210 RPA Error High load occurring High load situation is ongoing. Run detect_bottlenecks for
during group the consistency group in which
initialization the high load condition has been

296 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

detected.Consider enabling fast

first-time initialization (for details,
see RecoverPoint Administrator’s
Guide).

10211 RPA Error SAN communication None Temporary issue on the SAN
problem between caused communication problems
splitters and RPAs between splitters and RPAs at the
existed but has resolved specified cluster. The problem
itself resolved itself.

10212 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Temporary problem in Fibre
Channel link between splitters and
RPAs has been resolved.

10213 RPA Error off High load occurring High load situation is ongoing. Run detect_bottlenecks for
during group the consistency group in which
initialization the high load condition has been
detected. Consider enabling fast
first-time initialization (for details,
see RecoverPoint Administrator’s
Guide).

10216 RPA Brief Internal process None

error restarted

10501 RPA Info Initialization ended None

10502 RPA Info Access to image Access to an image at the copy

enabled has been enabled.

10503 RPA Error Transferring latest Transferring latest snapshot

snapshot before pausing transfer (no data
loss)

10504 RPA Info Access to image Access to an image at the copy

disabled has been disabled.

10505 RPA Info Image access log writes None

have been undone

10506 RPA Info Roll to physical image Logged access to physical image
complete now enabled.

10507 RPA Info Journal available again Due to system changes the journal
was temporarily out of service, but
it is now available again.

10508 RPA Info Data flushed from All data has been flushed from the
source RPA source RPA. Failover will proceed.

10509 RPA Info Initial long initialization None

complete

10510 RPA Info Following a pause None

transfer system now

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 297

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

cleared to restart
transfer

10511 RPA Info Finished recovering None

replication backlog

10512 RPA Info Following a pause None

transfer system now
cleared to restart
transfer

12000 RPA Error Stable root cause None

12001 RPA Error Splitter is down None

12002 RPA Error Error in links to all other None - Check if other cluster is down.
clusters - - In case of IP connectivity:
- o Check RecoverPoint gateways
and IPs configuration.
- o Check if there are any ISP-
related issues.
- o Check RecoverPoint firewall
configuration.
- - In case of FC connectivity,
check RecoverPoint zoning.
- - If you recently changed the
network configuration, please
verify that RecoverPoint
configuration matches the new
network configuration.
- - If none of the above
instructions resolve this issue,
collect system information from all
clusters experiencing connectivity
issues, and contact Customer
Service.
-

12003 RPA Error Error in link to an RPA None

at other cluster(s)

12004 RPA Error Error in data link to Error in data link. All RPAs at 1. Check if replication process at
other cluster(s) cluster are unable to transfer other cluster is down.
replicated data to other cluster(s) - 2. In case of IP connectivity:
due to communication failure over - a. check RP gateways/IPs
the WAN link. Data transfer configuration.
between RPA clusters has - b. Check firewall configuration.
stopped. - 3. If you recently changed
network configuration, please
verify that RP configuration
matches the new network
configuration.
-

298 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

12005 RPA Error Error in data link over None 1. Check if replication process at
WAN. RPA is unable to other cluster is down.
transfer replicated data - 2. In case of IP connectivity:
to other cluster - a. check RP gateways/IPs
configuration.
- b. Check firewall configuration.
- 3. If you recently changed
network configuration, please
verify that RP configuration
matches the new network
configuration.
-

12006 RPA Error RPA is disconnected None

from the RPA cluster

12007 RPA Error All RPAs are None

disconnected from the
RPA cluster

12008 RPA Error RPA is down None

12009 RPA Error Link entered high load Due to heavy I/O activity a link If high load persists, consider
entered a high load state in order running the balance_load
to prevent I/O failures on that link. command and applying the load
The following are among the balancing recommendation, or
possible causes of the high load:- manually modifying the preferred
RPA is unable to handle the large RPA of each group according to
volume of incoming data. (RPA the recommendation. Check for
performance statistics are scheduled activities in your
presented in the Release Notes environment. When schedule
that accompany each permits, run
RecoverPoint product release.) - detect_bottlenecks for the
Journal reaches capacity, because consistency group in which the
the rate of the distribution high load condition was detected.
process consistently lags behind If relevant, consider enabling fast
the rate of incoming data to the first-time initialization. (For
copy journal. details, see the RecoverPoint
- - WAN is too slow to handle the Administrator’s Guide).
data rate. - Compression for WAN
optimization is too high, such that
the RPA is unable to handle the
volume of incoming data. Peak I/O
activity in the SAN causes a
temporary bottleneck in the
environment. This can be
considered normal behavior, and
does not necessarily require user
action.

12010 RPA Error Journal error -- full None

sweep to be performed
after error is corrected

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 299

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

12011 RPA Error Image access log or Access to copy volumes for this If you do not wish to retain the
virtual buffer is full group at this RPA cluster has been writes that were added to the
disabled. copy image while image access
was enabled, disable image
access; the relevant writes are
automatically undone.
Alternatively, use the undo writes
command to undo the same
writes; image access remains
enabled.
- If, however, you wish to retain
the writes that were added to the
copy image while image access
has been enabled, you must
increase the size of the copy
journal by adding one or more
volumes to the journal.
Alternatively, you can set the
image access mode to direct;
however, in that case, the copy
journal is erased, and a full sweep
resynchronization will be required
to restore consistency between
the production and copy images.
- To help prevent this problem
from recurring, increase the size
of your image access log, using
one or both of the following:
- - Add volumes to the journal.
- - Modify the policy setting for
the portion of the journal allocated
to the image access log. This is
permitted only when image access
is disabled.

12012 RPA Error Cannot enable virtual None

access

12013 RPA Error Cannot enable image Cannot enable image access to
access the specified image.

12014 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between all
RPAs and all splitters and storage
is down.

12016 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between all
RPAs and all storage is down.

12022 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between RPA
and splitters or storage volumes
(or both) is down.

300 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

12023 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between RPA
and all splitters and storage is
down.

12024 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between RPA
and all splitters is down.

12025 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between RPA
and all storage is down.

12026 RPA Error Error occurred in link to None

an RPA at other
cluster(s)

12027 RPA Error RPAs are unable to RPAs cannot complete I/O Suggestions: Check your SAN and
access any volume at operations at this cluster to any storage configurations for any
this cluster that belongs volume -- replication or journal -- irregularities; for example,
to this consistency in the consistency group. incorrect LUN masking or zoning.
group Ensure that the Reservations
Support policy parameter setting
(enabled/not enabled) is
appropriate for your environment,
as described in the RecoverPoint
Administrator’s Guide.

12029 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between all
RPAs and one or more replication
volumes is down.

12030 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between all
RPAs and one or more journal
volumes is down.

12031 RPA Error Error occurred in link None Ensure that at RPA(s) cluster are
between one or more connected properly to the other
RPAs at cluster and all cluster(s).
RPAs at other cluster(s)

12032 RPA Error Error occurred in link None Ensure that all RPAs at cluster are
Cluster between all RPAs at connected properly to the other
cluster and all RPAs at cluster(s)
other cluster(s)

12033 RPA Error volume is not None

accessible; repository
data may be lost

12034 RPA Error Writes to storage may None

have occurred without
corresponding writes to
RPA

12035 RPA Error Cluster control at other Error occurred in link to cluster
cluster(s) unavailable leader RPA at other cluster(s).

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 301

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

12036 RPA Error Negotiation of transfer Negotiation of transfer protocol If problem persists, check your
protocol failed failed due to network issues in TCP network.
TCP layer between clusters

12037 RPA Error All replication volumes None

in the consistency group
(or groups) are not
accessible

12038 RPA Error All journal volumes in None

the consistency group
(or groups) are not
accessible

12039 RPA Warning Long initialization None

started

12040 RPA Error System detected bad None

sectors in volume

12041 RPA Error Error writing to volume Ensure that RecoverPoint has If you extended a storage pool or
write permission to all volumes. attached a device to a storage
Possible causes: volume is read- pool, run the rescan_san CLI
only; volume contains bad sector; command. If problem cannot be
volume is thin device not attached solved, contact Customer
to any storage pool; volume is Support.
attached to storage pool that is
full.

12043 RPA Error Splitter writes may have None

failed

12044 RPA Error Problem with IP link None

between RPAs (in at
least in one direction)

12045 RPA Error Problem with all IP links None

between RPAs

12046 RPA Error Problem with IP link None

between RPAs

12047 RPA Error RPA network interface None

card (NIC) problem

12048 RPA Error Unsupported splitter None

version

12049 RPA Info RPA has entered None

maintenance mode

12050 RPA Error RecoverPoint has None

dynamically started
replicating
asynchronously to one
of the replicas of this
group. The group will

302 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

now be initialized.
During initialization data
is not transferred
synchronously

12057 RPA Info Replication volume This is OK for disabled groups.

Cluster reservation conflict

12058 RPA Error RPA to splitter None

communication error

12059 RPA Error RPA communication RPA has encountered a

problem with volumes communication problem with all
volumes

12060 RPA Error RPA communication None

problem with journal
volumes

12061 RPA Error RPA communication None

problem with replication
volumes

12062 RPA Error RPA communication None

problem with replication
volume

12063 RPA Error RPA communication None

problem with journal
volume

12072 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down FC link between RPAs down.

12073 RPA Error RPA communication None

problems with
repository volume

12074 RPA Error FC link between RPAs None

and repository volume
down

12075 RPA Error Splitter errors while None

Cluster controlling volume

12076 RPA Error Splitter errors while None

Cluster controlling group

12077 RPA Error Splitter errors while None

Cluster controlling storage

12078 RPA Error Splitter communication Although the RPA sees the To ensure data integrity, it is
error splitter, the cluster control has highly recommended that any
been unable to communicate with snapshots created in the past five
it for the past five minutes, and minutes are not selected for
therefore, cannot detect whether failover.
or not any writes have passed
through it.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 303

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

- To ensure consistency between

the copy and production, transfer
will be paused. When the system
re-starts transfer, an initialization
or full sweep will follow.

12080 RPA Error Communications The cause of this problem may be:
problem in internal Failure of a RecoverPoint process
process - Disconnection between internal
RecoverPoint processes, To
determine the cause of this
problem, collect logs for the
period when the event occurred,
and contact Customer Support.

12081 RPA Error Communications The cause of this problem may be:
problem in internal Failure of a RecoverPoint process
process - Disconnection between internal
RecoverPoint processes, To
determine the cause of this
problem, collect logs for the
period when the event occurred,
and contact Customer Support.

12082 RPA Error off Communications The cause of this problem may be:
problem in internal Failure of a RecoverPoint process
process - Disconnection between internal
RecoverPoint processes, To
determine the cause of this
problem, collect logs for the
period when the event occurred,
and contact Customer Support.

12083 RPA Error Communications with Communications with Symmetrix Check for communication failure,
Symmetrix director director has failed repeatedly. port failure, faulty zoning, or
failed configuration errors.

12085 Mgmt Info User logged in None

12087 RPA Warning RPA fan failure None Contact Customer Support.
detected

12088 Array Error RPA has lost connection None None

to specific array

12089 Array Error The RPA cluster has None None

lost connection to all
volumes and splitters on
the array

12090 Site Error The RPA cluster has None None

lost connection to
specific host

12091 Site Error ESX is down None None

304 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

12092 Group Error RPA has lost connection None None

to the VM

12093 Group Error RPA cluster has lost None None

connection to the VM

12094 Group Error VM is powered down None None

12095 Site Error RPA has lost connection None None

to data store

12096 Site Error RPA cluster has lost None None

connection to data
store

12097 Site Error RPA cluster has lost None None

connection to all data
stores

12098 Site Error RPA has lost connection None None

to all data stores

14001 RPA Error off Splitter is up and None

version is supported

14002 RPA Error off All links to all other None

clusters have been
restored

14003 RPA Error off Link to an RPA at other None

cluster(s) has been
restored

14004 RPA Error off Data link has been None

restored. All RPAs at
cluster are able to
transfer replicated data
to other cluster(s).

14005 RPA Error off Data link over WAN has None
been restored. RPA is
able to transfer
replicated data to other
cluster

14006 RPA Error off Connection of RPA to None

the RPA cluster is
restored

14007 RPA Error off Connection of all RPAs None

to the RPA cluster is
restored

14008 RPA Error off RPA is up None

14009 RPA Error off Link was in high load, Due to heavy I/O activity, the link If high load persists, consider
but has now retuned to entered a high load state in order running the balance_load
normal operation to prevent I/O failures on that link. command and applying the load

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 305

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

The link has since exited the high balancing recommendation, or

load state, and has returned to manually modifying the preferred
normal operation. The following RPA of each group according to
are among the possible causes of the recommendation. Check for
the high load: scheduled activities in your
- 1. RPA is unable to handle the environment. When schedule
large volume of incoming data. permits, run
(RPA performance statistics are detect_bottlenecks for the
presented in the Release Notes consistency group in which the
that accompany each high load condition was detected.
RecoverPoint product release.) If relevant, consider enabling fast
- 2. Journal reaches capacity, first-time initialization (for details,
because the rate of the see RecoverPoint Administrator’s
distribution process consistently Guide).
lags behind the rate of incoming
data to the copy journal.
- 3. WAN is too slow to handle the
data rate. -Compression for WAN
optimization is too high, such that
the RPA is unable to handle the
volume of incoming data.
- 4. Peak I/O activity in the SAN
causes a temporary bottleneck in
the environment. This can be
considered normal behavior, and
does not necessarily require user
action.

14010 RPA Error off Journal error corrected None

-- full sweep required

14011 RPA Error off Image access log or None

virtual buffer no longer
full

14012 RPA Error off Virtual access to image None

enabled

14013 RPA Error off No longer trying to None

access a diluted image

14014 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
RPAs and all splitters and storage
is restored.

14016 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
RPAs and all storage is restored.

14022 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link that was down
between RPA and splitters is
restored.

14023 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between RPA
and all splitters and storage is
restored.

306 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

14024 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between RPA
and all splitters is restored

14025 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between RPA
and all storage is restored

14026 RPA Error off The link to an RPA at None

other cluster(s) has
been restored

14027 RPA Error off Access to all volumes in None

the consistency group
(or groups) is restored

14029 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
RPAs and one or more user
volumes is restored.

14030 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
RPAs and one or more journal
volumes is restored.

14031 RPA Error off Link between one or None

more RPAs at cluster
and all RPAs at the
other cluster(s) has
been restored

14032 RPA Error off Link between all RPAs None

Cluster at cluster and all RPAs
at the other cluster(s)
has been restored

14033 RPA Error off Access to volume Restored repository data integrity.
restored

14034 RPA Error off Replication consistency Replication consistency in writes

to storage restored to storage has been restored.

14035 RPA Error off Cluster control at other The link to cluster leader RPA at
cluster(s) available other cluster(s) has been
restored.

14036 RPA Error off Negotiation of transfer Negotiation of transfer protocol,

protocol successful which failed to due to network
again issues in TCP layer between
clusters, has been restored.

14037 RPA Error off Access to all replication None

volumes in the
consistency group (or
groups) has been
restored

14038 RPA Error off Access to all journal None

volumes in the

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 307

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

consistency group (or

groups) is restored

14039 RPA Warning Long initialization None

off completed

14040 RPA Error off Bad sectors in volume None

have been corrected

14041 RPA Error off Write access to volume None

restored

14042 RPA Error off Synchronization in None

progress to restore any
failed writes in group

14043 RPA Error off Synchronization in None

progress to restore any
failed writes

14044 RPA Error off Problem with IP link None

between RPAs (in at
least in one direction)
corrected

14045 RPA Error off All IP links between None

RPAs restored

14046 RPA Error off IP link between RPAs None

restored

14047 RPA Error off RPA network interface None

card (NIC) problem
corrected

14049 RPA Info RPA is out of None

maintenance mode

14050 RPA Error off RecoverPoint has None

dynamically resumed
synchronous replication
to one of the replicas of
this group. The group
will now be initialized.
During initialization data
is not transferred
synchronously

14057 RPA Info Group volumes None

Cluster reservation conflicts
were fixed

14058 RPA Error off End of splitter to RPA None

connectivity error

308 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

14059 RPA Error off End of connectivity None

problems between all
group volumes and RPA

14060 RPA Error off End of connectivity None

problems between
group journal volumes
and RPA

14061 RPA Error off End of connectivity None

problems between
group replication
volumes and RPA

14062 RPA Error off End of connectivity None

problems between
group replication
volume and RPA

14063 RPA Error off Connectivity problems None

with group journal
volume and RPA were
fixed

14072 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is up FC link between RPAs restored
again

14073 RPA Error off Connectivity between None

repository volume and
RPA restored

14074 RPA Error off FC link between all None

RPAs and repository
volume restored

14075 RPA Error off Control issues between None

Cluster volume and splitter
corrected

14076 RPA Error off Control issues between None

Cluster group and splitter
corrected

14077 RPA Error off Control issues between None

Cluster storage and splitter
corrected

14078 RPA Error off End of splitter The cluster control is able to No user action is required.
communication error communicate with the splitter
again. To ensure consistency
between the copy and production,
initialization or full sweep will
follow.

14080 RPA Error off Fix of communications None

problem in internal
process

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 309

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

14081 RPA Error off Internal process None

communication problem
has been fixed

14082 RPA Error off Fix of communications None

problem in internal
process

14083 RPA Error off Communication with After a failure, communications

Symmetrix director with a Symmetrix director has
restored been restored successfully.

14086 RPA Warning RPA disk drive failure None

off resolved

14087 RPA Warning RPA fan failure resolved None

off

14088 Array Error off RPA has restored None None

connection to specific
array

14089 Array Error off The RPA cluster has None None
restored connection to
all volumes and splitters
on the array

14090 Site Error off The RPA cluster has None None
restored connection to
specific host

14091 Site Error off ESX is up None None

14092 Group Error off RPA has restored None None

connection to the VM

14093 Group Error off RPA cluster has None None

restored connection to
the VM

14094 Group Error off VM is powered up None None

14095 Site Error off RPA has restored None None

connection to data
store

14096 Site Error off RPA cluster has None None

restored connection to
data store

14097 Site Error off RPA cluster has None None

restored connection to
all data stores

14098 Site Error off RPA has lost connection None None
to all data stores

310 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

16000 RPA Brief Transient root cause None

error

16001 RPA Brief Brief splitter error Splitter was down. Problem has
error corrected. Problem has been corrected.
been corrected.

16002 RPA Brief Brief error in links to all Error occurred in all links to all
error other clusters corrected other clusters. Problem has been
corrected.

16003 RPA Brief Brief error in link to an Error occurred in link to an RPA at
error RPA at other cluster(s) other cluster(s). Problem has
corrected been corrected.

16004 RPA Brief Brief error in data link to Error in data link. All RPAs at
error other cluster(s) cluster are unable to transfer
corrected replicated data to other cluster(s).
Problem has been corrected.

16005 RPA Brief Error occurred in data None

error link over WAN. RPA is
unable to transfer
replicated data to other
cluster. Problem has
been corrected

16006 RPA Brief RPA was disconnected None

error from the RPA cluster.
Connection has been
restored

16007 RPA Brief All RPAs were None

error disconnected from the
RPA cluster. Problem
has been corrected

16008 RPA Brief RPA was down. None

error Problem has been
corrected

16009 RPA Brief Link was in high load but Due to heavy I/O activity, a link If high load persists, consider
error has now returned to entered a high load state in order running the balance_load
normal operation to prevent I/O failures on that link. command and applying the load
The link has since exited the high balancing recommendation, or
load state, and has returned to manually modifying the preferred
normal operation. The following RPA of each group according to
are among the possible causes of the recommendation. Check for
the high load: RPA is unable to scheduled activities in your
handle the large volume of environment. When schedule
incoming data. (RPA performance permits, run
statistics are presented in the detect_bottlenecks for the
Release Notes that accompany consistency group in which the
each RecoverPoint product high load condition was detected.
release.) Journal reaches capacity, If relevant, consider enabling fast

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 311

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

because the rate of the first-time initialization (for details,

distribution process consistently see RecoverPoint Administrator’s
lags behind the rate of incoming Guide).
data to the copy journal. WAN is
too slow to handle the data rate.
Compression for WAN
optimization is too high, such that
the RPA is unable to handle the
volume of incoming data. Peak I/O
activity in the SAN causes a
temporary bottleneck in the
environment. This can be
considered normal behavior, and
does not necessarily require user
action.

16010 RPA Brief Journal error occurred. None

error Problem has been
corrected -- full sweep
required

16011 RPA Brief Briefly image access log Problem has been corrected.
error or virtual buffer was full

16012 RPA Brief Briefly unable to enable Problem has been corrected.
error virtual access to image

16013 RPA Brief Was unable to enable None

error access to specified
image. Problem has
been corrected

16014 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
error again RPAs and all splitters and storage
was down. Problem has been
corrected.

16016 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
error again RPAs and all storage was down.
Problem has been corrected.

16022 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between RPA
error again and splitters was briefly down.
Problem has been corrected.

16023 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up None Fibre Channel link between RPA
error again and all splitters and storage was
down. Problem has been
corrected.

16024 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between RPA
error again and all splitters was down.
Problem has been corrected.

312 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

16025 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between RPA
error again and all storage was down. Problem
has been corrected.

16026 RPA Brief Brief RPA and all Error occurred in link to an RPA at
error storage error corrected other cluster(s). Problem has
been corrected.

16027 RPA Brief Brief group(s) volumes All volumes in the consistency
error accessibility error group (or groups) were not
corrected accessible. Problem has been
corrected.

16029 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
error again RPAs and one or more replication
volumes was down. Problem has
been corrected.

16030 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
error again RPAs and one or more journal
volumes was down. Problem has
been corrected.

16031 RPA Brief Brief link error between Error occurred in link between one
error RPA(s) at cluster and all or more RPAs at cluster and all
RPAs at other cluster(s) RPAs at the other cluster(s).
corrected Problem has been corrected.

16032 RPA Brief Brief link error between Error occurred in link between all
Cluster error all RPAs at cluster and RPAs at cluster and all RPAs at
all RPAs at other other cluster(s). Problem has
cluster(s) corrected been corrected.

16033 RPA Brief Brief volume volume was not accessible.

error accessibility error Problem has been corrected.
corrected

16034 RPA Brief Brief write consistency Writes to storage may have
error error corrected occurred without corresponding
writes to RPA. Problem has been
corrected.

16035 RPA Brief Cluster control at other Error occurred in link to cluster
error cluster(s) available leader RPA at other cluster(s).
again Problem has been corrected.

16036 RPA Brief Negotiation of transfer Negotiation of transfer protocol

error protocol successful failed due to network issues in
again TCP layer between clusters.
Problem has been corrected.

16037 RPA Brief Brief group(s) All replication volumes in the

error replication volumes consistency group (or groups)
accessibility error were not accessible. Problem has
corrected been corrected.

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 313

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

16038 RPA Brief Brief group(s) journal All journal volumes in the
error volumes accessibility consistency group (or groups)
error corrected were not accessible. Problem has
been corrected.

16039 RPA Info System ran long resync None

16040 RPA Brief System had detected None

error bad sectors in volume.
Problem has been
corrected

16041 RPA Brief There was a problem None

error writing to volume.
Problem has been
corrected

16042 RPA Brief Splitter write may have None

error failed (while group was
transferring data).
Problem has been
corrected

16043 RPA Brief Splitter writes may have None

error failed

16044 RPA Brief There was a problem None

error with an IP link between
RPAs (in at least in one
direction). Problem has
been corrected

16045 RPA Brief There was a problem None

error with all IP links between
RPAs. Problem has
been corrected

16046 RPA Brief There was a problem None

error with an IP link between
RPAs. Problem has
been corrected

16047 RPA Brief There was a RPA None

error network interface card
(NIC) problem. Problem
has been corrected

16048 RPA Brief Brief unsupported Splitter version was not

error splitter version error supported. Problem has been
corrected corrected.

16049 RPA Info RPA temporarily None

entered maintenance
mode but has since
exited

314 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

16050 RPA Error RecoverPoint had None

dynamically resumed
synchronous replication
to one of the replicas of
this group but has since
started replicating
asynchronously again.
Consequentially the
group has been
initialized twice. During
initialization data was
not transferred
synchronously. If this is
not the expected
behavior contact
Customer Support

16057 RPA Info Brief reservation None

Cluster conflicts on group
volumes

16058 RPA Brief Brief connectivity None

error problem between
splitter and RPA

16059 RPA Brief Brief connectivity None

error problem between all
group volumes and RPA

16060 RPA Brief Brief connectivity None

error problem between group
journal volumes and
RPA

16061 RPA Brief Brief connectivity None

error problem between group
replication volumes and
RPA

16062 RPA Brief Brief connectivity None

error problem between group
replication volume and
RPA

16063 RPA Brief Brief connectivity None

error problem between group
journal volume and RPA

16072 RPA Brief Fibre Channel is back up Fibre channel link between RPAs
error again was down but problem has been
corrected and the link is back up
again.

16073 RPA Brief Brief connectivity None

error problem between

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 315

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

repository volume and

RPA

16074 RPA Brief FC link between RPAs None

error and repository volume
restored

16075 RPA Brief Brief control issues None

Cluster error between volume and
splitter corrected

16076 RPA Brief Brief control issues None

Cluster error between group and
splitter corrected

16077 RPA Brief Brief control issues None

Cluster error between storage and
splitter corrected

16078 RPA Brief Brief splitter A temporary splitter No user action is required.
error communication error communication error occurred,
but the problem has since been
corrected. To ensure consistency
between the copy and production,
initialization or full sweep will
follow.

16080 RPA Brief Internal process The cause of this problem may be: To determine the cause of this
error communication problem Failure of a RecoverPoint process problem, collect logs for the
- Disconnection between internal period when the event occurred,
RecoverPoint processes. and contact Customer Support.

16081 RPA Brief Internal process The cause of this problem may be: To determine the cause of this
error communication problem Failure of a RecoverPoint process problem, collect logs for the
- Disconnection between internal period when the event occurred,
RecoverPoint processes. and contact Customer Support.

16082 RPA Brief Internal process The cause of this problem may be: To determine the cause of this
error communication problem Failure of a RecoverPoint process problem, collect logs for the
briefly resolved - Disconnection between internal period when the event occurred,
RecoverPoint processes. and contact Customer Support.

16083 RPA Brief Communications with Communications with a Symmetrix If this recurs frequently, contact
error Symmetrix director director failed briefly and has now Customer Support.
restored again been restored

16085 RPA Warning Brief RPA power supply None Check electrical power to both
off failure resolved power supplies. If problem
persists, contact Customer
Support.

16087 RPA Warning Brief generic hardware None Contact Customer Support.
off failure resolved

16088 Array Brief RPA has lost connection None None

error temporarily to specific
array

316 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

16089 Array Brief The RPA cluster has None None

error lost connection
temporarily to all
volumes and splitters on
the array

16090 Site Brief The RPA cluster has None None

error lost connection
temporarily to specific
host

16091 Site Brief ESX was down None None

error temporarily

16092 Group Brief RPA has lost connection None None

error temporarily to the VM

16093 Group Brief RPA cluster has lost None None

error connection temporarily
to the VM

16094 Group Brief VM was powered down None None

error temporarily

16095 Site Brief RPA has lost connection None None

error temporarily to data
store

16096 Site Brief RPA cluster has lost None None

error connection temporarily
to data store

16097 Site Brief RPA cluster has lost None None

error connection temporarily
to all data stores

16098 Site Brief RPA has lost connection None None

error to all data stores
temporarily

18001 RPA Error Splitter problem, which None

was considered to have
been corrected, has
reoccurred

18002 RPA Error Error occurred in all None

links to all other
clusters. Problem was
temporarily corrected,
but has since returned

18003 RPA Error Error occurred in link to None

an RPA at other
cluster(s). Problem was
temporarily corrected,
but has since returned

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 317

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

18004 RPA Error Error in data link. All Due to communication failure over
RPAs at cluster are the WAN link, data transfer
unable to transfer between the clusters has stopped.
replicated data to other
cluster(s). Problem was
temporarily corrected,
but has since returned

18005 RPA Error RPA is unable to None

transfer replicated data
to other cluster. Data
link was temporarily
restored, but problem
has returned

18006 RPA Error Connection of RPA to None

the RPA cluster was
temporarily restored but
problem has returned

18007 RPA Error All RPAs were None

temporarily restored to
the RPA cluster but
problem has returned

18008 RPA Error RPA was temporarily up None

but problem has
returned -- RPA is down

18009 RPA Error Group temporarily None

exited high load but
problem has returned

18010 RPA Error Journal error was None

temporarily corrected
but problem has
returned

18011 RPA Error Image access log or None

virtual buffer was
temporarily no longer
full and writing by hosts
at copy was re-enabled
-- but problem has
returned

18012 RPA Error Virtual access to image None

was temporarily enabled
but problem has
returned

18013 RPA Error Access to image was None

temporarily enabled but
problem has returned

318 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

18014 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between all
again RPAs and all splitters and storage
was temporarily restored but
problem has returned

18016 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between all
again splitters and all storage was
temporarily restored but problem
has returned.

18022 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link that was down
again between RPA and splitters or
storage volumes (or both) was
temporarily restored but problem
has returned.

18023 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between RPA
again and all storage was temporarily
restored but problem has
returned.

18024 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between RPA
again and all splitters was temporarily
restored but problem has
returned.

18025 RPA Error Fibre Channel is back Fibre Channel link between RPA
down again and all storage was temporarily
restored but problem has
returned.

18026 RPA Error Error occurred in link to None

an RPA at other
cluster(s). Problem was
temporarily corrected,
but has since returned

18027 RPA Error Access to all volumes in None

the consistency group
(or groups) was
temporarily restored but
problem has returned

18029 RPA Error Fibre Channel is back Fibre Channel link between all
down again RPAs and one or more user
volumes was temporarily restored
but problem has returned

18030 RPA Error Fibre Channel is back up Fibre Channel link between all
again RPAs and one or more journal
volumes was temporarily restored
but problem has returned

18031 RPA Error Error occurred in link None

between one or more
RPAs at cluster and all

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 319

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

RPAs at the other

cluster(s). Problem was
temporarily corrected,
but has since returned

18032 RPA Error Error occurred in link None

Cluster between all RPAs at
cluster and all RPAs at
other cluster(s).
Problem was
temporarily corrected,
but has since returned

18033 RPA Error Access to volume was None

temporarily restored but
problem has returned

18034 RPA Error Replication consistency None

in writes to storage and
writes to RPAs was
temporarily restored but
problem may have
returned

18035 RPA Error Cluster control at other Error occurred in link to cluster
cluster(s) unavailable leader RPA at other cluster(s).
again Problem was temporarily
corrected, but has since returned.

18037 RPA Error Access to all replication None

volumes in the
consistency group (or
groups) has been
temporarily restored,
but problem has
returned

18038 RPA Error Access to all journal None

volumes in the
consistency group (or
groups) was temporarily
restored but problem
has returned

18039 RPA Warning Long resync was None

completed but has now
restarted

18040 RPA Error User marked volume as None

OK but bad sectors
problem persists

18041 RPA Error Problem writing to None

volume was corrected,
but has recurred

320 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

18042 RPA Error Synchronization had None

restored any failed
writes in group but
problem has returned

18043 RPA Error Internal problem None

18044 RPA Error Problem with IP link None

between RPAs (in at
least in one direction)
was corrected but
problem has returned

18045 RPA Error Problem with IP link None

between RPAs (in at
least in one direction)
was corrected but
problem has returned

18046 RPA Error Problem with IP link None

between RPAs was
corrected but problem
has returned

18047 RPA Error RPA network interface None

card (NIC) problem was
corrected but problem
has returned

18049 RPA Info RPA temporarily exited None

maintenance mode but
has since re-entered

18050 RPA Error off RecoverPoint had None

dynamically resumed
synchronous replication
to one of the replicas of
this group but has since
started replicating
asynchronously again.
Consequentially the
group has been
initialized twice. During
initialization data was
not transferred
synchronously. If this is
not the expected
behavior contact
Customer Support

18057 RPA Info Reservation conflicts None

Cluster from group replication
volumes were briefly
fixed

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 321

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

18058 RPA Error Splitter to RPA None

connectivity error has
returned

18059 RPA Error Connectivity problems None

between all group
volumes and RPA were
briefly corrected

18060 RPA Error Connectivity problems None

between group journal
volumes and RPA were
briefly corrected

18061 RPA Error Connectivity problems None

between group user
volumes and RPA were
briefly corrected

18062 RPA Error Connectivity problems None

between group user
volume and RPA were
briefly corrected

18063 RPA Error Connectivity problems None

between group journal
volume and RPA were
briefly corrected

18072 RPA Error off Fibre Channel is down Fibre channel link between RPAs
again was temporarily restored but the
problem has returned and the link
is back down again.

18073 RPA Error Connectivity between None

repository volume and
RPA restored

18074 RPA Error Fibre Channel is down Fibre Channel link between all
again RPAs and repository volume was
temporarily restored but problem
has returned.

18075 RPA Error Control issues between None

Cluster volume and splitter
corrected

18076 RPA Error Control issues between None

Cluster group and splitter
corrected

18077 RPA Error Control issues between None

Cluster storage and splitter
corrected

18078 RPA Error Splitter communication The cluster control was To ensure data integrity, it is
error returned temporarily able to communicate highly recommended that any

322 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

with the splitter, but since then, it snapshots created in the past five
has lost communication with the minutes are not selected for
splitter again. failover.
- To ensure consistency between
the copy and production, transfer
will be paused. When the system
re-starts transfer, an initialization
or full sweep will follow.

18080 RPA Error Internal process The cause of this problem may be: To determine the cause of this
communication problem Failure of a RecoverPoint process problem, collect logs for the
- Disconnection between internal period when the event occurred,
RecoverPoint processes. and contact Customer Support.

18081 RPA Error Internal process The cause of this problem may be: To determine the cause of this
communication problem Failure of a RecoverPoint process problem, collect logs for the
- Disconnection between internal period when the event occurred,
RecoverPoint processes. and contact Customer Support.

18082 RPA Error Internal process The cause of this problem may be: To determine the cause of this
communication problem Failure of a RecoverPoint process problem, collect logs for the
- Disconnection between internal period when the event occurred,
RecoverPoint processes. and contact Customer Support.

18083 RPA Error Communication with After a brief recovery, Check for communication failure,
Symmetrix director communications with a Symmetrix port failure, faulty zoning, or
failed again director has failed again. configuration errors.

18085 RPA Brief RPA power supply None

warning failure is back

18087 RPA Brief Generic hardware None

warning failure is back again

18088 Array Error RPA has restored None None

connection temporarily
to specific array

18089 Array Error The RPA cluster has None None

restored connection
temporarily to all
volumes and splitters on
the array

18090 Site Error The RPA cluster has None None

lost connection
temporarily to specific
host

18091 Site Error ESX was up temporarily None None

18092 Group Error RPA has restored None None

connection to the VM
temporarily

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 323

Events

Table 54 Detailed scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

18093 Group Error RPA cluster has None None

restored connection
temporarily to the VM

18094 Group Error VM was powered up None None

temporarily

18095 Site Error RPA has restored None None

connection temporarily
to data store

18096 Site Error RPA cluster has None None

restored connection
temporarily to data
store

18097 Site Error RPA cluster has None None

restored connection
temporarily to all data
stores

18098 Site Error RPA has restored None None

connection to all data
stores temporarily

Advanced events
The following table contains the Normal scope events that are issued by the RecoverPoint system.

Table 55 Advanced scope events

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

2004 RPA Info Repository volume None

Cluster created

2005 RPA Info Repository volume None

Cluster removed

2006 RPA Info Splitter(s) added None

Cluster

2007 RPA Info Splitter(s) removed None

Cluster

3003 RPA Warning Stopping a system None

process

3004 RPA Info Starting a system None

process

3009 RPA Warning A system process None

stopped

324 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide

 Events

Table 55 Advanced scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

3010 RPA Warning A system process None

stopped

3031 RPA Warning An internal process None

restarted

3032 RPA Info An internal process None

restarted

3034 RPA Info Negotiating transfer None

protocol

3035 RPA Info An internal process None

restarted

4005 Group Info Negotiating transfer None

protocol

4013 RPA Info Negotiating transfer None

protocol

4013 RPA Info Negotiating transfer None

protocol

4014 Group Info Negotiating transfer None

protocol

4050 Group Info Enabling access to None

image

4052 Group Warning Enabling access to None

image

4072 Group Info Journal cleared None

4073 Group Warning Journal cleared None

4074 Group Error Journal cleared None

4075 Group Info Journal available None

4076 Group Info Adding volume(s) None

4077 Group Info Removing volume(s) None

4092 Group Info Accessing image Writing by hosts to the accessed

image has been enabled.

4093 Group Info Undoing writes to image None

access log

4094 Group Info Writes to image access None

log have been undone

4096 Group Info Image access log has None

been written to storage

4100 RPA Info Group created Creating a new group modifies the To balance the write load across
Cluster load distribution across RPAs. all RPAs run the balance_load

Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide 325

Events

Table 55 Advanced scope events (continued)

ID Topic Level Summary More Details User Action

CLI command in seven days and

apply the recommendation.

4101 RPA Info Group removed None

Cluster

4102 Group Info Journal volume(s) None

removed

4103 Group Info Journal volume(s) None

added

4104 Group Info Group started accepting None

writes

4105 Group Info Group stopped None

accepting writes

5000 Splitter Info Volume(s) attached to None

splitter(s)

5001 Splitter Info Volume(s) detached None

from splitter(s)

5049 Splitter Warning Splitter write to RPA None

failed

10000 RPA Info Analyzing changes in None

system

10001 RPA Info System is stable System changes have occurred.

System is now stable.

10002 RPA Info Issuing intermediate System activity has not stabilized
report and therefore, an intermediate
report is being issued.

10101 RPA Error Unrecognised system Cause of system activity unclear. To obtain more information filter
activity events using Detailed scope.

10102 RPA Info Internal changes Cluster control recorded internal

occurred changes that do not impact
system operation.

10201 RPA Info Settings have changed None

10202 RPA Info System changes at System changes have occurred at For details of the system changes,
other cluster the another cluster. refer to the event log at the other
cluster(s).

12042 RPA Error Splitter write may have Splitter write may have failed
failed during transfer (while group was transferring
data). Synchronization will be
required.

326 Dell EMC RecoverPoint Administrator's Guide